This is a modern-English version of American Hand Book of the Daguerreotype, originally written by Humphrey, S. D. (Samuel Dwight).
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
![[Illustration]](images/titlepage.gif)
This etext was created by Gregory Walker, Austin, Texas, for the Digital
Daguerreian Archive Project.
Page numbers explicitly referred to in
the text are marked at their beginning by “[page ##]” on a separate line.
I hope this etext inspires a wider interest in the origins of photography and
in the modern practice of the Daguerreian Art.
This e-text was created by Gregory Walker, Austin, Texas, for the Digital Daguerreian Archive Project.
Page numbers mentioned in the text are marked at their beginning by “[page ##]” on a separate line. I hope this e-text sparks a greater interest in the history of photography and in the contemporary practice of Daguerreian Art.
[Updater’s note: In this version, the above page numbering convention has been replaced by “{##}” sequences placed in line with the surrounding text.]
[Updater’s note: In this version, the above page numbering convention has been replaced by “{##}” sequences placed in line with the surrounding text.]
AMERICAN HAND BOOK
OF THE
DAGUERREOTYPE
GIVING
THE MOST APPROVED AND CONVENIENT
METHODS FOR PREPARING
THE CHEMICALS, AND
THE COMBINATIONS USED IN THE ART.
CONTAINING THE
DAGUERREOTYPE, ELECTROTYPE,
AND VARIOUS OTHER
PROCESSES EMPLOYED IN TAKING
HELIOGRAPHIC IMPRESSIONS.
BY S. D. HUMPHREY
FIFTH EDITION
NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED BY S. D. HUMPHREY
37 LISPENARD STREET
1858
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1858,
by S. D.
HUMPHREY, In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court
of the
Southern District of New York.
To J. GURNEY, WHOSE PROFESSIONAL SKILL, SCIENTIFIC ACCURACY,
AND
ENERGETIC PERSEVERANCE, HAVE WON FOR HIM UNIVERSAL ESTEEM,
THIS WORK
IS MOST RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED.
PREFACE.
There is not an Amateur or practical Daguerreotypist, who has not felt the want of a manual—Hand Book, giving concise and reliable information for the processes, and preparations of the Agents employed in his practice.
There isn't an amateur or practical daguerreotypist who hasn't felt the need for a manual—a handbook—that provides clear and trustworthy information about the processes and preparations of the materials used in their work.
Since portraits by the Daguerreotype are at this time believed to be more durable than any other style of “Sun-drawing,” the author has hit upon the present as being an appropriate time for the introduction of the Fifth Edition of this work. The earlier edition having a long since been wholly; exhausted, the one now before you is presented.
Since portraits made with the Daguerreotype are currently thought to be more durable than any other type of "Sun-drawing," the author has decided that now is the right time to introduce the Fifth Edition of this work. The earlier edition has long been completely sold out, so here is the new one before you.
The endeavor has been to point out the readiest and most approved Methods of Operation, and condense in its pages; as much practical information as its limits will admit. An extended Preface is unnecessary, since the aim and scope of this work are sufficiently indicated by the title.
The goal has been to highlight the easiest and most accepted ways of working and to include as much practical information as possible within the available space. A lengthy preface isn't needed, as the purpose and focus of this work are clearly conveyed by the title.
S. D. HUMPHREY NEW YORK, 1858.
S. D. HUMPHREY NEW YORK, 1858.
CONTENTS
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate—Buffing the Plate—Coating the Plate—Exposure of the Plate in the Camera—Position Developing the Daguerreotype—Exposure to Mercury—Removing the Coating—Gilding or fixing the Image—Coloring Daguerreotype, . . . . . 18
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate—Buffing the Plate—Coating the Plate—Exposing the Plate in the Camera—Position for Developing the Daguerreotype—Exposing to Mercury—Removing the Coating—Gilding or Fixing the Image—Coloring the Daguerreotype, . . . . . 18
Coloring Back Grounds—Transparent ditto—Gilding Dissolvent—Solution for removing Specks—Solarized Impression—To Purify Water—Cleaning Mercury—Adhesive Paper—Black Stain for Apparatus—Sealing Wax for Bottles—Rouge—Rotten Stone—Potassa Solution—Hyposulphite Solution—Substitute for do.—Gilding Solution—Solution for increasing the Brilliancy of the Daguerreotype—Bleaching Solution;—Cold Gilding—Neutralizing Agents—Buff Dryer—Keeping Buffs in order—Cleaning Buckskins—Reflector for taking Views, . . . . 52
Coloring Backgrounds—Transparent ones—Dissolvent for gilding—Solution for removing spots—Solarized impression—How to purify water—Cleaning mercury—Adhesive paper—Black stain for equipment—Sealing wax for bottles—Blusher—Rotten stone—Potassium solution—Hyposulphite solution—Substitute for it—Gilding solution—Solution for enhancing the brightness of the daguerreotype—Bleaching solution—Cold gilding—Neutralizing agents—Buff dryer—Maintaining buffs—Cleaning buckskins—Reflector for taking pictures, . . . . 52
Bromine and its Compounds—Iodine and its Compounds—Chlorine and its Compounds—Cyanide of Potassium—Hyposulphite of Soda—Hyphosulphite of Gold—Nitric Acid—Nitro-Muriatic Acid—Hydrochloric Acid—Hydrofluoric Acid—Sulphuric Acid—Accelerating Substances—Liquid Sensitives—Dry Sensitives, etc., etc., . . . . . 72
Bromine and its Compounds—Iodine and its Compounds—Chlorine and its Compounds—Potassium Cyanide—Sodium Hyposulfite—Gold Hyposulfite—Nitric Acid—Nitro-Muriatic Acid—Hydrochloric Acid—Hydrofluoric Acid—Sulfuric Acid—Accelerating Substances—Liquid Sensitives—Dry Sensitives, etc., etc., . . . . . 72
Light—Optics—Solar Spectrum—Decomposition of Light—Light, Heat, and Actinism—Blue Paper and Color for the Walls of the Operating Room—Proportions of Light, Heat and Actinism composing a Sunbeam—Refraction—Reflection—Lenses—Copying Spherical Aberration—Chromatic Aberration, . . . 131
Light—Optics—Solar Spectrum—Breaking Down Light—Light, Heat, and Actinism—Blue Paper and Wall Colors for the Operating Room—Components of Light, Heat, and Actinism in a Sunbeam—Refraction—Reflection—Lenses—Replicating Spherical Aberration—Chromatic Aberration, . . . 131
To make Plates for the Daguerreotype—Determining the Time of Exposure in the Camera—Instantaneous Process for Producing Daguerreotype—Galvanizing the Daguerreotype Plate—Silvering Solution—Daguerreotype without Mercury—Management of Chemicals—Hints and Cautions—Electrotyping—Crayon Daguerreotypes—Illuminated Daguerreotypes—Natural Colors in Heliography—Multiplying Daguerreotypes on one Plate—Deposit in Gilding—Practical Hints on the Daguerreotype, . . . 149
To create plates for the daguerreotype—Figuring out the exposure time in the camera—Instant method for making daguerreotypes—Galvanizing the daguerreotype plate—Silvering solution—Daguerreotype without mercury—Handling chemicals—Tips and warnings—Electrotyping—Crayon daguerreotypes—Illuminated daguerreotypes—Natural colors in heliography—Creating multiple daguerreotypes on one plate—Gilding deposits—Practical tips on the daguerreotype, . . . 149
An Account of Wolcott and Johnson’s Early experiments in the Daguerreotype, . . . 188
An Account of Wolcott and Johnson’s Early Experiments in the Daguerreotype, . . . 188
AMERICAN HAND-BOOK of THE DAGUERREOTYPE.
CHAPTER I.
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate—Buffing the Plate—Coating the Plate—Exposure of the Plate in the Camera—Position—Developing the Daguerreotype—Exposure to Mercury—Removing the Coating—Gilding or fixing the Image—Coloring Daguerreotype.
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate—Buffing the Plate—Coating the Plate—Exposing the Plate in the Camera—Position—Developing the Daguerreotype—Exposing to Mercury—Removing the Coating—Gilding or Fixing the Image—Coloring the Daguerreotype.
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate.—I shall endeavor to present to the reader the process I have found productive of good and satisfactory results, presenting the same in a clear and concise manner, so that any one, by following the various manipulations given, will be enabled to succeed. If there is any one part of the process in Daguerreotype in which operators fail more than all others, it is in not properly preparing the plate. It has truly been said that it would take a volume to describe all the methods that have been suggested for polishing the plate.
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate.—I will try to share with the reader the process I've found to give good and satisfying results, presenting it clearly and concisely so that anyone can follow the steps and succeed. If there's one part of the Daguerreotype process where operators struggle more than in others, it's in properly preparing the plate. It's been rightly said that it would take a whole book to cover all the methods proposed for polishing the plate.
I shall confine myself to the following description, which has been successfully practised, also most generally adopted by our operators, and I believe equal, if not superior to any other method, yet at the same time it is not of so much importance what particular method is employed, so that it be thoroughly and skillfully carried out.
I will stick to the following description, which has been successfully used and is widely adopted by our operators. I believe it's just as good, if not better, than any other method. However, what's more important is not the specific method chosen, but that it is carried out thoroughly and skillfully.
There is a general tendency with beginners to slight this operation; hence the necessity of adopting a system which precludes the possibility of doing so. During many years’ study and practice in the art, I have tried numerous methods and substances for the better accomplishment of the end in view, and have finally settled upon the following, as being (so far as experience allows me to Judge) the modus operandi, best suited to all circumstances; under no condition would I approve of a method less rigorous or precise.
There’s a common tendency among beginners to overlook this process; that’s why it’s important to use a system that makes that impossible. After many years of studying and practicing the craft, I have experimented with various methods and materials to achieve the desired outcome and have ultimately decided on the following approach, which I believe (as much as my experience allows me to evaluate) is the best way to handle all situations; I would never endorse a method that’s less strict or precise.
The operator being provided with a bottle of finely prepared rotten stone, cover the mouth of the bottle with a piece of thick paper, this perforated with a pin so that the rotten stone can be dusted on the plate. Fasten the plate on the holder, take the rotten stone (Becker’s can always be depended upon), and dust on lightly until the surface is freely covered; now drop on the plate’s surface a few drops of an alcoholic solution.[1]
The operator receives a bottle of finely ground rotten stone and covers the mouth of the bottle with a thick piece of paper that has a pinhole in it, allowing the rotten stone to be sprinkled onto the plate. Secure the plate onto the holder, take the rotten stone (you can always count on Becker’s), and lightly dust it on until the surface is completely covered; then, add a few drops of an alcoholic solution onto the plate's surface.[1]
[1] This solution is composed of equal parts of alcohol and water, for the summer, and in winter three parts alcohol to one of water; a few drops of potassa solution may be added, and is known to have a decided effect upon the plate.
[1] This solution is made up of equal parts alcohol and water for the summer, and in winter, it's three parts alcohol to one part water; a few drops of potassium solution can be added, and it is known to have a significant effect on the plate.
Take a patch of Canton flannel; in order to prevent the moisture from the hand it should have a thick, firm texture: with this rub the plate in circles across, then back covering one-half of the former row of circles in each crossing until you have gone over the plate and back to the point of beginning, occupying at least half a minute in the operation, for a small plate, and so in proportion for the other sizes.
Take a piece of Canton flannel; to keep moisture from your hand, it should have a thick, firm texture. Use this to rub the plate in circular motions, then back again, covering half of the previous row of circles with each pass until you've gone all over the plate and returned to the starting point. Spend at least half a minute on this, for a small plate, and adjust the time accordingly for larger sizes.
Care should be observed to keep the patch wet with the alcoholic solution forming a paste on the surface of the plate; the motion of the hand should be brisk and free, not hurried, and the pressure about equal to that of a pound weight. When the cotton is disposed to adhere to the plate, and slip from under the finger, spread the fore and middle fingers a little apart, then pressing down, bring them together in such a manner as to form a fold in the cloth between them, by which means you will hold it perfectly secure.
Care should be taken to keep the patch damp with the alcohol solution, creating a paste on the surface of the plate; the hand movements should be quick and relaxed, not rushed, and the pressure should be about the same as a one-pound weight. If the cotton tends to stick to the plate and slip out from under your finger, spread your index and middle fingers a little apart, then press down and bring them together in a way that creates a fold in the cloth between them, which will keep it perfectly secure.
Avoid wetting the fingers, and should they perspire, wipe them often, as the moisture penetrating the cotton and coming in contact with the plate, would cause streaks it would be difficult to remove. I will here remark that many operators use much more cotton flannel than there is need of. I have found in my experience that a single patch, about one and half inch square, will be better for cleaning a number of plates than a new piece for every plate. This is the case for the wet, and for the dryrubbing two or three pieces will be found to answer. Thus with four or five cloths a dozen plates may be prepared.
Avoid getting your fingers wet, and if they do sweat, wipe them often because moisture can soak into the cotton and touch the plate, causing streaks that are hard to remove. I want to point out that many operators use way more cotton flannel than necessary. In my experience, a single patch about one and a half inches square works better for cleaning multiple plates than using a new piece for each plate. This applies to both wet and dry cleaning; two or three pieces will do the job. So, with four or five cloths, you can prepare a dozen plates.
Some operators use prepared cotton, and think it more convenient than the flannel. This may be had prepared free from seeds and in a very perfect state, if wished.
Some operators use prepped cotton and find it more convenient than flannel. This can be obtained clean and in a very perfect state, if desired.
In going over the plate, great care should be observed, in touching its surface as equally as possible. The greatest care should be taken neither to touch the plate with the fingers, nor that part of the cotton flannel which is to come in contact with its surface; take a clean piece of flannel by one corner, snap it smartly to free it from dust and loose fibres, lay it face-side upward, dust on a little fine rotten stone; with this, polish around, or across, or in circles, lightly and briskly, passing gradually over the whole surface of the plate, as was done before with the wet. The plate should now exhibit a bright, clear, uniform surface, with a strong metallic lustre, perfectly free from any appearance of film; if not, the last polished should be continued until the effect is obtained, and when once obtained, the plate is ready for buffing.
In handling the plate, great care should be taken to touch its surface as evenly as possible. Make sure not to touch the plate with your fingers or the part of the cotton flannel that will contact its surface. Take a clean piece of flannel by one corner, snap it sharply to remove dust and loose fibers, and lay it face up. Dust a little fine rotten stone on it; then, polish around, across, or in circles, lightly and quickly, gradually covering the entire surface of the plate, just like you did before with the wet method. The plate should now have a bright, clear, uniform surface with a strong metallic shine, completely free from any film. If it doesn't, keep polishing until the desired effect is achieved, and once it's achieved, the plate is ready for buffing.
Buffing the Plate.—There are a variety of ways and means employed in this part of the operation. Some choose wheels, and others prefer the ordinary hand-buff. I have been unable to detect any peculiar advantage in the use of the wheel except in the facility of the operation; no doubt, however, but there is a saving of time, particularly in the preparation of the larger plates. For general use, we have not seen a wheel better adapted for this purpose than the one patented by Messrs. Lewis.
Buffing the Plate.—There are several methods used in this part of the operation. Some people use wheels, while others prefer the regular hand buff. I haven't noticed any specific advantage to using the wheel except that it's easier to operate; however, it definitely saves time, especially when preparing larger plates. For general use, we haven't found a wheel better suited for this purpose than the one patented by Messrs. Lewis.
It is generally well to use a hand-buff before placing the plate on the wheel; this is in order to prevent, as far as possible, the dust or other substance that may be on the surface of the plate from coming in contact with the cover of the wheel. I will here follow out the use of the hand-buffs (two are necessary) as they are mostly used.
It’s usually a good idea to use a hand-buff before putting the plate on the wheel. This helps to keep any dust or other material on the plate’s surface from touching the wheel cover as much as possible. Here, I will explain how to use the hand-buffs (you need two) since they are typically used this way.
In the morning, before using the buffs, brush both as clean as possible, in order to free them from dust; then with the blade of a pair of shears, held perpendicular, rub the buffs from end to end; then knock them both together in order to free them from all dust or other substances, occasionally exposing them to the sun or to the fire.
In the morning, before using the buffs, brush both as clean as you can to remove any dust. Then, with the blade of a pair of shears held straight up, rub the buffs from one end to the other. Next, knock them both together to shake off any dust or other particles, and occasionally expose them to the sun or fire.
With one of the buffs (reserving the finest and softest for the last operation), powder its face with fine rouge and brush off slightly, leaving only the finest particles in it. Every operator should have two plate-holders; one for cleaning and one for buffing the plate; for when using only one, the rotten stone is liable to get on the buff and scratch the plate.
With one of the buffs (saving the best and softest for the last job), dust its surface with fine rouge and lightly brush it off, leaving only the tiniest particles behind. Every worker should have two plate-holders; one for cleaning and one for buffing the plate; because if you use just one, the rotten stone can get on the buff and scratch the plate.
Rest the fingers of the left hand on the back of the buff, near the farther end, with about the same pressure as in cleaning, while with the right you bear on the handle to correspond, and give the buff a free, easy, horizontal motion, passing it very nearly the whole length over the plate each time. Continue this operation in such a manner that the plate will on all parts of its surface have received an equal amount of polish. This buff once well filled with polish, add but little after, say a small quantity once in two or three plates. The polish as well as the buffs must be kept perfectly dry.
Rest your left fingers on the back of the buff, near the far end, applying about the same pressure you would when cleaning. With your right hand, hold the handle firmly, and move the buff in a smooth, horizontal motion, covering almost the entire length of the plate each time. Keep doing this until every part of the plate has an even polish. Once the buff is well saturated with polish, you only need to add a small amount every two or three plates. Both the polish and the buffs must be kept completely dry.
The second buff should always be in the best order, and if this is the case, but little polish after the first need be used. Much depends upon the last finish of the surface of the plate, and as a fine impression is desired in the same ratio, the operator must exercise care and skill in this operation. Some buff the smaller plates on the hands, by resting them on the fingers in such a manner that the buff cannot touch them; some by holding the edges with thumb and little finger, with the remaining fingers under, or on the back; and others buff on the holder. When this last method is adopted, it requires the greatest caution to prevent the dust from getting on the buff. The holder should be wiped clean.
The second buff should always be in the best condition, and if that’s the case, only a little polish needs to be used after the first. The final finish of the plate's surface is crucial, and since a fine impression is desired, the operator must be careful and skilled during this process. Some people buff the smaller plates by using their hands, balancing them on their fingers so the buff doesn’t touch them; others hold the edges with their thumb and little finger while supporting it with the other fingers underneath or at the back; and some buff using a holder. When using the holder, it’s essential to be very careful to keep dust off the buff. The holder should be kept clean.
The plate frequently slips off or around, and the buff comes in contact with the bed of the holder. When, however, the operator is so unfortunate as to meet with this mishap, the utmost care must be observed in thoroughly cleaning the buff cover before further buffing. In this last buffing it may be continued as before, except without the application of polish powder to the last buff. Examine the surface occasionally, and buff more lightly towards the close of the operation, using at last the mere weight of the buff. This last buffing should occupy as long a time as the first.
The plate often slips off or moves around, and the buff touches the holder's bed. However, if the operator is unfortunate enough to experience this issue, they must take great care to thoroughly clean the buff cover before continuing to buff. During this final buffing, it can proceed as before, but without adding any polish powder to the last buff. Check the surface periodically, and buff more gently towards the end, using just the weight of the buff. This last buffing should take as much time as the first.
The point to be aimed at is, the production of a surface of such exquisite polish as to be itself invisible, like the surface of a mirror. The secret of producing pictures discernible in any light, lies in this: the more dark, deep and mirror-like the surface of the plate, the more nearly do we approach to perfection.
The goal is to create a surface with such an exquisite polish that it's almost invisible, just like a mirror. The key to producing images that can be seen in any light is this: the darker, deeper, and more mirror-like the surface of the plate, the closer we get to perfection.
In all cases, very light and long continued buffing is productive of the greater success, since by that means a more perfect polish can be obtained.
In all cases, very light and prolonged buffing leads to greater success, as this method achieves a more perfect polish.
The question is often asked, why is it that the plates receive the coating so unevenly? I will answer by saying that it may arise from two causes: the first and most general cause is that those parts of the plate’s surface which will receive the heaviest coating have been more thoroughly polished, and the consequence is that it is more sensitive to the chemical operation; second, and might perhaps be considered a part of the first, the heat of the plate may not be equal in all its parts; this may arise from the heat caused by the friction in buffing. It is a well known fact, with which every observing practitioner is familiar, that a silver plate at a temperature of 45 deg. or less, exposed to the vapors of iodine, is less sensitive and takes a longer time to coat, than when it is at a temperature of 60 deg. or more.
The question often comes up: why do the plates get coated so unevenly? I would say this happens for two main reasons: first, the areas of the plate's surface that will get the thickest coating have been polished more thoroughly, making them more responsive to the chemical process; second, which could be seen as a subset of the first reason, the heat of the plate might not be consistent across its surface. This inconsistency can come from the heat generated during buffing. It's well known among observant practitioners that a silver plate at a temperature of 45 degrees or lower, when exposed to iodine vapors, is less reactive and takes longer to coat compared to when it's at a temperature of 60 degrees or higher.
Whenever a view is to be taken, or any impression which requires the plate to be turned on the side, it should be buffed in the other direction, so that the marks will always be horizontal, when the picture is in position. With the finest possible polish, the plate is ready for the coating box.
Whenever a view needs to be taken, or any impression that requires the plate to be turned on its side, it should be polished in the opposite direction so that the marks will always be horizontal when the picture is aligned. Once it has the best possible polish, the plate is ready for the coating box.
The question is often asked by operators, what is the state of the plate when polished and allowed to stand for a time before using? To meet this point we hare only to consider the silver and the power acting upon it. Pure atmosphere does not act upon silver; but we do not have this about in our operating rooms, as it is more or less charged with sulphurated hydrogen, which soon tarnishes the surface of the plate with a film of brown sulphurate. It is this that sometimes causes the specks which appear on finishing the impression, and are a great annoyance. Hence we see that the plate should be buffed just before receiving the vapor of iodine. Mr Hunt gives his opinion of the use of diluted nitric acid as the best solution for freeing, the surface of the plate; he says:
The question that operators often ask is: what is the condition of the plate after it has been polished and left to sit for a while before use? To address this issue, we only need to think about the silver and the forces acting on it. Pure air doesn’t affect silver, but we don’t have that in our operating rooms since the air is usually mixed with hydrogen sulfide, which quickly tarnishes the surface of the plate with a brown sulfide film. This is sometimes what causes the spots that show up when finishing the impression, which can be very frustrating. Therefore, it’s clear that the plate should be polished just before it’s exposed to iodine vapor. Mr. Hunt shares his view that using diluted nitric acid is the best way to clean the surface of the plate; he says:
“Numerous experiments on plated copper, pure silver plates, and on silvered glass and paper, have convinced me that the first operation of polishing with nitric acid, etc., is essential to the production of the most sensitive surface. All who will take the trouble to examine the subject, will soon be convinced that the acid softens the silver, bringing it to a state in which it is extremely susceptible of being either oxydized or iodized, according as the circumstances may occur of its exposure to the atmosphere or the iodine.”
“Many experiments with plated copper, pure silver plates, and silvered glass and paper have convinced me that the initial polishing with nitric acid, etc., is crucial for creating the most sensitive surface. Anyone who takes the time to look into this will quickly realize that the acid softens the silver, making it very prone to oxidization or iodization, depending on its exposure to the air or iodine.”
I cannot see the objection to this solution; not, however, in general use. Our operators do not find it of sufficient importance to the success of their pictures to accept it, the alcoholic solution being in its nature less objectionable.
I can't see the problem with this solution; at least, not in general practice. Our operators don't think it's important enough for the success of their pictures to go with it, since the alcoholic solution is naturally less objectionable.
I will say here, that a plate submitted to only an ordinary polish is found to contain numberless minute particles of the powder made use of. Should the same plate be buffed for a long time, the polish will nearly all disappear, leaving the cavities in the surface free for the action of agents employed in subsequent operation. For this reason, I find that great amount of polishing powder should not be applied to the last buff, and it is obvious that three buffs can be employed to adventure; the two last should not receive any polishing materials. I have examined a plate that was considered to possess a fine finish, and similar had produced good impressions; these same plates, when subjected to a long and light buffing, would present a surface no finer in appearance to the naked eye; but upon exposure to the solar radiation, would produce a well-defined image in one fourth less time than the plate without the extra buffing.
I want to point out that a plate that only gets a standard polish ends up holding countless tiny particles of the polishing powder used. If the same plate is buffed for a long time, the polish almost completely wears off, leaving the surface cavities available for the actions of agents used in later steps. For this reason, I believe that a large amount of polishing powder shouldn't be used on the final buff, and it's clear that three buffs can be used safely; the last two shouldn’t have any polishing materials. I’ve looked at a plate that was thought to have a fine finish and had produced good impressions; these plates, when lightly buffed for a longer time, wouldn’t look any better to the naked eye. However, when exposed to sunlight, they would create a clear image in one-fourth less time compared to the plate without the extra buffing.
Coating the Plate.—For this purpose our mechanics and artists have provided a simple apparatus called a coating-box, which is so arranged as to be perfectly tight, retaining the vapor of the iodine or accelerators, and at the same time allowing, by means of a slide, the exposure of the plate to these vapors. They can readily be obtained by application to any dealer, all of whom can furnish them.
Coating the Plate.—For this, our technicians and artists have created a simple device called a coating box, designed to be completely airtight, trapping the iodine or accelerator vapors while allowing the plate to be exposed to these vapors through a sliding mechanism. These materials can easily be acquired from any supplier, all of whom can provide them.
The principal difficulty in coating the plate, is that of preserving the exact proportion between the quantity of iodine and bromine, or quick. It is here necessary to say, that hardly any two persons see alike the same degree of color, so as to be enabled to judge correctly the exact tint, i. e. what one might describe as light rose red, might appear to another as bright or cherry red; consequently, the only rule for the student in Daguerreotype, is to study what appears to him to be the particular tint or shade required to aid him to produce the desired result. Practise has proved that but a slight variation in the chemical coating, of the Daguerreotype plate will very materially affect the final result.
The main challenge in coating the plate is maintaining the right balance between the amounts of iodine and bromine, or quick. It's important to note that hardly anyone perceives the same color in exactly the same way; for instance, what one person describes as light rose red might look to another like bright or cherry red. Therefore, the only guideline for someone learning Daguerreotype is to focus on what they see as the specific tint or shade needed to achieve the desired outcome. Experience has shown that even a small change in the chemical coating of the Daguerreotype plate can significantly impact the final result.
The operator will proportion the coating of iodine and bromine or accelerators according to the strength and composition of the latter.
The operator will adjust the amount of iodine and bromine coatings, or accelerators, based on the strength and makeup of the latter.
Experience proves that the common impressions, iodized to a rather light yellow gold tint, and brought by the bromine to a very light, rose color, have their whites very intense, and their deep shades very black. It is also known that if you employ a thicker coating of iodine and apply upon it a proportionate tint of bromine, so as to obtain a deep rose tint, delineations will be less marked, and the image have a softer tone. This effect has been obvious to everyone who has practised the art. Thus I may observe that the light coatings produce strong contrast of light and shade, and that this contrast grows gradually less, until in the very heavy coating it almost wholly disappears. From this it will readily be perceived that the middle shades are the ones to be desired for representing the harmonious blending of the lights and shades.
Experience shows that the common impressions, tinted to a light yellow gold and enhanced by bromine to a very pale rose color, have bright whites and very deep blacks. It’s also known that if you use a thicker layer of iodine and add a proportional amount of bromine for a deeper rose tint, the details will be less defined, and the image will have a softer look. This effect is clear to anyone who has practiced the art. Therefore, I can point out that lighter coatings create a strong contrast between light and shade, and this contrast gradually diminishes until it nearly vanishes with a very heavy coating. From this, it's clear that the medium shades are ideal for achieving a harmonious blend of light and shadow.
Then, if we examine, with respect to strength, or depth of tone, and sharpness of impression, we see that the light coating, produces a very sharp but shallow impression; while the other extreme gives a deep but very dull one. Here, then, are still better reasons for avoiding either extreme. The changes through which the plate passes in coating may be considered a yellow straw color or dark orange yellow, a rose color more or less dark in tint, or red violet, steel blue or indigo, and lastly green. After attaining this latter color, the plate resumes a light yellow tint, and continues to pass successively a second time, with very few exceptions, through all the shades above mentioned.
Then, if we take a look at strength, depth of tone, and sharpness of impression, we notice that a light coating creates a very sharp but shallow effect, while the other extreme results in a deep but very dull one. These observations provide even stronger reasons to steer clear of either extreme. The changes the plate goes through in coating can be seen as a yellow straw color or dark orange yellow, a rose color that ranges from light to dark, red violet, steel blue or indigo, and finally green. After reaching this last color, the plate returns to a light yellow tint and goes through the same process again, with very few exceptions, passing through all the shades mentioned earlier.
I will here present some excellent remarks upon this subject by Mr. Finley. This gentleman says:
I would like to share some great comments on this topic from Mr. Finley. He says:
“It is well known to all who have given much attention to the subject, that an excess of iodine gives the light portions of objects with peculiar strength and clearness, while the darker parts are retarded, as it were, and not brought out by that length of exposure which suffices for the former. Hence, statuary, monuments, and all objects of like character, were remarkably well delineated by the original process of Daguerre; the plate being coated with iodine alone. An excess of bromine, to a certain degree, has the opposite effect; the white portions of the impression appearing of a dull, leaden hue, while those which should be black, or dark, appear quite light. This being the case, I conclude there must be a point between the two extremes where light and dark objects will be in photogenic equilibrium. The great object, therefore, is to maintain, as nearly as possible, a perfect balance between the two elements entering into union to form the sensitive coating of the plate, in order that the lights and shades be truly and faithfully represented, and that all objects, whether light or dark, be made to appear so far conformable to nature, as is consistent with the difference in the photogenic energy of the different colored rays of light. It is this nicely-balanced combination which ensures, in the highest degree, a union of the essential qualities of a fine Daguerreotype, viz., clearness and strength, with softness and purity of tone.
“It is well known to everyone who has paid attention to the topic that too much iodine gives the lighter parts of objects a unique strength and clarity, while the darker areas lag behind and aren’t highlighted as much with the same exposure time. Because of this, statues, monuments, and similar objects were captured particularly well using Daguerre’s original process, where the plate was coated only with iodine. An excess of bromine, to some extent, has the opposite effect; the white parts of the image appear dull and leaden, while those that should be black or dark look quite light. Given this, I conclude there must be a balance point between the two extremes where light and dark objects achieve photogenic equilibrium. Therefore, the main goal is to maintain, as closely as possible, a perfect balance between the two elements that combine to create the sensitive coating of the plate, so that the lights and shades are accurately and faithfully represented, and that all objects, whether light or dark, appear as natural as possible, taking into account the varying photogenic energy of different colored light rays. This finely balanced combination ensures, to the highest degree, a union of the essential qualities of a fine Daguerreotype, namely clarity and strength, along with softness and purity of tone.”
“So far as I know, it is the universal practice of operators to judge of the proportion of iodine and bromine in coating the plate, by two standards of color the one fixed upon for the iodine, the other for the additional coating of bromine. Now I maintain that these alone form a very fallacious standard; first, because the color appears to the eye either lighter or darker, according as there is more or less light by which we inspect the coating; and secondly, because if it occur that we are deceived in obtaining the exact tint for the first coating, we are worse misled in obtaining the second, for if the iodine coating be too light, then an undue proportion of bromine is used in order to bring it to the second standard, and vice versa.”
"As far as I know, it's common practice for operators to measure the ratio of iodine and bromine used in coating the plate by two color standards: one for iodine and the other for the extra bromine layer. I argue that relying solely on these standards is very misleading. First, the color can appear lighter or darker depending on the amount of light when we look at the coating. Second, if we mistakenly choose the wrong shade for the first coating, it only complicates things for the second. If the iodine coating is too light, then too much bromine is used to match the second standard, and the opposite is true as well."
The iodine box should be kept clean and dry. The plate immediately after the last buffing, should be placed over the iodine, and the coating will depend upon the character of the tone of the impression desired. Coating over dry iodine to an orange color, then over the accelerator, to a light rose, and back over iodine one sixth as long as first coating, will produce a fine, soft tone, and is the coating generally used for most accelerators. The plate iodized to a dark orange yellow, or tinged slightly with incipient rose color, coated over the accelerator to a deep rose red, then back over iodine one-tenth as long as at first coating, gives a clear, strong, bold, deep impression.
The iodine box should be kept clean and dry. After the last buffing, the plate should be placed over the iodine, and the coating will depend on the desired tone of the impression. Coating over dry iodine to an orange color, then over the accelerator to a light rose, and back over iodine for one sixth the time of the first coating will create a fine, soft tone, which is the coating commonly used for most accelerators. If the plate is iodized to a dark orange-yellow or slightly tinted with an early rose color, coating over the accelerator to a deep rose red and then back over iodine for one-tenth the time of the first coating will produce a clear, strong, bold, deep impression.
I will here state a singular fact, which is not generally known to the operator. If a plate, coated over the iodine to a rose red, and then exposed to strong dry quick or weak bromine water, so that a change of color can be seen, then recoated over the iodine twice as long as at first coating, it will be found far more sensitive when exposed to the light than when it has been recoated over the iodine one-fourth of the time of the first coating.
I will now present a unique fact that isn't widely recognized by operators. If a plate is coated with iodine until it turns a rose red and then exposed to strong dry air or weak bromine water, resulting in a visible color change, and then recoated with iodine for twice as long as the initial coating, it will be much more sensitive to light than if it had been recoated with iodine for only a quarter of the time of the first coating.
Probably the best accelerating combination is the American compound formerly known as “Gurney’s American compound,” or some of the combinations of bromide of lime. The first is thought to possess perhaps more uniformity in its action than any other combination I have ever used.
Probably the best accelerating combination is the American compound formerly known as “Gurney’s American compound,” or some of the combinations of bromide of lime. The first is thought to have more consistency in its effects than any other combination I have ever used.
The plate once coated should be kept excluded from the light by means of the plate holder for the camera box.
The coated plate should be kept out of the light using the camera box's plate holder.
I will notice one of the principal causes having a tendency to prevent the perfect uniformity of chemical action, between the iodine and silver; hydrogen, or the moisture in the atmosphere, makes a very perceptible barrier. This moisture may arise as the result of the cold, from a want of friction in the buffing of the plate, which, coming in contact with the warmer air, as a writer on this subject says:
I want to point out one of the main reasons that tends to disrupt the perfect uniformity of chemical reactions between iodine and silver: hydrogen, or the moisture in the air, creates a noticeable barrier. This moisture can be caused by cold or a lack of friction while polishing the plate, which then comes into contact with warmer air, as a writer on this topic explains:
“It is well known that as often as bodies, when cold, are exposed to a warmer air, the humidity contained in them is condensed. It is to this effect that we must attribute the difficulty experienced in operating in most cases.” This is corroborated by the results experienced by our operators. So it is seen that the plate should be of a temperature above that of the atmosphere. Mr. Gurney submits his plates to a gentle heat from a spirit lamp just before exposing them to the vapor of iodine. Experience has convinced me that a plate heated to about 80 deg. before being exposed to iodine will present a far better defined image than a plate at a temperature of 50 deg. I account for this by noticing that, at a higher temperature, the plate throws off any larger crystals that might otherwise be deposited, receiving only the finer, thus producing a more perfect chemical combination of iodide of silver. I would call the attention of the operator to this point, as presenting something of interest, and which may direct in a way of accelerating the future operations.
“It’s well-known that when cold objects are exposed to warmer air, the moisture in them condenses. This is why we often face difficulties when operating. Our operators have confirmed this through their experiences. It’s clear that the plate should be warmer than the surrounding air. Mr. Gurney heats his plates with a spirit lamp just before exposing them to iodine vapor. I’ve found that a plate heated to about 80 degrees before exposure to iodine shows a much clearer image than one at 50 degrees. I believe this happens because the higher temperature allows the plate to shed any larger crystals that might otherwise settle, resulting in only the finer ones being deposited, which creates a better chemical reaction of iodide of silver. I’d like to highlight this point for operators, as it could be valuable for improving future processes.”
That the presence of a film of moisture over the plate is a preventive of uniform chemical action, may be readily understood from the fact that iodine is almost insoluble in water, requiring seven thousand parts of water to dissolve one of iodine, or one grain to a gallon of water. Yet its affinities for silver and other substances are so powerful as to prevent its existing in an insulated state, hence we can account for the frequent occurrence of a plate presenting parts of an image over its surface. It is quite evident that those parts of plate’s surface covered with moisture are nothing like as sensitive to the iodine as those parts perfectly free.
That a layer of moisture on the plate prevents consistent chemical action is easy to understand because iodine is almost insoluble in water; it takes seven thousand parts of water to dissolve just one part of iodine, or one grain per gallon. However, iodine has a strong affinity for silver and other substances, preventing it from remaining isolated. This explains why it's common to see parts of an image appearing on the plate's surface. It's clear that the areas of the plate covered in moisture are not nearly as sensitive to iodine as the areas that are completely dry.
Exposure of the plate in the Camera, and Position.—The time of exposure necessary to produce an image upon the Daguerreotype plate, can only be determined by experiment, and requires a liberality of judgment to be exercised on the part of the operator. The constant variation of the light renders it impossible to lay down any exact rule upon this point. Light is not alone to be considered; the amount of coating exercises a deviating influence, also the subjects to be represented are not equally photogenic, some requiring much longer time of exposure than others. This may be easily observed by exposing the plate at the same time to a plaster bust and a piece of black velvet, the first being a much stronger reflector of light than the latter: the time necessary to produce a well developed image of the velvet being about six times longer than that required to produce an equally defined image of plaster. The manner of judging correctly of the time is by the appearance of impression after it has been developed by the mercurial vapors. Should it present a deep blue or black appearance it is solarized or over-timed. This sometimes is to an extent, that a perfect negative is formed, the white being represented black, and the dark light.
Exposure of the plate in the Camera, and Position.—The amount of time needed to expose a Daguerreotype plate to create an image can only be figured out through experimentation and requires good judgment on the part of the operator. The constant changes in light make it impossible to establish a precise rule for this. Light isn’t the only factor; the amount of coating also plays a role, and different subjects vary in how well they capture light. For instance, you can see the difference if you expose the plate simultaneously to a plaster bust and a piece of black velvet. The plaster reflects light much better than the velvet, so getting a well-defined image of the velvet takes about six times longer than for the plaster. To accurately judge exposure time, observe the impression after it’s developed with mercurial vapors. If it looks deep blue or black, it’s over-exposed or solarized. Sometimes, this leads to a perfect negative, where white appears black and dark areas appear light.
An object requiring the particular care and attention of the operator is the proper focus. It is not unfrequently the complaint of sitters that their hands are represented as being magnified and greatly out of proportion with the general figure. This is the case also with the nose and eyes, but in a less degree. As this cannot be wholly remedied, it is desirous to come as near as possible, and in order to do this, it is necessary to present the figure in such a position as to bring it as nearly as possible upon the same plane by making all parts nearly at equal distance from the lenses. This must be done by the sitter inclining the head and bust formed to a natural, easy position, and placing the hands closely to the body, thus preserving a propel proportion, and giving a lively familiarity to the general impression. It is not an uncommon fault among our less experienced operators to give a front view of the face of nearly every individual, regardless of any particular form, and this is often insisted upon by the sitter,[2] who seems to think the truth of the picture exists principally in the eyes staring the beholder full in the face.
An object that requires the operator's special care and attention is the right focus. It's not uncommon for sitters to complain that their hands appear enlarged and out of proportion with the rest of their body. This also happens with the nose and eyes, but to a lesser extent. Since this can't be completely fixed, the goal is to get as close as possible. To achieve this, the figure should be positioned to align closely on the same plane, ensuring all parts are roughly the same distance from the lenses. This should be done by having the sitter tilt their head and upper body into a natural, relaxed position and keep their hands close to their body, maintaining proper proportions and giving a lively, familiar impression overall. A common mistake among less experienced operators is to give a front view of nearly every individual's face, ignoring their unique shapes, which sitters often insist upon. The sitter seems to believe that the essence of the picture lies primarily in the eyes staring directly at the viewer.
[2] I might here picture some curious scenes experienced by our operators Every one is familiar with a certain class of our community whose ideas of the importance of a free and easy position of the body are too closely confined with stays, attention to toilet, tightly fitting dress coats and the like, to admit of being represented as if nature had endowed them with least possible power of flexibility. To such we would suggest the following, to be well learned and retained in the mind while presenting themselves before the Daguerreotype camera:
[2] I might describe some interesting scenarios experienced by our operators. Everyone knows a certain segment of our society whose views on the importance of a relaxed and natural body position are so limited that they focus too much on corsets, grooming, fitted dress coats, and similar attire, making them seem as if nature gave them very little ability to move freely. To those individuals, we would recommend the following to remember well while posing in front of the Daguerreotype camera:
“The experience of one who has often been Daguerreotyped, is, to let the operator have his own way.”
“The experience of someone who has often had their picture taken with a daguerreotype is to let the photographer do their thing.”
Nothing, in many instances, can be more out of place in a Daguerreotype portrait than this, for let a man with a thin, long, defeated-politician-face, be represented by a directly front view, we have, to all appearances, increased the width of the face to such an extent as to reveal it flat and broad, losing the characteristic point by which it would be the most readily recognized. The method we should adopt in taking the likeness of such an individual as above, would be to turn the face from the camera, so as to present the end of the nose and the prominence of the cheek bone equally distant from the lenses, and then focusing on the corner of the eye towards the nose, we cannot in many cases, fail to produce an image with the lips, chin, hair, eyes and forehead in the minutest possible definition.
Nothing can feel more out of place in a Daguerreotype portrait than this. If a man with a thin, long, defeated-politician face is photographed from straight on, it makes the width of his face seem exaggerated and flat, losing the distinctive features that make him recognizable. The better approach for capturing a likeness of someone like this is to angle their face away from the camera, so that the end of the nose and the prominence of the cheekbone are equally positioned from the lenses. By focusing on the corner of the eye towards the nose, we can often create an image where the lips, chin, hair, eyes, and forehead are captured with incredible detail.
It should be the study of every operator to notice the effect of the lights and shades while arranging the sitter, and at the same time be very particular to give ease in the position.
It should be the responsibility of every operator to pay attention to the effects of light and shadow while positioning the sitter, and at the same time, ensure that the pose is comfortable.
No matter how successful the chemical effect may have been, should the image appear stiff and monument-like, all is lost. “In the masterpiece, grace and elegance must be combined.”
No matter how successful the chemical effect might be, if the image looks stiff and lifeless, then it’s all for nothing. “In the masterpiece, grace and elegance need to come together.”
I will here use the words of another, which are very true:
I’ll use someone else's words here, which are very true:
“So great is the difference in many faces, when inspected in opposite directions, that one of the two views, however accurately taken, would not communicate the likeness—it not being, the usually observed characteristic form. When the right view of the head is obtained, it is first necessary to consider the size of the plate it is to be taken on, so as to form an idea of the proportion the head should bear to it. The mind must arrange these points before we commence, or we shall find everything, too large or too small for the happy proportion of the picture, and the conveying of a just notion of the stature. The work will have to be done over, and time sacrificed, if this is not attended to. The adjustment of the head to the size of the plate (as seen from the margin of the mat), is not to be taught: everyone must bring himself, by scrutinizing practice, to mathematical accuracy; for something will be discovered in every face which can be surmounted only by experience.
“The difference in many faces is so significant when viewed from different angles that one perspective, no matter how accurately captured, won't convey the true likeness since it doesn't represent the commonly recognized form. To accurately portray the head, you first need to think about the size of the plate it's going to be on to understand how the head should relate to it. You must organize these factors in your mind before starting, or you’ll end up with everything being either too big or too small for the right proportions of the picture, which affects the overall impression of the person's stature. If this is overlooked, you’ll have to redo the work and waste time. Adjusting the head to the size of the plate (as seen from the edge of the mat) isn’t something that can be taught; everyone must learn through careful practice to achieve precise accuracy because each face has unique features that can only be mastered through experience.”
“The eye nearest the camera, in a three-quarter-face, is placed in the middle of the breadth of the plate; the chin, in a person of middle stature, in the middle of the length, and higher according to the proportional height of the person.”
“The eye closest to the camera, in a three-quarter profile, is positioned in the center of the width of the plate; the chin, in an average-height person, is in the center of the length, and higher based on the person’s proportional height.”
In regard to the proper elevation of the camera, it may be here stated that I have found it best in taking portraits where the hands are introduced, to place the camera at about equal height with the eyes of the sitter, in order to bring the face and hands equi-distant from the tube. It will be found, if the above be followed, that by attaching a string to the camera tube, and making a semi-circle, that the face and hands of the sitter will occupy a corresponding distance, and the consequence is that the impression will appear without the hands being magnified. It has been found that a person with a freckly face can have as fine, fair, and clear an impression as the most perfect complexion; this may be done by the subject rubbing the face until it is very red. The effect is to lessen the contrast, by giving the freckles and skin the same color and the photogenic intensity of the red and yellow being nearly the same, an impression can be produced perfectly clear.
In terms of how to position the camera, I've found that for portraits where the hands are included, it's best to set the camera at about eye level with the subject. This way, the face and hands are at an equal distance from the lens. If you follow this advice and attach a string to the camera to create a semi-circle, the face and hands will maintain that same distance, making it so the hands don’t appear larger than they should. It’s been shown that someone with freckles can achieve just as beautiful, clear, and fair a photo as someone with perfect skin. This can be accomplished by having the person rub their face until it’s quite red. The redness helps reduce the contrast between the freckles and the skin tone, as the photogenic qualities of red and yellow are similar, allowing for a perfectly clear image.
When a child is to be taken, and there are doubts of its keeping still, the operation may be accelerated by placing it nearer the window bringing the screen nearer, and placing a white muslin cloth over the head; this will enable you to work in one third of the usual time. Should the person move, or the plate become exposed to the light, it may be restored to its original sensitiveness by placing it over the quick, one or two seconds.
When a child needs to be photographed and there's worry about them staying still, you can speed up the process by positioning them closer to the window, moving the screen in closer, and draping a white muslin cloth over their head. This can help you get the shot in about a third of the usual time. If the child moves or the plate is exposed to light, you can bring it back to its original sensitivity by putting it over the quick for one or two seconds.
Developing the Daguerreotype.—After the plate has been submitted to the operation of the light, the image is still invisible. It requires to be exposed to the vapors of heated mercury. It is not absolutely necessary to apply artificial heat to the mercury to develop the image, for fair proofs have been produced by placing a plate over the bath at the ordinary temperature of the atmosphere. This plan, however, requires a long time and cannot be adopted in practice, even if it were advisable. The time more usually required in developing the image over the mercurial vapors, is about two minutes, and the temperature is raised to a point necessary to produce the desired effect in that time. This point varies as indicated by different scales, but for the ordinary scales it is not far from 90 deg. cen.
Developing the Daguerreotype.—After the plate has been exposed to light, the image is still not visible. It needs to be exposed to the vapors of heated mercury. It’s not absolutely necessary to heat the mercury to develop the image, as acceptable results have been achieved by placing a plate over the bath at the normal atmospheric temperature. However, this method takes a long time and isn’t practical, even if it were preferable. The typical time needed to develop the image over the mercurial vapors is about two minutes, and the temperature is raised to a point required to achieve the desired effect in that timeframe. This point varies according to different scales, but on standard scales, it is usually around 90 degrees Celsius.
The mercury bath is accompanied with a centigrade thermometer, by which the heat is regulated. Those furnished by the manufacturers are not always correct, and it requires some experience to find the proper degree on the scale.
The mercury bath comes with a centigrade thermometer to regulate the heat. The ones provided by the manufacturers aren’t always accurate, and it takes some experience to determine the right temperature on the scale.
I would here remark that it is advisable, when placing the spirit lamp under the bath, to so arrange it that the position of applied heat should always be on the same point, viz., should the heat be directly under the bulb containing the thermometer it would raise the mercury in the tube to the point marked, and the temperature of that in the bath would be far below what it should be; hence it is (where time is followed for developing) that many failures occur. This is observed more readily in the large baths made of thick iron, particularly upon first heating. In practice I apply the heat as nearly as possible between the centre of the bottom of the bath and the bulb containing the mercury tube. It is advisable to keep the lamp lighted under the bath from the time of commencing in the morning to the close of business at night. By this means you have a uniformity of action, that cannot be otherwise obtained.
I want to point out that when you place the spirit lamp under the bath, you should set it up so that the heat is applied consistently to the same spot. For instance, if the heat is directly under the bulb with the thermometer, it will raise the mercury in the tube to the indicated level, but the temperature of the bath will be much lower than it should be. This is why many failures happen when following the timing for developing. This issue is especially noticeable in large baths made of thick iron, particularly when they are first heated. In practice, I keep the heat as close as possible to the center of the bottom of the bath and the bulb with the mercury tube. It’s best to keep the lamp lit under the bath from the time you start in the morning until you finish for the night. This way, you achieve a level of consistency that you can't get otherwise.
It is well known to the experienced Daguerreotypist, that different atmospheres have a decided effect upon the mercury in developing the Daguerreotype. It will require a greater degree of heat for one atmosphere than for another. Experience alone determines this little difference.
It is well known to experienced Daguerreotypists that different atmospheres significantly affect the mercury used in developing a Daguerreotype. One atmosphere might require more heat than another. Only experience can identify this small difference.
In summer, on cloudy and stormy days, mercurial vapors rise more readily and quickly than in the temperature of autumn or winter. From 60 degrees upwards towards the boiling point (660 deg.), the vapors of mercury rise in greater abundance and collect in larger globules on cold surfaces.
In summer, on cloudy and stormy days, mercury vapors rise more easily and quickly than they do in the cooler temperatures of autumn or winter. From 60 degrees up to the boiling point (660 degrees), mercury vapors accumulate in greater quantities and form larger droplets on cold surfaces.
For various reasons I prefer a high temperature and short exposure. It accelerates the process. It renders the lights of the picture more strong and clear, while the deep shades are more intense. It gives a finer lustre to the drapery. The solarized portions also are very seldom blue, especially after gilding. If heated too high, however, the light parts become of a dead, chalky white, and the shadows are injured by numerous little globules of mercury deposited over them. Just the right quantity of mercury leaves the impression of a transparent, pearly white tone, which improves in the highest degree in gilding. To mercurialize with exactness is a nice point. If there is reason to suspect having timed rather short in the camera, reduce the time over mercury in a corresponding proportion. A dark impression will be ruined by the quantity of mercury which would only improve a light one.
For various reasons, I prefer a high temperature and short exposure. It speeds up the process. It makes the lights in the picture stronger and clearer, while the deep shadows are more intense. It gives a nicer shine to the fabric. The solarized areas are also very rarely blue, especially after gilding. However, if the heat is too high, the light areas turn a dull, chalky white, and the shadows can be damaged by tiny globules of mercury settling on them. The right amount of mercury gives a transparent, pearly white tone, which enhances the gilding significantly. Getting the mercury just right is delicate work. If you suspect that you didn't time the exposure long enough in the camera, reduce the time over the mercury by an appropriate amount. A dark impression will be ruined by the amount of mercury that would only benefit a light one.
If practicable, it is most expedient that the plate be submitted to the action of mercury immediately on coming from the camera. I have frequently, however, carried plates for miles in the plate-holders and after exposing in the camera, brought them back to expose to mercury, and obtained fair proofs; but for the reason before given, it is advisable to carry along the bath, and bring out the impression on the spot.
If possible, it’s best to treat the plate with mercury right after it comes out of the camera. However, I’ve often carried plates for miles in the holders and, after exposing them in the camera, brought them back to treat with mercury and still got decent results. But for the reasons mentioned earlier, it’s a good idea to bring the bath along and develop the image on-site.
It is sometimes the practice of inexperienced operators to take the plate off the bath and examine the impression by solar light. This plan should be abandoned, as it is almost sure to produce a dense blue film over the shadows.
It’s sometimes common for inexperienced operators to remove the plate from the bath and check the impression using sunlight. This method should be avoided, as it almost always leads to a thick blue film forming over the shadows.
This I am led to believe is occasioned by the action of light on the yet sensitive portions of the plate, and made to appear only by subsequent exposure to mercury, being equivalent to solarization.
This, I believe, happens because of the effect of light on the still sensitive parts of the plate, and it only becomes visible after being exposed to mercury, which is similar to solarization.
There has been little said by our professors upon the subject of the position of the plates while exposed to the mercurial vapour. Mr. Hunt, in referring to this subject, says: “Daguerre himself laid much stress upon the necessity of exposing the plate to the mercury at an angle of about 45 deg.. This, perhaps, is the most convenient position as it enables the operator to view the plate distinctly, and watch the development of the design; but beyond this, I am satisfied there exists no real necessity for angular position. Both horizontally and vertically, I have often produced equally effective Daguerreotypes.” I presume from the last sentence of Mr. Hunt, that he has confined his experiments to the smaller sized plates. Hence he may not have thought of the effect of the vertical exposure of a large plate.
There hasn’t been much discussion from our professors about the placement of the plates when exposed to mercury vapor. Mr. Hunt, addressing this topic, states: “Daguerre himself emphasized the importance of angling the plate at about 45 degrees when exposing it to the mercury. This is likely the most practical position, as it allows the operator to see the plate clearly and monitor the development of the image; however, I’m convinced there is no real requirement for an angled position. I have often created equally effective Daguerreotypes both horizontally and vertically.” From Mr. Hunt’s last sentence, I gather that he has limited his experiments to smaller plates. Therefore, he may not have considered the impact of vertically exposing a larger plate.
In America this is a subject of no little importance. When an impression is to be developed upon a plate fifteen by seventeen inches, were we to use an angle of about 45 deg., it would be found to make a perceptible difference in the appearance of the image. By examining the wood tops of our baths as formerly made, it will be found that there is a great variation in the distance from the mercury to the different portions of the plate. By measuring one of these tops for the size plate above mentioned, I find the distance to the nearest point between the mercury and the plate, to be thirteen, and the middle point sixteen, and the furthest point twenty-one and a half inches: by this we see that one point of the plate is eight and a half inches further from the mercury than the nearest point; even this is not the variation there would necessarily be, were we to adopt the angle of 45 deg. as urged by Daguerre.
In America, this is a topic of considerable importance. When trying to create an image on a plate that is fifteen by seventeen inches, using an angle of about 45 degrees makes a noticeable difference in how the image looks. If we examine the wooden tops of our baths as they were traditionally made, we can see there’s a significant variation in the distance from the mercury to different parts of the plate. Measuring one of these tops for the plate size mentioned above, I find that the distance to the closest point between the mercury and the plate is thirteen inches, the middle point is sixteen inches, and the furthest point is twenty-one and a half inches. This means that one part of the plate is eight and a half inches further from the mercury than the nearest point. Even this difference doesn’t account for the variation that would occur if we were to use the 45-degree angle suggested by Daguerre.
Among our principal professors, the bevel top will not be found in use where the large plates are used. Should any one feel desirous to test more minutely the effect produced by a bevel top bath, I would suggest to them to place a frame, so constructed as to hold three sixth size plates, and fit it to the top of the bath, and so arrange it with openings that the plates may be placed, one at the nearest point of the mercury, the second midway, and the third to the greatest distance, and by placing the plates over at one and the same time, the experimenter will be enabled to judge if there exists a difference in the developing. In speaking of the above, reference is had to baths to the ordinary heights used by operators.
Among our main professors, you won't see the bevel top used when large plates are in play. If anyone wants to explore the effects of a bevel top bath in more detail, I recommend setting up a frame that can hold three sixth-size plates and fitting it on top of the bath. Arrange it so that the plates can be positioned at three different points: one closest to the mercury, one in the middle, and one at the farthest distance. By placing all three plates at the same time, the experimenter will be able to determine if there’s any difference in the developing process. This refers to baths of the typical heights used by operators.
We will now proceed to examine the effect produced by mercurial vapor upon the plate at different lengths of exposure. In some investigations which I have made upon the appearance of the Daguerreotype impressions when developed over mercury at 90 deg. C. (194 deg. F.), the following was the result. Plates, coated and exposed to light in our usual manner of operating, produced on exposure of
We will now look at how mercurial vapor affects the plate with different exposure times. In some research I've conducted on the appearance of Daguerreotype images developed over mercury at 90 degrees Celsius (194 degrees Fahrenheit), the results were as follows. Plates, coated and exposed to light in our usual way of working, produced on exposure of
1/2 minute, whole impression, deep blue.
1/2 minute, complete impression, deep blue.
1 minute, ashy and flat; no shadows; linen, deep blue.
1 minute, dull and lifeless; no shadows; linen, dark blue.
1 1/2 minute, coarse and spongy; shadows, muddy; drapery, dirty reddish brown.
1 1/2 minute, rough and spongy; shadows, murky; drapery, grimy reddish-brown.
2 minutes, shallow or watery; shadows, yellowish; drapery, brown.
2 minutes, shallow or watery; shadows, yellowish; fabric, brown.
2 1/4 minutes, soft; face, scarcely white; shadows, neutral; drapery, fine dark brown linen somewhat blue.
2 1/4 minutes, soft; face, barely white; shadows, neutral; drapery, fine dark brown linen with a hint of blue.
2 1/2 minutes, clear and pearly; shadows, clear and positive, of a purple tint; drapery, jet black, with the dark shades slightly frosted with mercury.
2 1/2 minutes, clear and pearly; shadows, clear and distinct, with a purple tint; drapery, jet black, with the dark shades slightly frosted with mercury.
2 3/4 to 3 minutes, hard and chalky; shadows, harsh; drapery, roughened, and misty with excess of mercury.
2 3/4 to 3 minutes, hard and chalky; shadows, harsh; drapery, rough, and foggy with too much mercury.
The foregoing results will be found general.
The results mentioned above will be considered general.
There are numerous opinions among our operators in regard to the quantity of mercury necessary for a bath. As regards this, I need only say, similar results occur when two pounds or two ounces are used, but the quantity generally employed is about a quarter of a pound. I am of the opinion that one ounce will answer as well as a larger quantity. I know of no better proof in favor of a small quantity than that presented in the following incident. Several years since, an operator (Mr. Senter, of Auburn, N.Y.) of my acquaintance, was requested to go several miles to take a Daguerreotype portrait of a deceased person. He packed up his apparatus and proceeded over a rough road for some distance to the house where he was to take the portrait, and arranging his apparatus, with all the expedition which the occasion required, after having everything in usual order (as was supposed), he proceeded and took some ten or twelve very superior impressions. They were fine, clear, and well developed. After taking the number ordered, he proceeded to repack his apparatus, and to his surprise, when he took up the bottle he carried the mercury in, he found it still filled, and none in the bath, except only such particles as had adhered to the sides, after dusting and being jolted for several miles over the rough road. From this it will be seen that a very little mercury will suffice to develop fine proofs. I saw some of the impressions referred to above, and they were certainly well developed, and very superior specimens of our art.
There are many opinions among our operators about how much mercury is needed for a bath. I can only say that similar results occur whether two pounds or two ounces are used, but the typical amount is around a quarter of a pound. I believe that one ounce works just as well as a larger amount. There’s no better proof for using a small quantity than the following incident. Several years ago, an operator I know (Mr. Senter from Auburn, N.Y.) was asked to travel several miles to take a Daguerreotype portrait of a deceased person. He packed his equipment and made his way over a rough road to the house where he would take the portrait. He quickly set up his gear, and after everything was in order, he went on to take ten or twelve excellent images. They turned out fine, clear, and well-developed. After completing the requested number, he started to pack up his equipment again and was surprised to find that the bottle he used to carry the mercury was still full, with none left in the bath, aside from the tiny particles that had stuck to the sides after being jostled for several miles on that rough road. This shows that a very small amount of mercury is enough to produce great results. I saw some of the images mentioned, and they were certainly well-developed and outstanding examples of our art.
Removing the Coating.—After the impression has been developed over the mercurial vapor, the next step is to remove the sensitive coating. For this purpose the following solution is used:
Removing the Coating.—After the impression has been developed over the mercury vapor, the next step is to take off the sensitive coating. For this, the following solution is used:
Put about two ounces of hyposulphite of soda in a pint of water, which should always be filtered before using. A convenient way of doing this is to have two bottles, and a large funnel with a sponge pressed into the neck of it; or, what is better, some filtering paper folded in it. The solution in one bottle, the funnel is placed in the other, and the picture held over it; when the solution is poured on the plate, it runs from it into the filter, and is always ready for use.
Put about two ounces of sodium hyposulfite in a pint of water, which should always be filtered before use. A convenient method is to have two bottles and a large funnel with a sponge pressed into its neck, or better yet, some filtering paper folded in it. The solution goes in one bottle, the funnel is placed in the other, and the picture is held over it; when the solution is poured onto the plate, it runs into the filter and is always ready for use.
It is best that the washing be done immediately on the plate coming from the mercury bath. If allowed to stand long with the coating on, it assumes a very dark tint—as the operation of the light continues, though less active than while exposed in the camera, and destroys that brightness which would otherwise have been obtained. It is preferable to wash and gild a picture without it first being dried; yet when there are doubts of its giving satisfaction, there would sometimes be a saving by drying and getting the decision of the subject before gilding, as this last injures the plate for another impression. First, light your spirit-lamp, then with your plyers take the plate by the lower right-hand corner, holding it in such a manner that the plyers will form in a line with the upper left-hand corner; pour on, slowly, the hyposulphite solution, slightly agitating the plate, until all the coating is dissolved off; then rinse off with clean water, and if it is not to be gilded, dry by holding the plate perpendicular with the bottom left-hand corner lowest, and applying the blaze of the spirit-lamp to the back, at the same time blowing gently downward on the face of the plate.
It’s best to wash the plate right after it comes out of the mercury bath. If it sits for too long with the coating on, it develops a very dark tint—as the light continues to react, although not as intensely as when exposed in the camera—and this destroys the brightness that could have been achieved. It’s preferable to wash and gild a picture without letting it dry first; however, if there’s any doubt about the outcome, it might be better to dry it and get feedback on the image before gilding, since gilding the plate can damage it for future impressions. First, light your spirit lamp, then use your pliers to hold the plate by the lower right corner, positioning it so the pliers align with the upper left corner. Slowly pour the hyposulphite solution over the plate, gently agitating it until all the coating is dissolved. Rinse with clean water, and if you’re not going to gild it, dry the plate by holding it upright with the bottom left corner lower, applying the flame from the spirit lamp to the back while gently blowing downward on the surface of the plate.
The hyposulphite solution should be often filtered through a sponge, and it will answer for a great number of washings. Yet it is observed that the mercury collects in this solution in small globules; these often come in contact with the plate, causing white spots, which spoil the impression. They should be guarded against, and the solution renewed. Again, in order to prevent streaks or scum on the surface of the plate, it is necessary that the coating should be removed with a good degree of uniformity. I find in practice that the hyposulphite of soda in our market varies much as regards strength, and consequently the rule to be adopted is to make a solution of sufficient strength to remove the coating in about ten seconds. I am aware that it may be said that this strong solution would have a tendency to injure the impression by destroying in a measure the sharpness of outline. To meet this, it need only to be said that the preventive is, to not let the solution rest on the surface of the plate for a longer time than is absolutely necessary, and then it should be drenched copiously with water; hence a chemical action upon the image is prevented and the general operation facilitated. This plan is adopted by our first operators with the greatest success.
The hypo solution should be filtered through a sponge regularly, and it can be used for many washings. However, it's noticed that mercury collects in this solution in small droplets; these often touch the plate, creating white spots that ruin the impression. You should watch out for these and replace the solution. Also, to avoid streaks or a film on the surface of the plate, you need to remove the coating evenly. In my experience, the hypo solution available in our market varies a lot in strength, so the best approach is to create a solution strong enough to remove the coating in about ten seconds. I know some might argue that this strong solution could damage the impression by blurring the edges. To counter this, it’s enough to just not let the solution sit on the plate’s surface longer than necessary, and then rinse it thoroughly with water; this prevents any chemical reaction with the image and makes the process easier. This method is used by our top operators with great success.
If the operator should allow the hyposulphite solution to run over the plate unevenly, it is quite likely that white or blue streaks would result. These it is impossible to remove without injury to the impression. Some, in order to prevent this, breathe over the surface, thus moistening it and putting it in a condition to receive the solution with greater uniformity. The plate should be well washed with water before gilding.
If the operator lets the hyposulphite solution flow over the plate unevenly, it's very likely that white or blue streaks will appear. These streaks cannot be removed without damaging the impression. To prevent this, some people breathe over the surface to moisten it, which helps the solution apply more evenly. The plate should be thoroughly washed with water before gilding.
Gilding, or Fixing the Image.—The next process to be given is that for fixing the image on the plate. This is done by precipitating a thin film of gold over the surface and is productive of the most brilliant effect when prepared immediately after the plate has been washed with water after the application of the hyposulphite solution, and before the plate has been allowed to dry. When, however, the plate has been dried and allowed to stand for any time, before gilding, the hyposulphite wash should be applied as at first, in order to destroy any chemical coating that may have been formed on exposure of the plate to the air. For gilding the larger plates, we have a gilding stand so constructed that the plate can be put on a perfect level. In practice, I prefer holding the plate with nippers, fastened at one corner. Hold the plate in the same manner as in removing the coating; pour on the gilding, newly filtered, until the surface is wholly covered, and with the blaze of the spirit lamp, at least three inches high, apply it to the back of the plate, moving it about, that the surface may be heated with as much uniformity as possible. Continuing this operation, the surface will generally become covered with small yellow bubbles which soon disappear, leaving the image clear and distinct.
Gilding, or Fixing the Image.—The next step is fixing the image on the plate. This is done by applying a thin layer of gold over the surface, which creates a stunning effect when done right after washing the plate with water following the hyposulphite solution, and before the plate has a chance to dry. If the plate has dried and sat for a while before gilding, you should apply the hyposulphite wash again to remove any chemical coating that may have formed from being exposed to the air. For gilding larger plates, we use a gilding stand designed to keep the plate perfectly level. Personally, I prefer to hold the plate with nippers, secured at one corner. Hold the plate the same way as when removing the coating; pour the freshly filtered gilding on until the surface is fully covered, and with the flame from the spirit lamp, at least three inches high, heat the back of the plate, moving it around for even heating. As you continue this process, the surface will generally develop small yellow bubbles that quickly disappear, leaving the image clear and sharp.
It is advisable to make use of a lamp having a sufficiently strong flame to produce the effect in a few minutes. If after a first heating, it is found that the impression can admit of a greater degree of intensity, it might be heated anew; but that is seldom necessary, and often by trying to do too, well, the operator, if he persists in heating certain parts of the plate, may find the liquid dry up just above the flame, and inevitably cause a stain; [3] or else the blacks are covered with a film, or even the coating of gold may suddenly exfoliate, when small particles are detached from the plate. The impression is then entirely spoiled, but the plate may be re-polished.
It’s best to use a lamp with a strong enough flame to get the desired effect in just a few minutes. If, after the first heating, it seems that the impression could be more intense, it can be heated again; however, this is rarely necessary. Often, if the operator tries too hard and keeps heating certain areas of the plate, they might find that the liquid dries up just above the flame, causing a stain. Alternatively, the blacks can end up covered with a film, or the gold coating might suddenly flake off, which detaches small particles from the plate. This completely ruins the impression, but the plate can be re-polished.
[3] This can be remedied, however, if it is immediately washed over with the same solution that is on the plate, so that the surface shall not become cool; continue for a short time to apply the lamp under, and agitate the plate slightly, and it will soon be free from all imperfections and give a fine clear tone.
[3] This can be fixed, though, if you immediately wash it with the same solution that's on the plate, so the surface doesn't cool down; keep the lamp on for a little while, and gently shake the plate, and it will quickly be free of any flaws and produce a clear tone.
It is not unfrequent that the surface assumes a dark, cloudy appearance. This is generally the best sign that the gilding will bring out the impression with the greatest degree of distinctness. Soon, the clouds gradually begin to disappear, and, “like a thing of life” stands forth the image, clothed with all the brilliancy and clearness that the combined efforts of nature and art can produce. When in the operator’s judgment the operation has arrived at the highest state of perfection, rinse suddenly, with an abundance of clean water, and dry as before described.
It’s not uncommon for the surface to take on a dark, cloudy look. This is usually a good sign that the gilding will reveal the impression with the greatest clarity. Soon, the clouds slowly start to vanish, and “like a living thing,” the image emerges, enhanced with all the brilliance and clarity that nature and art can achieve together. When the operator feels that the process has reached its peak perfection, rinse it quickly with plenty of clean water and dry it as previously described.
When an impression is dark, the gilding process may be longer continued; but when light, it should be gilded quickly, as lengthening the time tends to bleach the impression and make it too white. The cause of this appears to be, that with a moderate heat the chlorine is merely set free from the gold, and remaining in the solution, instead of being driven off, with its powerful bleaching, properties, it immediately acts upon the shades of the picture. A dark impression can thus, by a low heat, long-continued, be made quite light. To procure the best effect, then, heat suddenly with a large blaze, and judging it to be at the maximum, cool as suddenly as possible.
When an impression is dark, the gilding process can be extended; but when it’s light, it should be gilded quickly, because taking too long can bleach the impression and make it too white. The reason for this seems to be that with moderate heat, chlorine is merely released from the gold and stays in the solution instead of being driven off, where its strong bleaching properties can then immediately affect the shades of the picture. A dark impression can, therefore, be made quite light with prolonged low heat. To achieve the best result, heat it quickly with a large flame, and once it reaches the maximum temperature, cool it as quickly as possible.
When the hyposulphite of gold is used instead of the chloride, a less heat should be employed.
When using gold hyposulphite instead of chloride, a lower heat should be applied.
Coloring Daguerreotypes.—Of all the so-called improvements in the Daguerreotype, the coloring is the least worthy of notice. Yet the operator is often, in fact most generally, called upon to hide an excellent specimen under paint. I can conceive of nothing more perfect in a Daguerreotype than a finely-developed image, with clearness of lights and shadows, possessing the lively tone resulting from good gilding. Such pictures, however, are not always had, and then color may perform the part of hiding the imperfections. We present the following method as given in Willat’s Manual:
Coloring Daguerreotypes.—Out of all the so-called improvements in the Daguerreotype, coloring is the least impressive. Yet, the operator is frequently—and usually—expected to cover a great specimen with paint. I can’t imagine anything more perfect in a Daguerreotype than a well-developed image with clear lights and shadows, showcasing the vibrant tone from good gilding. However, such pictures aren’t always available, and then color can help conceal imperfections. We present the following method as outlined in Willat’s Manual:
“Daguerreotype portraits are now commonly met with beautifully colored; but the coloring is a process requiring great care and judgment, and many good pictures are spoiled in fruitless experiments. Several different methods of coloring have been proposed. The simplest mode appears to be that of using dry colors prepared in the following manner: A little of the color required, very finely ground, is thrown into a glass containing water, in which a few grains of gum arabic have been dissolved. After standing a few moments, the mixture may be passed through bibulous paper, and the residue perfectly dried for use. The principal colors used are Carmine, Chrome Yellow, Burnt Sienna, Ultramarine and White; boxes fitted with sets of colors properly prepared, may be obtained of the dealers, and include Carmine, White, Lilac, Sky Blue, Pink, Yellow, Flesh color, Orange, Brown, Purple, Light Green, Dark Green and Blue. With a few colors, however, all the rest may be made thus: Orange, by Yellow and Red; Purple, with Blue and Red; Green, Blue and Yellow; Brown, with Umber, Carmine and Lamp Black; Scarlet, Carmine and Light Red. While it is true that a little color may relieve the dark metallic look of some Daguerreotypes, it must not be concealed that the covering of the fine delicate outline and exquisite gradations of tone of a good picture with such a coating, is barbarous and unartistic.
“Daguerreotype portraits are now often seen beautifully colored; however, the coloring process requires a lot of care and skill, and many good images are ruined in unsuccessful attempts. Several different methods of coloring have been suggested. The simplest method seems to be using dry colors prepared in this way: A small amount of the desired color, very finely ground, is added to a glass containing water with a few grains of gum arabic dissolved in it. After a few moments, the mixture can be passed through absorbent paper, and the residue perfectly dried for use. The main colors used are Carmine, Chrome Yellow, Burnt Sienna, Ultramarine, and White; sets of properly prepared colors can be purchased from dealers and typically include Carmine, White, Lilac, Sky Blue, Pink, Yellow, Flesh color, Orange, Brown, Purple, Light Green, Dark Green, and Blue. With a few colors, all others can be mixed this way: Orange from Yellow and Red; Purple from Blue and Red; Green from Blue and Yellow; Brown from Umber, Carmine, and Lamp Black; Scarlet from Carmine and Light Red. While it's true that a bit of color can soften the dark metallic appearance of some Daguerreotypes, it must be acknowledged that covering the fine delicate outlines and exquisite tonal gradations of a good picture with such a layer is crude and unartistic.”
“The prevaling taste is, however, decidedly for colored proofs, and the following directions will assist the amateur in ministering to this perverted taste, should he be so inclined. The coloring should commence with the face, and the flesh tint must be stippled on (not rubbed) with a small camel’s-hair brush, beginning from the centre of the cheek, taking great care not to go over the outline of the face, and also not to have too much color in the brush; the eyes and eyebrows must not be touched with color. After the flesh color is applied, take a piece of very soft cotton and pass it very gently backwards and forwards over the face, so as to soften down the color, and then apply the carmine to give the required tint. For men, the darker tints should predominate, and for women the warmer. Very light hair may be improved by a slight tint of brown, or yellow and brown, according to the color. In coloring the drapery, the same care must be used. No rules can be laid down for all the different colors required, and the amateur had better obtain the assistance or advice of some one accustomed to the use of colors. A little white with a dash of blue or a little silver, will improve white linen, lace, etc. The jewelry may be touched with gold or silver from the shells, moistened with distilled water, and laid on with a fine-pointed sable-hair brush.
“The current trend is definitely for colored proofs, and the following tips will help amateurs cater to this preference if they choose to. Start coloring with the face, applying the flesh tint using a small camel’s-hair brush in a stippling motion (not rubbing). Begin at the center of the cheek, being careful not to go outside the outline of the face and avoiding too much color on the brush; don’t color the eyes and eyebrows. Once the flesh color is applied, take a piece of very soft cotton and gently move it back and forth over the face to soften the color, then apply carmine for the desired tint. For men, darker shades should dominate, while women should have warmer tones. Very light hair can be enhanced with a subtle tint of brown, or a mix of yellow and brown, depending on the hair color. The same care should be taken when coloring fabric. There are no strict rules for all the different colors needed, so it’s better for amateurs to seek advice from someone experienced with colors. A bit of white with a touch of blue or a dash of silver can enhance white linens, lace, etc. Jewelry can be touched up with gold or silver from the shells, moistened with distilled water, and applied with a fine-pointed sable-hair brush.”
“Brilliants may be represented by picking the plate with the point of a pin or knife.”
“Brilliants can be represented by picking the plate with the tip of a pin or knife.”
CHAPTER II.
MISCELLANEOUS.
Coloring Back Grounds—Transparent ditto—Gilding Dissolvent Solution for removing Specks—Solarized Impression—To Purify Water—Cleaning Mercury—Adhesive Paper—Black Stain for Apparatus—Sealing Wax for Bottles—Rouge—Rotten Stone—Potassa Solution—Hyposulphite Solution—Substitute for do.—Gilding Solution—Solution for increasing the Brilliancy of the Daguerreotype—Bleaching Solution;—Cold Gilding—Neutralizing Agents—Buff Dryer—Keeping Buffs in order—Cleaning Buckskins—Reflector for taking Views.
Coloring Backgrounds—Transparent ones—Gilding solvent solution for removing specks—Solarized impression—How to purify water—Cleaning mercury—Adhesive paper—Black stain for equipment—Sealing wax for bottles—Rouge—Rotten stone—Potash solution—Hyposulphite solution—Substitute for it—Gilding solution—Solution for enhancing the brilliance of the daguerreotype—Bleaching solution—Cold gilding—Neutralizing agents—Buff dryer—Maintaining buffs—Cleaning buckskins—Reflector for taking photos.
To Color Back-grounds—To obtain a properly colored back ground is a matter of no little importance to the Daguerreotype operator. I had nearly exhausted all patience, and tried the skill of painters to obtain a back-ground that would be suitable to my purpose; but all to no avail. At last I adopted the following method, and at a cost of coloring of twenty-five cents, can now produce a back-ground far more valuable than those which had cost five dollars before.
To Color Backgrounds—Getting a properly colored background is really important for the Daguerreotype operator. I had almost run out of patience and sought the expertise of painters to find a background that would work for me, but nothing seemed to work. Finally, I tried this method, and with just twenty-five cents for coloring, I can now create a background that's worth much more than the five-dollar ones I used to have.
Take common earth paint, such as is used in painting roofs; mix this with water to about the consistency of cream; then to four quarts of this mixture add about one pint of glue water (common glue dissolved in water, also about as thick as cream). This last will cause the paint to adhere to the cloth, to which it is applied with a common white-wash brush. By applying the brush on the coating while it is wet, it may be so blended that not a line can be seen, and a perfectly smooth color of any shade can be obtained. The shade of color I use is a light reddish-brown. Tripoli, rotten-stone, or any earthy matter, may be applied in the same manner.
Take regular earth paint, like the kind used for painting roofs; mix it with water until it’s about the thickness of cream. Then, for every four quarts of this mixture, add about one pint of glue water (common glue dissolved in water, also about as thick as cream). This will help the paint stick to the cloth, which you apply using a regular whitewash brush. By brushing lightly on the wet coating, you can blend it so that no lines are visible, achieving a perfectly smooth color in any shade. The shade I prefer is a light reddish-brown. You can also use Tripoli, rotten stone, or any earthy material in the same way.
Transparent or Invisible Back-ground.—I give this as originally published in my System of Photography, 1849:
Transparent or Invisible Background.—I provide this as it was originally published in my System of Photography, 1849:
“Take a large woollen blanket with long nap, the longer and rougher it is the finer will be the effect produced; stretch it on a frame of sufficient size, and suspend the frame at the centre of the upper end by a string fastened to a nail in the ceiling, from three to five feet back of the sitter. Having arranged this, fasten another string to the side of the frame, and while the operation is going on in the camera, swing the back-ground from right to left, continuing this during the whole time of sitting, and you have a clear “transparent” back-ground, which throws the image out in bold relief, and renders the surface of the plate invisible. If equalled at all it is only by atmospheric back-ground. I consider it to be the best ever known, and think it needs but to be tried to afford satisfactory proof that it is so. Although used by few before, since the first edition of this work at least two thirds of the operators have adopted its use; for any one can at once understand the principle and the effect which it produces.”
“Take a large wool blanket with a long, soft texture; the longer and rougher it is, the better the effect will be. Stretch it on a frame that's big enough and hang the frame at the center of the upper end with a string attached to a nail in the ceiling, positioned three to five feet behind the person being photographed. Once you've set this up, attach another string to the side of the frame, and while the camera is operating, swing the background from side to side. Keep this movement going during the entire photo session, and you'll have a clear “transparent” background that highlights the image and makes the surface of the plate invisible. The only thing that matches it is an atmospheric background. I think it's the best solution out there, and I believe that trying it will prove just how effective it is. Although few used it before, since the first edition of this work, at least two-thirds of photographers have started using it; anyone can easily grasp the principle and the effect it creates.”
It may be added that a motion imparted to to any back-ground where softness is desired, produces an excellent effect.
It can be added that a motion applied to any background where softness is wanted creates a great effect.
Gilding Dissolvent.—To one quart of muriatic acid add as much oxide of iron (common iron rust) as it will dissolve in two days. This may be done by putting in the oxide in excess. It should be frequently shook, and when wanted for bottling it should be allowed to stand in order to settle. When this is done the solution may be poured off, and reduced by adding to it an equal quantity of water; then it is ready for use. This constitutes a gilding dissolvent now in our market.
Gilding Dissolvent.—To one quart of muriatic acid, add as much iron oxide (common iron rust) as it can dissolve in two days. You can do this by adding excess oxide. It should be shaken frequently, and when it's time to bottle it, let it sit so it can settle. Once settled, you can pour off the solution and dilute it by adding an equal amount of water; then it's ready to use. This is the gilding dissolvent currently available on the market.
Solution for Removing Specks.—There is probably no one cause of complaint so general as “what makes those black specks?” There are several causes which produce them, and probably the most general are dust, rouge, or a spray of moisture on the plate. It this be the case, there is no solution which can remove them, as they have prevented a chemical action with the silver, and their removal would only expose the surface of the plate which in itself would afford a contrast with the impression. Another and less dangerous source of these specks is organic matter contained in the solution employed in dissolving the chemicals, or the water in washing. Much of the hyposulphite of soda in market contains a sulphuret, which, coming in contact with the silver surface, immediately causes oxidation. Such spots, as well also as most all others found on the plate after it has been exposed in the camera, can be removed by the following, solution: To one ounce of water add a piece of cyanide of potassium the size of a pea; filter the solution and apply by pouring it on the surface of the plate. In all cases the plate should first be wet with water. Apply a gentle heat, and soon the spots disappear, leaving the impression clear and free from all organic matter.
Solution for Removing Specks.—There’s probably no complaint more common than “what causes those black specks?” There are several reasons they occur, but the most common are dust, rouge, or moisture on the plate. If this is the case, there’s no solution that can remove them, as they prevent a chemical reaction with the silver, and removing them would only expose the surface of the plate, creating a contrast with the impression. Another, less dangerous source of these specks is organic matter found in the solution used to dissolve the chemicals, or in the water used for washing. Much of the hyposulphite of soda available contains a sulfide, which, when it touches the silver surface, immediately causes oxidation. These spots, as well as most others found on the plate after exposure in the camera, can be removed using the following solution: To one ounce of water, add a piece of potassium cyanide about the size of a pea; filter the solution and apply it by pouring it onto the surface of the plate. In all cases, the plate should be pre-wet with water. Apply gentle heat, and soon the spots will disappear, leaving the impression clear and free from any organic matter.
In the absence of cyanide of potassium, a solution of pure hyposulphite of soda will answer as a fair substitute.
In the absence of potassium cyanide, a solution of pure sodium hyposulfite will work as a decent substitute.
To Redeem, a Solarized Impression.—The Daguerreotype plate, prepared in the ordinary manner, should be exposed in the camera a sufficient time to solarize the impression. Then, before it be exposed to the vapor of mercury, expose it for a very brief period to the vapor of either chlorine, bromine or iodine. Then expose over mercury, as usual. I have produced singularly interesting results by this process.
To Redeem, a Solarized Impression.—The Daguerreotype plate, prepared in the usual way, should be exposed in the camera long enough to solarize the impression. Then, before exposing it to mercury vapor, make sure to expose it for a very short time to the vapor of chlorine, bromine, or iodine. After that, expose it over mercury as usual. I have achieved uniquely interesting results using this method.
To Purify Water.—Filter the water well, and then add about three drops of nitric acid to the pint. This can be used as absolutely pure water, but I would recommend the use of distilled water as preferable.
To Purify Water.—Filter the water properly, and then add about three drops of nitric acid to the pint. This can be used as completely pure water, but I would suggest using distilled water instead.
Cleaning Mercury.—Make a small bag of chamois skin, pour in the mercury, and squeeze it through the leather. Repeat this several times, and filter by means of a funnel made of paper, with a very small aperture, through which it will escape and leave the particles of dust, or other substances, in the paper. A paper with a pinhole through it will answer as well, and it is less difficult to make.
Cleaning Mercury.—Make a small bag out of chamois leather, pour in the mercury, and squeeze it through the leather. Do this several times, and filter it using a paper funnel with a very small opening, which will let the mercury through while trapping dust and other particles in the paper. A piece of paper with a pinhole in it works too, and it’s easier to create.
Adhesive Paper.—Take gum arabic, four ounces, put it in a wide-mouthed bottle and pour on water about one-third above the gum. Add half ounce of isinglass, or fish glue, and a small piece of loaf sugar. Let all dissolve, and spread over French letter paper, with a brush or piece of sponge. If once spreading is not enough, perform the same operation a second time.
Adhesive Paper.—Take four ounces of gum arabic and place it in a wide-mouth bottle. Pour in water until it’s about one-third above the gum. Add half an ounce of isinglass or fish glue, along with a small piece of loaf sugar. Allow everything to dissolve, then spread it over French letter paper using a brush or a piece of sponge. If one application isn't enough, repeat the process a second time.
Black Stain for Apparatus.—Dissolve gum shellac in alcohol, or procure shellac varnish at the druggists’, stir in lampblack, and apply with a sponge or bit of rag. This will adhere to metal, as well as wood, and is used for the inside of camera, tubes, etc.
Black Stain for Apparatus.—Dissolve gum shellac in alcohol, or buy shellac varnish at the pharmacy, mix in lampblack, and apply it with a sponge or piece of cloth. This will stick to metal as well as wood and is used for the inside of cameras, tubes, etc.
Sealing Wax for Bottles.—Melt together six parts rosin and one beeswax, and add a small quantity of lampblack; or, if red is preferable, add red lead. Common white wax is best, as most chemicals act less upon it.
Sealing Wax for Bottles.—Melt together six parts of rosin and one part of beeswax, then add a small amount of lampblack; or, if you prefer red, add red lead. Regular white wax is the best choice, as it’s less affected by most chemicals.
When bottles containing bromine are to be sealed, it is well to grease the stopper. This, however, only when the bottle is in frequent use, for if it were to be sent by any conveyance it would be likely to fly out.
When sealing bottles that have bromine, it's a good idea to grease the stopper. However, this should only be done if the bottle is used frequently, because if it’s being transported, the stopper could easily pop out.
Rouge.—The method employed by Lord Ross is probably unsurpassed in the production of rouge. He has given his process as follows:
Rouge.—The method used by Lord Ross is likely unmatched in making rouge. He has described his process as follows:
“I prepare the peroxide of iron by precipitation with water of ammonia, from a pure dilute solution of sulphate of iron; the precipitate is washed, pressed in a screw press till nearly dry, and exposed to a heat which in the dark appears a dull, low red. The only points of importance are, that the sulphate of iron should be pure, that the water of ammonia should be decidedly in excess, and that the heat should not exceed that I have described. The color will be a bright crimson inclining to yellow. I have tried both potash and soda, pure, instead of water of ammonia, but after washing with some degree of care, a trace of the alkali still remained, and the peroxide was of an ochrey color, till overheated, and did not polish properly.”
“I prepare iron peroxide by precipitating it with ammonia water from a pure dilute solution of iron sulfate. The precipitate is washed, pressed in a screw press until it's nearly dry, and then exposed to heat that appears a dull, low red in the dark. The key points are that the iron sulfate should be pure, the ammonia water should be clearly in excess, and the heat shouldn’t exceed what I’ve described. The color will be a bright crimson leaning toward yellow. I’ve tried using both potash and soda, pure, instead of ammonia water, but after washing with some care, a trace of the alkali still remained, causing the peroxide to have an ochre color until it was overheated, and it didn’t polish properly.”
Care should be observed to apply rouge in a dry state to the surface of the plate.
Care should be taken to apply blush in a dry state to the surface of the plate.
I would remark, that so far as my experience has gone, I consider good rouge fully equal to any other polishing, material for the last or finishing polishing; consequently I shall not take up my space in enumerating any of the great variety that find few advocates.
I would note that, based on my experience, I find that good rouge is just as effective as any other polishing material for the final finish; therefore, I won't waste my time listing the many options that have few supporters.
Why Rouge is to be preferred.—“Because it burnishes better, and because it assists in fixing the layer of gold, rendering it less susceptible of being removed in scales when heated too much.”
Why Rouge is to be preferred.—“Because it polishes better, and because it helps to secure the layer of gold, making it less likely to come off in flakes when overheated.”
Rotten Stone.—“Purchase the best ground rotten stone of the druggist, put a few ounces at a time in a wedgewood or porcelain mortar, with plenty of clean rain water. This should have about forty drops of nitric acid to the quart. Grind well, and after letting the mortar stand two minutes, pour into a third. After remaining undisturbed eight minutes, finally pour off into a fourth to settle. Rinse back the sediment in the second and third, and grind over with a new batch. Repeat the operation till you have all in the fourth vessel. Let this stand several hours, and pour off the water very carefully. Set the deposit in the sun, or by a stove to dry. When perfectly dry, pulverize, and it is ready for use. With a little trouble you will obtain in this way a much better article than can generally be bought of dealers. For the last washing, alcohol, or a mixture of alcohol and water, is preferable.”
Rotten Stone.—“Buy the best ground rotten stone from the drugstore, and put a few ounces at a time in a wooden or porcelain mortar, adding plenty of clean rainwater. This should include about forty drops of nitric acid for every quart. Grind well, and after letting the mortar sit for two minutes, pour it into a third container. After letting it sit undisturbed for eight minutes, pour it into a fourth container to settle. Rinse the sediment from the second and third containers and grind it again with a new batch. Repeat this process until everything is in the fourth vessel. Let this sit for several hours, then carefully pour off the water. Place the deposit in the sun or near a stove to dry. Once it's completely dry, pulverize it and it's ready for use. With a bit of effort, you will get a much better product this way than what is typically sold by dealers. For the final wash, alcohol or a mixture of alcohol and water is preferred.”
Potassa Solution.—The use of a solution of potassa in the preparation of the plate was suggested in the early history of the Daguerreotype. It was thought to possess some peculiar property for improving the tone of the impression. It is used for moistening the rotten stone in polishing the plate, and may be prepared by putting about an ounce and a half of alcohol in a close bottle, and add half a stick of caustic potash. This will soon become of a deep red color. For use, fill your small bottle, having a quill in the cork, with alcohol, and add a few drops of the above, or enough to change it to a bright orange or saffron color.
Potassa Solution.—The idea of using a potassa solution in preparing the plate dates back to the early days of the Daguerreotype. It was believed to have a unique property that improved the tone of the impression. It's used to moisten rotten stone when polishing the plate, and you can prepare it by putting about an ounce and a half of alcohol in a sealed bottle and adding half a stick of caustic potash. This will quickly turn a deep red color. For use, fill your small bottle, with a quill inserted in the cork, with alcohol and add a few drops of the solution, or enough to change it to a bright orange or saffron color.
A Substitute for the Hyposulphite Solution.—M. DAGUERRE recommends the use of a solution of salt water for removing the coating off the plate. I found this of some service at one time during my travels. My hyposulphite bottle got broke and its contents lost, so as only to leave enough for preparing gilding. I resorted to the use of salt solution, and found it to answer well. Make a saturated solution of salt in water. First wash the plate with clear water; then immerse it in the saline solution, when it should be agitated, and the coating will soon disappear. Another process with a salt solution of half the strength of the above is very interesting and effectual. The plate having been dipped into cold water, is placed in a solution of common salt, of moderate strength; it lies without being acted upon at all; but if it be now touched on one corner with a piece of zinc, which has been scraped bright, the yellow coat of iodine moves off like a wave and disappears. It is a very pretty process. The zinc and silver forming together a voltaic pair, with the salt water intervening, oxidation of the zinc takes place, and the silver surface commences to evolve hydrogen gas; while this is in a nascent condition it decomposes the film of iodide of silver, giving rise to the production of hydriodic acid, which is very soluble in water, and hence instantly removed.
A Substitute for the Hyposulphite Solution.—M. DAGUERRE suggests using a saltwater solution to remove the coating from the plate. I found this helpful at one point during my travels. My bottle of hyposulphite broke, and I lost most of its contents, leaving just enough to prepare gilding. I turned to salt solution and found it worked well. Make a saturated salt solution in water. First, wash the plate with clean water; then immerse it in the saline solution and agitate it, and the coating will soon disappear. Another method using a salt solution that's half as strong is very interesting and effective. After dipping the plate in cold water, place it in a moderately strong salt solution; it will sit there without any effect, but if you touch one corner with a piece of bright-scraped zinc, the yellow coat of iodine will shift off like a wave and vanish. It’s a really nice process. The zinc and silver create a voltaic pair with the saltwater in between, causing the zinc to oxidize and the silver surface to start releasing hydrogen gas; while this gas is in a nascent state, it breaks down the film of silver iodide, producing hydriodic acid, which is highly soluble in water and is immediately removed.
This process, therefore, differs from that with hyposulphite. The latter acts by dissolving the iodide of silver, the former by decomposing it. It is necessary not to leave the zinc in contact too long, or it deposits stains, and in large plates the contact should be made at the four corners successively, to avoid this accident.
This process, therefore, is different from the one with hyposulphite. The latter works by dissolving silver iodide, while the former does so by breaking it down. It's important not to leave the zinc in contact for too long, as it can leave stains. For large plates, the contact should be made at the four corners one after the other to prevent this issue.
Gilding Solution.—To one pint of pure rain or distilled water add fifteen grains of pure chloride of gold, and to another pint add sixty grains of hyposulphite of soda. When dissolved, pour the gold solution into the hyposulphite by small quantities, shaking well after each addition. The soda solution must not be poured into the gold, as the gold would be immediately decomposed, and the solution turn black, and be unfit for use.
Gilding Solution.—To one pint of pure rainwater or distilled water, add fifteen grains of pure gold chloride, and to another pint, add sixty grains of sodium hyposulfite. Once dissolved, gradually pour the gold solution into the hyposulfite, shaking well after each addition. The soda solution should never be poured into the gold, as this will immediately decompose the gold, causing the solution to turn black and become unusable.
Some operators add muriate of potash and other substances, but these do not possess any advantage except in cases where it is necessary to bleach the solarized portions of the impression, and when such is the case, chloride of sodium (common salt) is probably as effective and is the most convenient. Add about a teaspoonful to two ounces of the gilding.
Some operators add muriate of potash and other substances, but these don't really offer any benefits except when it's necessary to bleach the sun-exposed parts of the impression. In those cases, sodium chloride (table salt) is probably just as effective and is the easiest to use. Add about a teaspoonful to two ounces of the gilding.
Solution, for Increasing the Brilliancy of the Daguerreotype.—This solution will have the effect to thoroughly cleanse the surface of the gilded plate and excite a powerful influence on the general character of the impression. To a solution of three ounces of water, in which is dissolved a quarter of an ounce of cyanide of potassium, add one teaspoonful of a solution containing six ounces of water and half an ounce of each pure carbonate of potash, alum, common salt, gallic acid, sulphate of copper, and purified borax. While the plate is wet, pour on a little, and heat it with a powerful blaze. The effect will be quickly produced, in from three to fifteen seconds. Rinse and dry, as in the gilding.
Solution for Enhancing the Brilliance of the Daguerreotype.—This solution will thoroughly clean the surface of the gilded plate and significantly impact the overall quality of the impression. To a solution of three ounces of water, in which you dissolve a quarter ounce of potassium cyanide, add one teaspoonful of a solution containing six ounces of water and half an ounce each of pure potassium carbonate, alum, table salt, gallic acid, copper sulfate, and purified borax. While the plate is still wet, pour a little of the solution on it and heat it with a strong flame. The effect will be evident within three to fifteen seconds. Rinse and dry as you would for gilding.
Bleaching Solution.—Make a saturated solution of muriate of ammonia (sal ammoniac) in pure water, and filter through paper. Reduce with an equal quantity of water when used. When the linen or any other portion of the impression is badly solarized, after removing the coating, rinse with water; then pour this upon the surface in the same manner as the gilding solution. If the solarization be very deep, apply the lamp beneath, and warm the plate a trifle. Now pour off, and, without rinsing, apply the gilding. The whole operation must be quickly performed, or the chlorine soon attacks the shades of the picture. When properly done, however, the solarized parts are restored to a clear, transparent white.
Bleaching Solution.—Create a saturated solution of ammonium chloride (sal ammoniac) in clean water and filter it through paper. Dilute it with an equal amount of water before use. If the linen or any part of the impression is heavily solarized, rinse it with water after removing the coating; then pour the solution onto the surface just like you would with the gilding solution. If the solarization is very intense, place the lamp underneath and warm the plate slightly. Then pour off the solution and, without rinsing, apply the gilding. The entire process needs to be done quickly, or the chlorine will attack the shades of the picture. When done correctly, the solarized areas will be restored to a clear, transparent white.
Electro, or Cold Gilding.—This process I have adopted, and it produces exceedingly beautiful impressions for the stereoscope, adding a great charm to the pleasing effect of that instrument. It also possesses a pretty and curious effect on views. It is easy of trial, and may be used by dissolving one gramme of chloride of gold in half a litre of ordinary water, and thirty grammes of hyposulphite of soda in another half litre of similar water; then pour the solution of chloride of gold into that of soda, by little and little, agitating it exactly as in M. Fizeau’s preparation, of which there is but a variation.
Electro, or Cold Gilding.—I’ve adopted this process, and it creates incredibly beautiful images for the stereoscope, adding a great charm to the enjoyable effects of that device. It also gives a nice and interesting effect to views. It’s easy to try out; you just need to dissolve one gram of gold chloride in half a liter of regular water and thirty grams of sodium hyposulphite in another half liter of the same water. Then, slowly pour the gold chloride solution into the sodium solution while stirring, just like in M. Fizeau’s preparation, which is really just a variation of this method.
When you wish to use it, pour some into a plate, or any other vessel of the same kind, sufficient to cover the proof; then, after having added to it a drop of ammonia, immerse the plate in it as soon as you take it out of the mercury-box, after having wiped its back and edges, and agitate the mixture quickly from right to left, so as to dissolve rapidly the coating of iodide of silver as usual. As soon as the plate appears white, cease all rapid motion, but continue to give it a slight undulating one; for if it were allowed to remain still for only a few minutes, the proof would be clouded. By little and little, the surface of the plate takes a yellow tint, which darkens more and more, approaching to bistre. You stop therefore, at the color you wish; and when the proof has been washed and dried, in the manner previously explained, it will be found to be fixed, without any stain, with a limpid surface, and an extraordinary warm tone. If you were to augment the proportions of the ammonia or chloride of gold, the operation would progress much quicker, but then the middle of the proof would be always much clearer than towards the border. The mixture may be used several times without being renewed. It does not, however, give such a beautiful color to the impression as when it is newly prepared. By communicating to the vessel containing the solution a continual motion, the impression, when once immersed, will be fixed. During that time, and while attending to anything else, watch its color; and at the end of ten minutes or a quarter of an hour, take it out of the bath and dry it.
When you want to use it, pour some into a plate or any similar container, enough to cover the proof. Then, after adding a drop of ammonia, quickly immerse the plate in it as soon as you take it out of the mercury box, having wiped its back and edges. Move the mixture quickly from side to side to dissolve the coating of iodide of silver as usual. Once the plate looks white, stop the rapid motion but continue to gently rock it; if you let it sit still for just a few minutes, the proof will become cloudy. Gradually, the plate’s surface will take on a yellow tint that darkens, getting closer to a brown color. You stop at the color you desire, and once the proof has been washed and dried as explained earlier, it will be fixed, without any stains, with a clear surface and a wonderfully warm tone. If you increase the amounts of ammonia or gold chloride, the process will go faster, but then the center of the proof will always be much clearer than the edges. The mixture can be used multiple times without needing to be replaced, but it won’t give the impression the same beautiful color as when it’s freshly prepared. By keeping the vessel with the solution in constant motion, the impression will be fixed once it’s immersed. During that time, while you attend to other things, keep an eye on its color; after ten minutes or a quarter of an hour, take it out of the bath and dry it.
Agent for Neutralizing Bromine, Chlorine, and Iodine Vapors.—Aqua ammonia, sprinkled about the chemical or coating room, will soon neutralize all the vapor in the atmosphere of either chlorine, bromine, or iodine. No operator should be without, at least, a six-ounce bottle filled with ammonia. A little of its vapor about the camera-box has a decided and happy effect. Burnt coffee, pulverized, has also the property of destroying the vapors of the above chemicals, as also almost any other agent employed about the Daguerreotype room. Its deodorizing properties are such that if brought in contact with air filled with the odor of decomposing meat, it will instantly destroy all disagreeable smell. It can easily be used in the Daguerreotype room by placing a little of the raw bean, finely pulverized, on an old plate, and roasting it over the spirit-lamp.
Agent for Neutralizing Bromine, Chlorine, and Iodine Vapors.—Aqua ammonia, sprinkled around the chemical or coating room, will quickly neutralize all vapor from chlorine, bromine, or iodine in the air. Every operator should have at least a six-ounce bottle filled with ammonia. A bit of its vapor around the camera box has a noticeable and positive effect. Burnt coffee, when ground up, also has the ability to eliminate the vapors of the above chemicals, along with almost any other substance used in the Daguerreotype room. Its deodorizing qualities are such that if it comes into contact with air filled with the smell of rotting meat, it will instantly get rid of all unpleasant odors. It can be easily used in the Daguerreotype room by putting some raw beans, finely ground, on an old plate and roasting them over the spirit lamp.
Buff Dryer.—There are various methods for keeping buffs dry and free from dust. Some place a sheet of iron against the wall at an angle sufficient to put a lamp between it and the wall, and then let the buff rest against the top of the sheet. By this method the buff is for its full length close to the heated iron, and at the same time exposed to the heated atmosphere and any dust that may be free. I would recommend some arrangement by which the buff would be inclosed. I have found the following to answer the purpose well, which is a box of sheet iron twenty inches long, eight wide and five high, with one end left open and the other closed; the cover is made of the same material, with the edges bent over to go on and off. There are several wires running through the centre of the sides, which it is necessary to cover with cloth or paper to absorb all the moisture that may be made by applying the heat, and the buffs are put in and taken out at the open end. In order that the heat may be as nearly uniform as possible, an iron bar one inch wide, eighteen inches long and one half inch thick, is so bent that the centre is one quarter inch from the bottom of the box, and that at least two inches of each end come in contact with the bottom; this being riveted on the bottom, and a lamp with a small blaze applied to the centre of the bar of iron. This will constitute one of the best and cheapest buff dryers in use. It may be suspended from the wall by placing wires around it, or it may stand upon legs. Perhaps a more convenient plan is to place it under the workbench in a similar position to a drawer. One precaution is necessary: when first heating the dryer, apply but a very gentle heat. This will prevent an accumulation of moisture, which would otherwise pass off in steam, coming in contact with the buff, thus causing a dampness. Another caution: never have the temperature of the air in the heater more than ten degrees above that which surrounds it.
Buff Dryer.—There are several ways to keep buffs dry and free from dust. Some people position a sheet of metal against the wall at an angle that allows a lamp to fit between it and the wall, then let the buff rest against the top of the sheet. This way, the buff stays close to the heated metal along its entire length and is also exposed to the warm air and any dust in the vicinity. I recommend using a setup where the buff is enclosed. I have found the following design to work well: a box made of sheet metal that is twenty inches long, eight inches wide, and five inches high, with one end left open and the other closed; the cover is also made from the same material, with the edges bent over for easy removal. There are several wires running through the center of the sides, which need to be covered with cloth or paper to soak up any moisture generated by the heat. The buffs are placed in and taken out from the open end. To ensure the heat is distributed evenly, an iron bar that is one inch wide, eighteen inches long, and half an inch thick is bent so that the center is a quarter inch from the bottom of the box, with at least two inches of each end resting on the bottom; this is riveted down, and a lamp with a small flame is applied to the center of the iron bar. This setup makes one of the best and most affordable buff dryers available. It can be mounted on the wall by attaching wires around it, or it can be placed on legs. A more convenient option might be to put it under the workbench, similar to a drawer. One important tip: when heating the dryer for the first time, start with a very gentle heat. This helps prevent moisture from building up, which would otherwise escape as steam and come into contact with the buff, causing it to become damp. Another caution: never let the temperature of the air in the dryer exceed ten degrees above the surrounding air temperature.
When wheels are used, they should be encased in a sheet iron or wood case. All those made for our market are provided in this respect.
When wheels are used, they should be covered with a metal or wooden casing. All those made for our market come with this feature.
Keeping Buffs in Order.—This is one of the most important objects to arrest the attention of the operator. Every buff is more or less liable to get out of order by dust falling upon or coming in contact with the polishing powder employed in cleaning the plate. The edge of every plate should be thoroughly wiped and freed from any material that may adhere while cleaning. I have adopted the following method, which proves highly successful:
Keeping Buffs in Order.—This is one of the most important tasks for the operator to pay attention to. Every buff can easily get messed up due to dust settling on or coming into contact with the polishing powder used for cleaning the plate. The edge of each plate should be carefully wiped and cleared of any residue that might stick during cleaning. I’ve adopted the following method, which has been very effective:
Rub the buff leather, holding the face down, with the sharp edge of a pair of shears or a piece of glass. This brings out any portion of the skin which may have become matted from any moisture, and also takes out any substance imbedded in it, and prevents it from scratching. Then, with a stiff brush, rub the buff well, and it will be found to work well. This same process employ on wheels and hand buffs every morning, or oftener, as occasion requires.
Rub the buff leather with the face down using the sharp edge of a pair of shears or a piece of glass. This will help to lift any part of the skin that may have gotten matted from moisture, and it will also remove any debris stuck in it, preventing it from scratching. Then, use a stiff brush to clean the buff thoroughly, and you’ll find it works well. Use the same process on wheels and hand buffs every morning, or more often if needed.
Preparing Buffs.—Two of these are necessary. That part of the stick to be covered should be about eighteen or twenty inches long, and three wide, and made crowning on the face from one end to the other, about one half inch. Before covering, these are to be padded with two or three thicknesses of Canton flannel. The buff should not be too hard, but padded with flannel, so that by drawing it over the plate, it may touch across the surface. The only proper material for buffs is prepared buckskin; and if prepared in a proper manner, this needs nothing but to be tacked upon the stick. There are several varieties of wheels employed; the one most generally adopted is Lewis’ patent, which consists of several varieties of wheels. Any operator can make a suitable wheel on the same plan of a turning lathe.
Preparing Buffs.—You need two of these. The part of the stick that gets covered should be about eighteen to twenty inches long and three inches wide, and it should be rounded on the face from one end to the other by about half an inch. Before covering, pad them with two or three layers of Canton flannel. The buff shouldn’t be too hard; it should be padded with flannel so that when you draw it over the plate, it lightly touches the surface. The best material for buffs is prepared buckskin, and if it's prepared correctly, all you need to do is tack it onto the stick. There are several types of wheels used; the most commonly used is Lewis’ patent, which includes several types of wheels. Any operator can create a suitable wheel following the same technique as a turning lathe.
To Clean Buckskins.—When the operator is compelled to purchase an unprepared buckskin, the following is a good process for cleaning it: There is always in the buckskin leather that is purchased, more or less of an oily matter, which is acquired in its preparation, sometimes even amounting, to a third of its weight. The following is the mode of ridding it of this noxious ingredient: Dissolve, in about six or seven quarts of filtered water, about five ounces of potash; when dissolved, wash with the solution an ordinary buckskin; when it has been well stirred in the liquid, the water becomes very soapy, owing to the combination of the potash with the oily matters contained in the skin. Throw away this solution and use some fresh water without potash and rather tepid; change it several times until it remains quite limpid. Then gently stretch the skin to dry in an airy shaded place. When thoroughly dried, rub it well between the hands. It thus becomes very pliant and velvet-like.
To Clean Buckskins.—When you have to buy an unprepared buckskin, here’s a good way to clean it: Buckskin leather usually has some oily substance in it from the preparation process, sometimes making up to a third of its weight. Here’s how to get rid of that unwanted ingredient: Dissolve about five ounces of potash in six or seven quarts of filtered water; once dissolved, wash the buckskin with this solution. After stirring it well in the liquid, the water will become quite soapy due to the potash reacting with the oils in the skin. Discard this solution and use fresh, slightly warm water without potash; change it several times until the water is clear. Then, gently stretch the skin to dry it in a shaded, airy spot. Once it's completely dry, rub it between your hands. This will make it very soft and velvety.
Reflectors for Taking Views.—There have been excellent cameras introduced for taking views, but the time of exposure, which is increased in proportion to the focal length, is considered an objection; consequently many adhere to the old plan of using the speculum, or rather, substitute a mirror. I now have one which I have used for several years and find it equal to any article of the kind have ever tried. One is easily made by a tin man, at a trifling expense. Procure a piece of best plate looking-glass, two and a half by five inches for a quarter, or four by eight for a half-sized camera; put a piece of pasteboard of the same size on the back, to protect the silvering, and stick around the edge in the same manner as in putting up a picture. Take a sheet of tin for the large size, or a half sheet for the other; place the glass crosswise in the centre; bend the ends of the tin over the edge of the glass and turn them back so as to form a groove to hold the glass, and still allow it to slide out and in. These ends of the tin must be turned out flaring, that they may not reflect in the glass.
Reflectors for Taking Views.—There are now great cameras available for capturing images, but the exposure time, which gets longer with the focal length, is often seen as a drawback. Because of this, many people stick to the traditional method of using a speculum or, instead, go for a mirror. I currently have one that I've been using for several years and I find it just as good as any other product of its kind I've ever tested. You can easily make one with a tin worker for a low cost. Get a piece of high-quality plate glass, two and a half by five inches for a quarter, or four by eight for a half-sized camera; put a piece of cardboard of the same size on the back to protect the silver coating, and attach it around the edges just like you would frame a picture. Use a sheet of tin for the larger size or a half sheet for the smaller size; place the glass horizontally in the center; bend the edges of the tin over the glass and fold them back to create a groove that holds the glass while still allowing it to slide in and out. The ends of the tin should be flared out so that they don’t reflect in the glass.
Have a tin band about an inch wide made to fit close on the end of the camera tube; place it on, and taking the tin containing the glass, bring it to an angle of forty-five degrees with the tube, extending nearly the whole length of the glass in front of the lenses; lap the loose ends of the tin on each side of the tin rim, and having your camera turned on the side to throw the view lengthwise, arrange the exact angle by examining the image on the ground-glass. When you have it exactly right, hold it while it is soldered fast to the band. Take out your glass and stain the tin black, to prevent reflection.
Have a tin band about an inch wide made to fit snugly on the end of the camera tube. Put it on, then take the tin with the glass and hold it at a 45-degree angle to the tube, extending nearly the entire length of the glass in front of the lenses. Overlap the loose ends of the tin on each side of the tin rim. With your camera turned on its side to position the view lengthwise, adjust the angle by checking the image on the ground glass. Once you have it just right, hold it in place while it's soldered securely to the band. Remove the glass and paint the tin black to prevent reflections.
CHAPTER III.
CHEMICALS.
Bromine and its Compounds—Iodine and its Compounds—Chlorine and its compounds—Cyanide of Potassium—Hyposulphite of Soda—Hyposulphite of Gold—Nitric Acid—Nitro-Muriatic Acid—Hydrochloric Acid—Hydrofluoric Acid—Sulphuric Acid—Accelerating Substances—Liquid Sensitives—Dry Sensitives, etc., etc.
Bromine and its Compounds—Iodine and its Compounds—Chlorine and its compounds—Potassium Cyanide—Sodium Hyposulfite—Gold Hyposulfite—Nitric Acid—Nitro-Muriatic Acid—Hydrochloric Acid—Hydrofluoric Acid—Sulfuric Acid—Accelerating Substances—Liquid Sensitives—Dry Sensitives, etc., etc.
BROMINE.
An article so extensively used in the practice of the Daguerreotypic art as Bromine, is deserving of especial attention, and accordingly every person should endeavor to make himself familiar with its properties and applications.
An article as widely used in the practice of the Daguerreotypic art as Bromine deserves special attention, and everyone should strive to become familiar with its properties and uses.
History.—This element was discovered in 1826 by M. Balard, in the mother-liquor, or residue of the evaporation of sea-water. It is named from its offensive odor (bromos, bad odor). In nature it is found in sea-water combined with alkaline bases, and in the waters of many saline springs and inland seas. The salt springs of Ohio abound in the compounds of bromine, and it is found in the waters of the Dead Sea. The only use which has been made of bromine in the arts is in the practice of photography. It is also used in medicine In a chemical point of view it is very interesting, from its similarity in properties, and the parallelism of its compounds to chlorine and iodine.
History.—This element was discovered in 1826 by M. Balard, in the mother liquor, or residue from evaporating seawater. It's named for its bad smell (bromos, meaning bad odor). In nature, it’s found in seawater combined with alkaline bases, and in the waters of various saline springs and inland seas. The salt springs of Ohio are rich in bromine compounds, and it’s also present in the waters of the Dead Sea. The only use that has been made of bromine in the arts is in photography. It’s also utilized in medicine. From a chemical perspective, it’s quite interesting due to its similar properties and the parallels of its compounds to chlorine and iodine.
Dr. D. Alter, of Freeport, Pa., is the only American manufacturer, and furnishes all of the “American Bromine.” Yet we understand much purporting to be of German manufacture is prepared from that made in Freeport. This is done by individuals in this city, who get well paid for the deception.
Dr. D. Alter from Freeport, Pa., is the only American manufacturer and supplies all the "American Bromine." However, we understand that a lot of what claims to be of German origin is actually made from the bromine produced in Freeport. This is done by people in this city, who receive good pay for this deception.
For the successful application of bromine as an accelerating agent, we are indebted to Mr. John Goddard of London, who at the time was associated with Mr. John Johnson, now a resident of this city.
For the successful use of bromine as an accelerating agent, we owe thanks to Mr. John Goddard of London, who was then working with Mr. John Johnson, now living in this city.
Preparation.—The mother-liquor containing bromides is treated with a current of chlorine gas, which decomposes these salts, setting the bromine free, which at once colors the liquid to a reddish brown color. Ether is added and shaken with the liquid, until all the bromine is taken up by the ether, which acquires a fine red color and separates from the saline liquid.
Preparation.—The mother liquor containing bromides is treated with a stream of chlorine gas, which breaks down these salts, releasing bromine that immediately turns the liquid a reddish-brown color. Ether is added and shaken with the liquid until all the bromine is absorbed by the ether, which takes on a bright red color and separates from the saline liquid.
{74}
{74}
Solution of caustic potash is then added to the ethereal solution, forming bromide of potassium and bromate of potash. This solution is evaporated to dryness, and the salts being collected are heated in a glass retort with sulphuric acid and a little oxide of manganese. The bromine is distilled, and is condensed in a cooled receiver, into a red liquid.
A solution of caustic potash is then added to the ether solution, creating potassium bromide and potassium bromate. This solution is evaporated until dry, and the resulting salts are heated in a glass retort with sulfuric acid and a small amount of manganese oxide. The bromine is distilled and collected in a cooled receiver, turning into a red liquid.
Properties.—Bromine somewhat resembles chlorine in its odor, but is more offensive. At common temperatures it is a very volatile liquid, of a deep red color, and with a specific gravity of 3, being one of the heaviest fluids known. Sulphuric acid floats on its surface, and is used to prevent its escape. At zero it freezes into a brittle solid. A few drops in a large flask will fill the whole vessel when slightly warmed, with blood red vapors, which have a density of nearly 6.00, air being one. It is a non-conductor of electricity, and suffers no change of properties from heat, or any other of the imponderable agents. It dissolves slightly in water, forming a bleaching solution.
Properties.—Bromine has a smell that's somewhat similar to chlorine, but it's more unpleasant. At normal temperatures, it's a very volatile liquid with a deep red color and a specific gravity of 3, making it one of the heaviest known fluids. Sulfuric acid floats on its surface and is used to prevent it from escaping. At zero degrees, it freezes into a brittle solid. Just a few drops in a large flask will fill the entire vessel with blood-red vapors when slightly warmed, which have a density of nearly 6.00, with air being 1. It's a non-conductor of electricity and doesn't change its properties from heat or any other non-material agents. It dissolves slightly in water, creating a bleaching solution.
Chloride of Bromine.—This as an accelerating agent is by many considered superior {75} to the other Bromide combinations. It can be readily prepared by passing a current of chlorine through a vessel containing bromine. A mixture of two parts muriatic acid and one of black oxide of manganese, should be put into a flask having a bent tube to conduct the chlorine vapor into the bromine in another vessel. This last vessel should also be supplied with a bent tube for conducting the combined vapors with a third vessel or receiver. On the application of the heat from a spirit lamp to the bottom of the flask, a current of chlorine gas will be disengaged, and pass into the bromine, when it readily combines, and gives off a vapor, which, when condensed in the third vessel, forms a volatile yellowish-red liquid. It is best, even at ordinary temperature, to place the receiver in an ice bath. For manner of using, see farther on, under head of Accelerators.
Chloride of Bromine.—Many consider this to be a better accelerating agent {75} than other bromide combinations. It can be easily prepared by sending a stream of chlorine through a container with bromine. Mix two parts hydrochloric acid with one part black manganese oxide and place it in a flask with a bent tube to direct chlorine vapor into the bromine in another container. This second container should also have a bent tube to carry the combined vapors into a third container or receiver. When heat from a spirit lamp is applied to the bottom of the flask, chlorine gas will be released and flow into the bromine, where it quickly combines and produces a vapor that, when cooled in the third container, turns into a volatile yellowish-red liquid. It's advisable to put the receiver in an ice bath even at room temperature. For usage instructions, see further under the section on Accelerators.
Bromides.—A bromide treated with oil of vitriol, disengages chlorohyadic acid; but vapors of bromine are constantly disengaged, at the same time imparting a brown color to the gas. If the bromide be treated with a mixture of sulphuric acid, and peroxide of manganese, bromide is only disengaged. A solution of a bromide gives, with of nitrate {76} silver, a light yellowish white precipitate of bromide of silver, which is insoluble in an excess of acid, and readily dissolves in ammonia. The precipitated bromide is colored by light like the chloride, but is immediately tinged brown, while the chloride assumes at first a violet hue. The bromides, in solution, are readily decomposed and chloride being set free, colors the liquid brown.
Bromides.—When a bromide is treated with sulfuric acid, it releases chlorohydric acid; however, bromine vapors are constantly released at the same time, giving the gas a brown color. If the bromide is treated with a mixture of sulfuric acid and manganese dioxide, only bromine is released. A solution of a bromide reacts with silver nitrate to form a light yellowish-white precipitate of silver bromide, which is insoluble in excess acid and easily dissolves in ammonia. The precipitated bromide is sensitive to light like chloride, but it quickly turns brown, while the chloride initially takes on a violet hue. Bromides in solution can easily decompose, and the released chloride colors the liquid brown.
In the whole range of heliographic chemicals there is probably not another collection less understood and being so productive of interesting investigation as the bromides.
In the entire range of heliographic chemicals, there’s likely no other group that's less understood yet so rich in fascinating research opportunities as the bromides.
Bromide of Iodine.—M. de Valicours furnishes us with the best method for preparing this mixture:
Bromide of Iodine.—M. de Valicours provides us with the best way to prepare this mixture:
“Into a bottle of the capacity of about two ounces, pour thirty or forty drops of bromine, the precise quantity not being of importance. Then add, grain by grain, as much iodine as the bromine will dissolve till quite saturated. This point is ascertained when some grains of the iodine remain undissolved. They may remain in the bottle, as they will not interfere with the success of the preparation.
“Into a bottle that holds about two ounces, pour thirty or forty drops of bromine; the exact amount isn’t crucial. Then, add iodine one grain at a time until the bromine can no longer dissolve it, until it's fully saturated. You can tell you've reached this point when a few grains of iodine are left undissolved. It’s fine for these grains to stay in the bottle, as they won’t affect the preparation's success.”
“The bromide of iodine thus prepared, from its occupying so small a space, can very easily be carried, but in this state it is much too concentrated to be used. When it is to be employed, pour a small quantity, say fifteen drops, by means of a dropping-tube, into a bottle containing about half an ounce of filtered river water. It will easily be understood that the bromide of iodine can be used with a greater or less quantity of water without altering the proportion which exists between the bromine and iodine.”
“The iodine bromide made this way takes up so little space that it's easy to transport, but it's way too concentrated to use as is. When you're ready to use it, put a small amount, around fifteen drops, using a dropper, into a bottle with about half an ounce of filtered river water. It's clear that the iodine bromide can be used with more or less water without changing the ratio of bromine to iodine.”
This article forms a very good dry accelerator, and is by some persons thought superior to all others, as it works with great uniformity, and is less liable to scum the plate in coating at high temperatures, or when the thermometer indicates a heat above 60 deg.
This article serves as a highly effective dry accelerator and is considered by some to be the best available. It operates with excellent consistency and is less likely to cause scum on the plate when coating at high temperatures or when the thermometer reads above 60 degrees.
Bromide of Potassium—Is prepared by mixing bromine and a solution of pure potass together, and evaporating to dryness; it crystallizes in small cubes, and dissolves readily in water. This agent is extensively employed in the paper and glass processes.
Bromide of Potassium—Is made by mixing bromine with a solution of pure potash and then evaporating it until it's dry; it forms small cubes and dissolves easily in water. This compound is widely used in paper and glass manufacturing processes.
Bromide of Lime. This the principal accelerator used in the American practice, and is the best of all dry combinations at present employed. There are many reasons why the dry is advantageous; these are too familiar to repeat.
Bromide of Lime. This is the main accelerator used in American practice and is currently the best of all dry combinations available. There are many reasons why the dry form is beneficial; these reasons are too well-known to mention again.
“The bromide of lime may be produced by allowing bromine vapor to act upon hydrate of lime for some hours. The most convenient method of doing this is to place some of the hydrate at the bottom of the flask, and then put some bromine into a glass capsule supported a little above the lime. As heat is developed during the combination, it is better to place the lower part of the flask in water at the temperature of about 50 deg. Fah.; the lime gradually assumes a beautiful scarlet color, and acquires an appearance very similar to that of the red iodide of mercury. The chloro-iodide of lime may be formed in the same manner; it has a deep brown color. Both these compounds, when the vapor arising from them is not too intense, have an odor analogous to that of bleaching powder, and quite distinguishable from chlorine, bromine, or iodine alone.”
"The bromide of lime can be made by letting bromine vapor interact with lime hydrate for several hours. The easiest way to do this is to put some lime hydrate at the bottom of a flask, then place some bromine in a glass capsule positioned slightly above the lime. Since heat is generated during this reaction, it’s best to put the lower part of the flask in water heated to about 50 degrees Fahrenheit. The lime will gradually turn a beautiful scarlet color, looking a lot like red mercury iodide. Chloro-iodide of lime can be created in the same way; it has a deep brown color. Both of these compounds, when the vapor produced isn’t too strong, have a smell similar to bleaching powder, which is quite different from the scents of chlorine, bromine, or iodine on their own."
Farther on, I have given, in connection with accelerators, a process I adopt, which is far less tedious and equally reliable.
Farther on, I have provided, related to accelerators, a method I use that is much less tedious and just as reliable.
Bromide of Silver—May be formed by pouring an alkaline bromide into a solution of nitrate of silver, in the shape of a white, slightly yellowish precipitate, which is insoluble in water and nitric acid, but readily dissolves in ammonia and the alkaline hyposulphites. Chlorine easily decomposes bromide of silver, and transforms it into chloride.
Bromide of Silver—Can be created by adding an alkaline bromide to a solution of silver nitrate, resulting in a white, slightly yellowish precipitate that is insoluble in water and nitric acid but easily dissolves in ammonia and alkaline hyposulfites. Chlorine readily breaks down bromide of silver and converts it into chloride.
M. Biot has expressed his opinion, that it is not possible to find any substance more sensitive to light than the bromide of silver. This is true to a certain extent, but in combination with deoxidizing agents, other preparations have a decided superiority over the pure bromide of silver.
M. Biot has stated that it’s impossible to find any substance more sensitive to light than silver bromide. While that’s partly true, when combined with deoxidizing agents, other preparations are definitely better than pure silver bromide.
Bromide of Gold—Is readily prepared by adding a little bromide to the brown gold of the assayers, and allowing it to remain some time under water, or assisting its action by a gentle heat. It forms a salt of a bright crimson color, but in its general properties is precisely similar to the chloride used in gilding.
Bromide of Gold—Is easily made by adding a bit of bromide to the brown gold of the assayers and letting it sit for a while under water, or by applying gentle heat to speed up the process. It creates a bright crimson salt, but its overall properties are exactly like those of the chloride used in gilding.
Bromide of Magnesia—Is prepared in the same manner as bromide of lime.
Bromide of Magnesia—Is made in the same way as bromide of lime.
This mixture is particularly adapted for hot climates, and is used in this country by some few who regard its use as a valuable secret.
This mix is especially suited for hot climates and is used by a select few in this country who see it as a valuable secret.
Bromide of Starch.—This preparation is much used, but not alone. It is combined with lime by putting about one part in measure of starch to four of lime. It is prepared by adding bromine to finely pulverized starch, in the same manner as bromide of lime. (See Accelerators.)
Bromide of Starch.—This product is commonly used, but not on its own. It is mixed with lime by adding about one part of starch to four parts of lime. It’s made by adding bromine to finely ground starch, similar to how bromide of lime is prepared. (See Accelerators.)
Experiments with Bromine.—Place in a very flaring wine glass a few drops (say ten) of bromine, then place a small piece of phosphorus about one-twentieth of an inch in diameter. Place the latter on the end of a stick from five to ten feet in length. So place it that the phosphorus can be dropped into the glass, and in an instant combustion giving a loud report will be the result.
Experiments with Bromine.—Put a few drops (about ten) of bromine into a very wide wine glass, then add a small piece of phosphorus about one-twentieth of an inch across. Attach it to the end of a stick that's five to ten feet long. Position it so that the phosphorus can be dropped into the glass, and you'll quickly see combustion occur with a loud bang as a result.
b. Expose a daguerreotype plate to the vapor of bromine, it assumes a leaden-grey color, which, blackens by light very readily. Exposing this to mercury will not produce any decided action upon the lights. Immerse it in the solution of the muriate of soda, and the parts unacted upon by light becomes a jet black, while the parts on which the light has acted will be dissolved off, leaving a clean coating of silver. This will be a most decided black picture on a white ground.
b. Expose a daguerreotype plate to bromine vapor, and it will turn a leaden-grey color, which quickly darkens with light. Exposing it to mercury won't have much effect on the lighter areas. If you immerse it in a sodium chloride solution, the areas that were not exposed to light will become jet black, while the areas exposed to light will dissolve, leaving a clean silver coating. This creates a stark black image on a white background.
c. Expose an impressioned plate, that has been sufficient time in the camera to become solarized, to the vapors of bromine, and the impression will be fully developed and exhibit no signs of solarization. The exposure over the bromine most be very brief. Chlorine or iodine will produce the same result. The latter is preferable.
c. Expose an impressioned plate that has spent enough time in the camera to become solarized to the vapors of bromine, and the image will be fully developed without any signs of solarization. The exposure to the bromine must be very brief. Chlorine or iodine will achieve the same result, but iodine is preferable.
Again, should the impressioned plate be exposed too long over the vapor of bromine, the impression would be rendered wholly insensitive to the mercurial vapor. Hence this method is resorted to for restoring the sensibility of the plate when there is reason to believe that the impression would not be a desirable one; as, for example, if a likeness of a child be wanted, and it had moved before the plate had been sufficiently long exposed in the camera, the plate may be restored to its original sensitiveness by re-coating over bromine, as above, thus saving the time and labor of re-preparing the plate for the chemicals.
Again, if the exposed plate is left too long over the bromine vapor, it will become completely insensitive to the mercury vapor. This method is used to restore the sensitivity of the plate when there's a concern that the impression won't be good; for instance, if you want a likeness of a child and they moved before the plate was exposed in the camera long enough, the plate can be restored to its original sensitivity by recoating it with bromine, as mentioned earlier, saving the time and effort of re-preparing the plate for the chemicals.
d. If by accident (we would not advise a trial to any extent of this), you should inhale a quantity of the vapor of bromine, immediately inhale the vapor of aqua ammonia, as this neutralizes the dangerous effect of the bromine vapor. Every operator should be provided with a bottle of ammonia, as a little sprinkled about the chemical room soon disinfects it of all iodine or bromine vapor, and also tends to facilitate the operation in the camera.
d. If you accidentally inhale some bromine vapor (we definitely don’t recommend testing this), immediately inhale the vapor of ammonia, as it neutralizes the harmful effects of the bromine vapor. Every operator should have a bottle of ammonia handy, as a little sprinkled around the chemical room quickly disinfects it from any iodine or bromine vapor, and also helps streamline the process in the camera.
IODINE.
History of Iodine.—This is one of the simple chemical bodies which was discovered in 1812 by M. Courtois, of Paris, a manufacturer of saltpetre, who found it in the mother-water of that salt. Its properties were first studied into by M. Gay Lussac. It partakes much of the nature of chlorine and bromine. Its affinity for other substances is so powerful as to prevent it from existing in an isolated state. It occurs combined with potassium and sodium in many mineral waters, such as the brine spring of Ashby-de-la-Zouche, and other strongly saline springs. This combination exists sparingly in sea-water, abundantly in many species of fucus or sea-weed, and in the kelp made from them. It is an ingredient in the Salt Licks, saline, and brine springs of this country, especially of those in the valley of the Mississippi. It is sparingly found in fresh-water plants, as well also in coal, and in combination with numerous other bodies.
History of Iodine.—Iodine is one of the basic chemical elements discovered in 1812 by M. Courtois, a saltpetre manufacturer in Paris, who found it in the residual brine from that salt. Its properties were first explored by M. Gay Lussac. Iodine has characteristics similar to chlorine and bromine. Its strong affinity for other substances means it doesn't exist in a pure form. It’s found combined with potassium and sodium in many mineral waters, including the brine spring at Ashby-de-la-Zouche and other highly saline springs. This combination is present in small amounts in seawater, abundantly in various types of fucus (seaweed), and in the kelp made from these seaweeds. It is also a component of the salt licks, saline, and brine springs in this country, especially those in the Mississippi River valley. It can be found in limited amounts in freshwater plants, as well as in coal and in combination with many other substances.
Fermented liquors contain iodine; wine, cider, and perry are more iodureted than the average of fresh waters. Milk is richer in iodine than wine; independently of the soil, with which it varies, the proportion of iodine in milk is in the inverse ratio of the abundance of that secretion. Eggs (not the shell) contain much iodine. A fowl’s egg weighing 50 gr. contains more iodine than a quart of cow’s milk. Iodine exists in arable land. It is abundant in sulphur, iron, and manganese ores, and sulphuret of mercury: but rare in gypsum, chalk, calcareous and silicious earths. Any attempt to extract iodine economically should be made with the plants of the ferro-iodureted fresh waters. Most of the bodies regarded by the therapeutists as pectoral and anti-scrofulous are rich in iodine.
Fermented drinks contain iodine; wine, cider, and perry have higher iodine levels than most fresh water. Milk has more iodine than wine; regardless of soil differences, the amount of iodine in milk is inversely related to how much of it is produced. Eggs (excluding the shell) also have a lot of iodine. A chicken egg weighing 50 grams has more iodine than a quart of cow's milk. Iodine is present in farmland and is found abundantly in sulfur, iron, and manganese ores, as well as mercury sulfide, but is scarce in gypsum, chalk, and calcareous or siliceous soils. Any effort to extract iodine efficiently should focus on plants from iodine-rich freshwater sources. Many substances considered beneficial for the lungs and anti-scurvy by health practitioners are rich in iodine.
It is probably to the application of this body that we owe the discovery of the daguerreotype. There is no record of the precise date when Daguerre commenced experimenting with iodine, but by the published correspondence between him and M. Neipce, his partner, it was previous to 1833. There is no doubt, however, that the first successful application was made in 1838, as the discovery was reported to the world early in January, 1839.
It’s likely that this body led to the discovery of the daguerreotype. There’s no exact record of when Daguerre started experimenting with iodine, but based on the published letters between him and his partner, M. Neipce, it was before 1833. However, it’s certain that the first successful application happened in 1838, as the discovery was announced to the world in early January 1839.
Preparation.—Iodine is mostly prepared from kelp, or the half vitrified ashes of seaweed, prepared by the inhabitants of the western islands, and the northern shores of Scotland and Ireland. It is treated with water, which washes out all the soluble salts, and the filtered solution is evaporated until nearly all the carbonate of soda and other saline matters have crystallized out. The remaining liquor, which contains the iodine, is mixed with successive portions of sulphuric acid in a leaden retort, and after standing some days to allow the sulphureted hydrogen, etc., to escape, peroxide of manganese is added, and the whole gently heated. Iodine distills over in a purple vapor, and is condensed in a receiver, or in a series of two-necked globes.
Preparation.—Iodine is mainly sourced from kelp or the semi-vitrified ashes of seaweed collected by people living on the western islands and the northern coasts of Scotland and Ireland. It's treated with water to wash out all the soluble salts, and the filtered solution is evaporated until most of the soda ash and other salts have crystallized out. The remaining liquid, which contains the iodine, is mixed with successive amounts of sulfuric acid in a lead retort, and after sitting for a few days to let any hydrogen sulfide and other gases escape, manganese dioxide is added, and the mixture is gently heated. Iodine then vaporizes in a purple mist and is collected in a receiver or a series of two-necked flasks.
Properties.—Iodine is solid at the ordinary temperature, presenting the appearance of dark-grey or purple spangles, possessing a high degree of metallic lustre. It somewhat resembles plumbago, with which it is sometimes diluted, particularly when it is fine. Operators should endeavor to secure the larger crystals. It melts at 224.6 deg., forming a brown or nearly black liquid. It boils at about 356 deg., and emits a very deep violet colored vapor. It gives off a very appreciable vapor, sufficient for all purposes of forming the iodide of silver on the daguerreotype plate, at a temperature of 45 deg. or even lower. Iodine crystallizes readily. Every operator has found upon the side of the jar in his coating-box, perfectly regular crystals, deposited there by sublimation.
Properties.—Iodine is solid at room temperature, appearing as dark-grey or purple flakes with a shiny metallic finish. It looks somewhat like graphite, especially when finely ground. Users should try to obtain the larger crystals. It melts at 224.6°F, turning into a brown or nearly black liquid. It boils at about 356°F and releases a very deep violet vapor. It produces a noticeable vapor, which is enough for all purposes of creating silver iodide on the daguerreotype plate at a temperature of 45°F or even lower. Iodine easily crystallizes. Every user has discovered perfectly formed crystals on the side of the jar in their coating box, formed by sublimation.
Water dissolves but a small proportion of iodine, requiring 7000 parts of water to dissolve one of iodine, {85} or one grain to the gallon of water. Alcohol and ether dissolve it freely, as does a solution of nitrate or hydrochlorate of ammonia and of iodides.
Water dissolves only a small amount of iodine, needing 7000 parts of water to dissolve one part of iodine, {85} or one grain per gallon of water. Alcohol and ether dissolve it easily, as do solutions of ammonium nitrate, ammonium hydrochloride, and iodides.
The density of solid iodine is 4.95; that of its vapor 8.716. It greatly resembles chlorine and bromine in its combinations, but its affinities are weaker. It does not destroy the majority of organic substances, and vegetable colors generally resist its action. It combines with several organic substances, imparting to them peculiar colors. It colors the skin brown, but the stain soon disappears.
The density of solid iodine is 4.95, while its vapor has a density of 8.716. It is very similar to chlorine and bromine in how it combines with other substances, but its attractive forces are weaker. It doesn’t break down most organic materials, and plant-based colors usually withstand its effects. It can bond with several organic substances, giving them unique colors. It also turns the skin brown, but the stain fades quickly.
Chloride of Iodine—Is formed by passing chlorine into a bottle containing some iodine. This can be readily done by pouring one ounce and a half of muriatic acid upon a quarter of an ounce of powdered black oxide of manganese, and heat it gradually in a flask, to which is adapted a bent glass tube. This tube must connect with the bottle containing the iodine, and the yellowish-green gas disengaged will readily combine with the iodine, forming a deep red liquid, and the operation is complete. The use of chloride of iodine will be referred to in connection with the Accelerators.
Chloride of Iodine—Is created by introducing chlorine into a bottle filled with iodine. You can easily do this by pouring one and a half ounces of muriatic acid on a quarter ounce of powdered black oxide of manganese, then gently heating it in a flask that has a bent glass tube attached. This tube should connect to the bottle with the iodine, and the yellowish-green gas produced will quickly mix with the iodine, forming a deep red liquid, completing the process. The use of chloride of iodine will be discussed in relation to the Accelerators.
{86}
{86}
Iodides.—The iodide treated with the oil of vitriol, instantly produces a considerable deposit of iodine; and if the mixture be heated, intense violent vapors are disengaged. The reaction is due to the decomposition of oil of vitriol by iodohydric acid, water and sulphurous acid being formed, and iodine set free. The iodides in solution are decomposed by chlorine, iodine being precipitated, the smallest quantity of which in solution is instantly detected by its imparting to starch an intensely blue color.
Iodides.—When iodide is treated with sulfuric acid, it quickly produces a significant amount of iodine. If the mixture is heated, it releases strong, aggressive vapors. This reaction happens because sulfuric acid breaks down when mixed with hydriodic acid, resulting in the formation of water and sulfur dioxide, and releasing iodine. When iodides in solution come into contact with chlorine, they decompose, with iodine precipitating out; even a tiny amount of iodine in solution can be immediately identified by its ability to turn starch a deep blue color.
Iodide of Potassium.[4]—This compound is easily made in the following manner: Subject to a moderate heat a mixture of 100 parts of iodine, 75 of carbonate of potash, 30 of iron filings, and 120 parts of water. This mass must be thoroughly dried and then heated to redness; the resulting reddish powder is to be washed with water, and the solution obtained filtered, and evaporated to dryness. It is found that 100 parts of iodine yield 135 parts of very white, but slightly alkaline, iodide of potassium.
Iodide of Potassium.[4]—You can easily make this compound by following these steps: Apply moderate heat to a mixture of 100 parts iodine, 75 parts potassium carbonate, 30 parts iron filings, and 120 parts water. This mixture needs to be thoroughly dried and then heated until it turns red. The resulting reddish powder should be washed with water, then the solution filtered and evaporated until dry. You’ll find that 100 parts of iodine produce 135 parts of very white, but slightly alkaline, iodide of potassium.
[4] I shall present the preparation of only a few iodides, and such as are more intimately connected with the Daguerreotype.
[4] I will show you how to prepare just a few iodides, particularly those that are closely related to the Daguerreotype.
Experiment.—On projecting dry pulverized iodide of potassium into fused anhydrous phosphoric acid, a violent disengagement of iodine takes place, attended by a transient ignition; fused hydrate of phosphoric acid liberates iodine abundantly from iodide of potassium; this reaction is accompanied by the phenomenon of flame and formation of a considerable quantity of hydriodic acid.
Experiment.—When you throw dry powdered potassium iodide into melted anhydrous phosphoric acid, it releases a lot of iodine very quickly, causing a brief burst of flame; melted phosphoric acid also releases plenty of iodine from potassium iodide; this reaction produces flames and a significant amount of hydriodic acid.
Iodide of Mercury.—For the preparation of iodide of mercury, Dublanc recommends to cover 100 grms. of mercury with 1 kilogrm. of alcohol, to add 124 grms. of iodine gradually in portions of ten grms., and agitating between each fresh addition, until the alcohol becomes colorless again. After the addition of the last 4 grms. the alcohol remains colored, the whole of the mercury having become converted into iodide. The resulting preparation is washed with alcohol; it is crystalline and of a hyacinth color.
Iodide of Mercury.—To make iodide of mercury, Dublanc suggests covering 100 grams of mercury with 1 kilogram of alcohol. Then, gradually add 124 grams of iodine in ten-gram portions, shaking it well between each addition until the alcohol becomes colorless again. After adding the last 4 grams, the alcohol will still be colored, indicating that all the mercury has been converted into iodide. The final product is washed with alcohol; it is crystalline and has a hyacinth color.
Iodide of Silver.—This compound is formed upon every plate upon which a Daguerreotype is produced. The vapor of iodine coming in contact with the silver surface, forms an iodide which is peculiarly sensitive to light.
Iodide of Silver.—This compound forms on every plate where a Daguerreotype is created. When iodine vapor meets the silver surface, it creates an iodide that is especially sensitive to light.
The various colors produced are owing to the thickness of the coating, and the maximum sensibility of the coating, as generally adopted, is when it assumes a deep yellow, or slightly tinged with rose color.
The different colors produced are due to the thickness of the coating, and the maximum sensitivity of the coating, as commonly used, occurs when it takes on a deep yellow or has a slight hint of pink.
This compound is largely employed in most photographic processes on paper, and may be easily prepared by the following formula: By adding iodide of potassium to a solution of nitrate of silver, a yellowish-white precipitate of iodide of silver is obtained, which is insoluble in water, slightly soluble in nitric acid, and soluble in a small degree in ammonia, which properties seem easily to distinguish it from the chloride and bromide of silver. Chlorine decomposes it and sets the iodine free, and chlorohydric acid converts it into a chloride. It fuses below a red heat. Although the effect of light on the iodide is less rapid than on the chloride, the former sooner turning black, assuming a brown tinge; but when in connection with gallic acid and the ferrocyanate of potash, it forms two of the most sensitive processes on paper.
This compound is mainly used in most photography processes on paper, and it can be easily made using the following formula: By adding potassium iodide to a solution of silver nitrate, a yellowish-white precipitate of silver iodide is produced, which is insoluble in water, slightly soluble in nitric acid, and somewhat soluble in ammonia. These properties help differentiate it from silver chloride and silver bromide. Chlorine breaks it down and releases the iodine, while hydrochloric acid turns it into a chloride. It melts at a temperature below red heat. Although the effect of light on iodide is slower than on chloride, the iodide turns black more quickly, taking on a brown tint; however, when combined with gallic acid and potassium ferrocyanide, it creates two of the most sensitive processes on paper.
Iodide of silver dissolves easily in a solution of iodide of potassium, and the liquid deposits in evaporation crystals of a double iodide.
Iodide of silver dissolves easily in a potassium iodide solution, and the liquid leaves behind crystals of a double iodide when it evaporates.
Iodide of Gold.—If a solution of potassium be added to a solution of chloride of gold, a precipitate of iodide of gold takes place, soluble in an excess of the precipitate. A little free potash should be added to combine with any iodide that may chance to be set free by the chloride of gold.
Iodide of Gold.—If you add a solution of potassium to a solution of gold chloride, a precipitate of iodide of gold forms, which dissolves in excess of the precipitate. A bit of free potash should be added to react with any iodide that might be released by the gold chloride.
Iodide of Lime is prepared by adding iodine to hydrate of lime (which will be referred to farther on) until the mixture assumes a light yellow shade, when wanted for combinations with accelerators, or to a dark brown when employed for the first coating. This latter mixture has been sold in our market under the name of “Iodide of Brome.”
Iodide of Lime is made by mixing iodine with hydrated lime (which will be discussed later) until the mixture turns a light yellow color, when it’s meant to be used with accelerators, or a dark brown when it's used for the first coating. This darker mixture has been sold in the market under the name "Iodide of Brome."
Iodide of Bromine.—(See page 76.)
Bromine Iodide.—(See page 76.)
Experiments with Iodine.—Place a plate which has been exposed in the camera over the vapor of iodine for a very brief period, and it will present the appearance of the impression having been solarized.
Experiments with Iodine.—Put a plate that has been exposed in the camera over iodine vapor for a very short time, and it will look like the impression has been solarized.
b. Upon a Daguerreotype plate, from which an impression has been effaced by rubbing or otherwise, the picture may be made to reappear by merely coating it over with iodine.
b. On a Daguerreotype plate, from which an image has been removed by rubbing or other means, the picture can reappear simply by coating it with iodine.
c. Place in a vessel a little water, into which put the smallest possible quantity of free iodine and add a little starch, and the liquid will instantly assume a blue color. Advantage is taken of this fact in the laboratory to detect the presence of iodine in liquids. The starch should be dissolved in boiling water and allowed to cool. There are numerous other interesting experiments that can be performed by the aid of iodine, but it is unnecessary here to consume more space.
c. Put a small amount of water in a container, then add a tiny bit of free iodine and a little starch, and the liquid will immediately turn blue. This property is used in laboratories to detect iodine in liquids. The starch should be dissolved in boiling water and allowed to cool. There are many other interesting experiments that can be done with iodine, but it's not necessary to take up more space here.
CHLORINE.
History.—The Swedish chemist, Scheele, in 1774, while examining the action of hydrochloric acid on peroxide of manganese, first noticed this element. He called it dephlogisticated muriatic acid. It was afterwards, by the French nomenclaturists, termed oxygenated muriatic acid, conceiving it to be a compound of oxygen and muriatic acid. This view of its notice was corrected by Sir H. Davy (in 1809), who gave it the present name. In 1840-41, this gas vas employed for accelerating the operation of light upon the iodized Daguerreotype plate. John Goddard, Wolcott & Johnson, Claudet, Draper, Morse and others, were among the first made acquainted with its use. Count Rumford, Ritter, Scheele, Seebert and others, experimented with chlorine in regard to its effect when exposed to the action of light in combination with silver. In 1845, M. Edward Becquerel announced that he had “been successful in obtaining, by the agency of solar radiations, distinct impressions, of the colors of nature.”
History.—The Swedish chemist, Scheele, in 1774, while studying the effect of hydrochloric acid on manganese peroxide, first observed this element. He referred to it as dephlogisticated muriatic acid. Later, French chemists named it oxygenated muriatic acid, thinking it was a mix of oxygen and muriatic acid. This interpretation was corrected by Sir H. Davy in 1809, who gave it its current name. Between 1840 and 1841, this gas was used to speed up the effect of light on the iodized Daguerreotype plate. John Goddard, Wolcott & Johnson, Claudet, Draper, Morse, and others were among the first to learn about its application. Count Rumford, Ritter, Scheele, Seebert, and others experimented with chlorine to see its effects when exposed to light in combination with silver. In 1845, M. Edward Becquerel announced that he had “succeeded in obtaining, through solar radiation, distinct impressions of the colors of nature.”
On the 4th of March, 1851, Neipce, St. Victor, a former partner of DAGUERRE, announced that he had produced “all the colors by using a bath of bichloride of copper, and that a similar phenomenon occurs with all salts of copper, mixed with chlorine.”
On March 4, 1851, Neipce, St. Victor, a former partner of DAGUERRE, announced that he had created “all the colors by using a bath of bichloride of copper, and that a similar phenomenon occurs with all salts of copper mixed with chlorine.”
Preparation.—This is easily accomplished by putting about two parts of hydrochloric (muriatic) acid on one of powdered black oxide of manganese, and heating it gradually in a flask or retort, to which may be adapted a bent glass tube. A yellowish-green gas is disengaged, which being conducted through the glass tube to the bottom of a bottle, can readily be collected, being much heavier than the air, displaces it completely and the bottle is filled (which can be seen by the green color); a greased stopper is tightly fitted to it, and another bottle may be substituted.
Preparation.—This is easily done by adding about two parts of hydrochloric (muriatic) acid to powdered black oxide of manganese and gradually heating the mixture in a flask or retort, which can be connected to a bent glass tube. A yellowish-green gas is released, which can be directed through the glass tube to the bottom of a bottle. This gas is much heavier than air, so it completely displaces the air in the bottle, filling it (you can see this by the green color). A greased stopper is then tightly fitted to the bottle, and you can replace it with another bottle if needed.
In all experiments with chlorine, care should be taken not to inhale the gas!
In all experiments with chlorine, make sure not to breathe in the gas!
Properties.—Chlorine is a greenish-yellow gas (whence its name, from chloros, green), with a powerful and suffocating odor, and is wholly irrespirable. Even when much diluted with air, it produces the most annoying irritation of the throat, with stricture of the chest and a severe cough, which continues for hours, with the discharge of much thick mucus. The attempt to breathe the undiluted gas would be fatal; yet, in a very small quantity, and dissolved in water, it is used with benefit by patients suffering under pulmonary consumption.
Properties.—Chlorine is a greenish-yellow gas (hence its name, from chloros, meaning green), with a strong and suffocating smell, and is completely unbreathable. Even when greatly diluted with air, it causes significant irritation of the throat, a tight feeling in the chest, and a severe cough that can last for hours, accompanied by a lot of thick mucus. Trying to breathe the undiluted gas would be deadly; however, in very small amounts and when dissolved in water, it is beneficial for patients suffering from pulmonary tuberculosis.
Under a pressure of about four atmospheres, it becomes a limpid fluid of a fine yellow color, which does not freeze at zero, and is not a conductor of electricity. It immediately returns to the gaseous state with effervescence on removing the pressure.
Under a pressure of about four atmospheres, it turns into a clear liquid of a light yellow color, which doesn’t freeze at zero and doesn’t conduct electricity. It quickly reverts to gas with fizzing when the pressure is released.
Water recently boiled will absorb, if cold, about twice its bulk of chlorine gas, acquiring its color and characteristic properties. The moist gas, exposed to a cold of 32 deg., yields beautiful yellow crystals, which are a definite compound of one equivalent of chlorine and ten of water. If these crystals are hermetically sealed up in a glass tube, they will, on melting, exert such a pressure as to liquefy a portion of the gas, which is distinctly seen as a yellow fluid, not miscible with the water which is present. Chlorine is one of the heaviest of the gases, its density being 2.47, and 100 cubic inches weighing 76.5 grains.
Water that has just been boiled will absorb about twice its volume of chlorine gas when it's cold, taking on its color and distinct properties. The moist gas, when exposed to a temperature of 32°F, forms beautiful yellow crystals, which are a specific compound consisting of one part chlorine and ten parts water. If these crystals are sealed in a glass tube, when they melt, they will create enough pressure to turn some of the gas into a yellow liquid, which is clearly visible and does not mix with the surrounding water. Chlorine is one of the heaviest gases, with a density of 2.47, and 100 cubic inches weighs 76.5 grains.
Chlorine Water.—This combination, which is used in conducting M. Neipce’s process, can be readily prepared by conducting the gas into a bottle containing distilled water. One part water dissolves two parts of chlorine.
Chlorine Water.—This mixture, used in M. Neipce’s process, can be easily made by letting the gas flow into a bottle filled with distilled water. One part water dissolves two parts of chlorine.
Chlorides.—The metallic chlorides are nearly all soluble in water; that of silver and protochloride of mercury being the only exceptions. A metallic chloride, treated with oil of vitriol, disengages chlorohydric acid. Heated with a mixture of peroxide of manganese and sulphuric acid, chlorine is given off, which is easily recognized by its odor and other physical properties.
Chlorides.—Most metallic chlorides dissolve in water, with silver chloride and mercurous chloride being the only exceptions. When a metallic chloride is treated with sulfuric acid, it releases hydrochloric acid. When heated with a mix of manganese dioxide and sulfuric acid, chlorine is released, which can easily be identified by its smell and other physical characteristics.
The chlorides dissolve in water; give with nitrate of silver, a white precipitate, even in highly diluted solutions, becoming violet colored and finally black when exposed to the light. The rapidity of the change of color is proportioned to the intensity of the light. It is insoluble in nitric acid, but readily soluble in ammonia; it fuses without decomposition, forming, when cold, a tough, horny mass, and is reduced by hydrogen and by fusion with carbonate of soda, or with resin.
The chlorides dissolve in water and, when mixed with silver nitrate, produce a white precipitate that turns violet and eventually black when exposed to light. The speed of the color change depends on the light intensity. It doesn't dissolve in nitric acid but dissolves easily in ammonia. It melts without breaking down, forming a tough, rubbery mass when cooled, and can be reduced by hydrogen or by fusing it with soda ash or resin.
Chloride of Bromine. (See page 74.)
Chloride of Bromine. (See page 74.)
Chloride of Iodine. (See page 85.)
Chloride of Iodine. (See page 85.)
Chloride of potassium.—or (Muriate of Potassa).—Dissolve half an ounce of carbonate of potassa in water, and neutralize with muriatic acid. Upon concentrating the solutions, cubic crystals will be obtained, having a taste similar to common salt. They consist of potassium and chloride, and when dissolved in water they may be regarded as muriate of potassa.
Chloride of potassium—or (Muriate of Potassa)—Dissolve half an ounce of potassium carbonate in water and neutralize it with hydrochloric acid. By concentrating the solutions, you will get cubic crystals that taste similar to regular salt. They are made up of potassium and chloride, and when dissolved in water, they can be considered as muriate of potassa.
Chloride of Lime.—Mix half an ounce of slacked lime (hydrate of lime) with six ounces of water, and conduct into this milk of lime, with frequent agitation, as much chlorine gas as will evolve from two ounces of muriatic acid and half an ounce of black oxide of manganese. The liquid clarifies by standing; may be regarded as a solution of chloride of lime, and must be protected from the air and light. It may also be made without putting in the water with the hydrate of lime, by merely passing the chlorine into the hydrate of lime. This last is by some used in preparations for accelerating the operation of taking Daguerreotypes, but when used for this purpose it is in small quantities.
Chloride of Lime.—Mix 0.5 ounces of slaked lime (hydrated lime) with 6 ounces of water, and while stirring frequently, add as much chlorine gas as can be produced from 2 ounces of muriatic acid and 0.5 ounces of black oxide of manganese. The liquid will clarify over time and can be considered a solution of chloride of lime, which should be kept away from air and light. It can also be made without adding water to the hydrated lime, simply by passing chlorine into the hydrated lime. Some people use this method in preparations to speed up the process of taking Daguerreotypes, but when used for this purpose, it's in small amounts.
Chloride of Calcium.—To one part of water add two parts of muriatic acid, and add pieces of common chalk until effervescence ceases; then filter through cotton cloth and evaporate it by placing it in all earthen or porcelain dish, over a slow fire, to the consistency of a syrup. When cooling, large prismatic crystals of chloride of calcium are formed. These must be quickly dried by pressing between folds of blotting paper and kept carefully excluded from the air, as it readily attracts hydrogen. For most daguerreotype purposes, the syrup may be at once evaporated to dryness. This is frequently placed in the iodine coating box for the purpose of keeping the atmosphere dry. It is so easily made that every operator can provide himself with it in a short time, and at little expense.
Chloride of Calcium.—Add one part water to two parts muriatic acid, then mix in pieces of common chalk until the fizzing stops; filter through cotton cloth and evaporate in an earthenware or porcelain dish over a low fire until it reaches a syrupy consistency. As it cools, large prismatic crystals of calcium chloride will form. These need to be dried quickly by pressing them between blotting paper and should be stored carefully out of the air, as they easily attract moisture. For most daguerreotype applications, you can evaporate the syrup to dryness right away. It’s often placed in the iodine coating box to keep the atmosphere dry. It's easy to make, so any operator can prepare it quickly and inexpensively.
Chloride of Gold.—Is prepared by dissolving gold in aqua regia, a composition of one part of nitric to two parts of muriatic acid. Gold foil is the best for our purposes; coin, however, answers, in most cases, for the daguerreotype operator, as the alloy, being so slight is not noticed in the gilding process. When the latter is used, it will facilitate the operation to beat it out, forming a thin sheet, and then cutting in small strips. Where purity is required, foil is better. The gold is placed in three or four times its own weight of the above acids. For this purpose, an evaporating dish is best (a common saucer will do); a moderate heat may be applied to favor the action. The mixture should be stirred often with a glass rod; care should be observed not to apply too much heat, for at a temperature of about 300 deg. the chlorine would be expelled and leave a metallic precipitate, which would require re-dissolving. Acid may at any time be added if necessary to dissolve the gold, but it is advisable to add as little excess as possible, as it would require more time to evaporate. After all the gold has dissolved, and the liquid assumes a deep red color, the solution should be allowed to cool, being stirred nearly all the time. This salt is of a reddish-brown color. It is rarely we find in our market good chloride of gold, as common, salt is used for the bulk; and when the bottles are labelled “15 grains,” “20 grains,” nine-tenths do not in reality contain exceeding five grains of chloride of gold. The salt is mixed with the above solution when it is cooling, and gives bright yellow crystals, which some of our uninformed operators conceive to be the best quality.
Chloride of Gold.—It's made by dissolving gold in aqua regia, which is a mix of one part nitric acid to two parts hydrochloric acid. Gold foil works best for this purpose; however, coin is usually acceptable for daguerreotype operators since the minimal alloy isn't noticeable in the gilding process. If using foil, it's helpful to beat it into a thin sheet and then cut it into small strips. For purity, foil is preferable. Place the gold in three or four times its weight of the acids mentioned. An evaporating dish is ideal for this (a regular saucer will also work); apply moderate heat to help the reaction. Stir the mixture often with a glass rod; be cautious not to use too much heat because at around 300 degrees, chlorine will be released, leaving a metallic residue that will need to be redissolved. You can add more acid at any point if needed to dissolve the gold, but it’s best to use as little extra as possible since that will take longer to evaporate. Once all the gold has dissolved and the liquid turns deep red, allow the solution to cool, stirring almost constantly. The resulting salt is reddish-brown. It's uncommon to find quality chloride of gold in our market, as common salt is often used for the majority; when bottles are labeled “15 grains,” “20 grains,” nearly nine-tenths actually contain no more than five grains of chloride of gold. Mix the salt with the solution while it cools, producing bright yellow crystals, which some less informed operators mistakenly believe are the highest quality.
Chloride of Silver.—(Oxide of Silver.)—Take any quantity of silver coin or other silver, roll or hammer it thin; cut in small pieces. This in order to save time. Put the silver in a glass or earthen vessel (Florence flask is best); pour in nitric acid and water, about three parts of the former to one of the latter. The operation of cutting up the silver may be facilitated by applying a gentle heat. This blue solution consists of oxide of silver and oxide of copper, both combined with nitric acid. Should the operator wish a pure solution of silver, which, however, is not always used, he may obtain it in the following manner:
Chloride of Silver.—(Oxide of Silver.)—Take any amount of silver coins or other silver, roll or hammer it thin, and cut it into small pieces to save time. Place the silver in a glass or ceramic container (a Florence flask works best); then pour in nitric acid and water, using about three parts of the acid to one part of the water. You can make cutting the silver easier by gently heating it. This blue solution contains silver oxide and copper oxide, both mixed with nitric acid. If you want a pure solution of silver, which isn’t always necessary, you can get it using the following method:
To separate the two metals contained in the above solution from each other, put some bright copper coins into the solution and set it aside in a warm place for three or four days, occasionally giving it a circular motion. The separated laminae are pure silver, which is to be digested with ammonia until it ceases to be colored blue. The silver, after being washed and dried, is again dissolved in nitric acid, and the liquid, diluted with water, is kept as solution, of silver.
To separate the two metals in the solution mentioned above, drop some shiny copper coins into the solution and leave it in a warm place for three or four days, occasionally swirling it around. The separated layers are pure silver, which should be treated with ammonia until it stops being blue. After washing and drying the silver, dissolve it again in nitric acid, and keep the liquid, diluted with water, as a silver solution.
Either of the above solutions (the one of oxide of silver and copper, and the pure silver solution) may be prepared for use by putting them in a bottle, with a quantity of water, and adding common fine salt, you obtain a white curdy precipitate of chloride of silver. No matter how much salt is used, provided enough be added to throw down all the chloride of silver. This solution should be well agitated and then allowed to stand for a few minutes; thus the white precipitate is in the bottom of the bottle. When the water has become clear, pour it off with care, leaving the sediment behind, then add a fresh quantity of clean water, shake, let settle, and pour off as before. Repeat the same for several times, and the excess of salt will disappear, leaving the white precipitate, which may be drained of the water and dried in the dark, and kept free from light and air.
Either of the solutions mentioned above (the one with silver oxide and copper, and the pure silver solution) can be prepared for use by putting them in a bottle, adding some water, and mixing in common table salt. This creates a white, curdy precipitate of silver chloride. It doesn't matter how much salt you use, as long as you add enough to completely precipitate all the silver chloride. The solution should be shaken well and then allowed to sit for a few minutes so the white precipitate settles at the bottom of the bottle. Once the water is clear, carefully pour it off, leaving the sediment behind. Then, add a fresh amount of clean water, shake, let it settle, and pour off again. Repeat this several times, and any excess salt will be removed, leaving just the white precipitate, which can be drained of water, dried in the dark, and kept away from light and air.
CYANIDE OF POTASSIUM.
Cyanide of Potassium.—This important article is worthy the undivided attention of every Daguerreotypist. I here give Mr. Smee’s process for its preparation. This is from that author’s work entitled, “Electro Metallurgy,” American edition:
Cyanide of Potassium.—This important substance deserves the full attention of every Daguerreotypist. Here, I present Mr. Smee’s method for its preparation. This is taken from that author’s book titled, “Electro Metallurgy,” American edition:
“The cyanide of potassium, so often alluded to while treating of the metallo-cyanides, may be formed in several ways. It may be obtained by heating to a dull redness the yellow ferrocyanate of potash, in a covered vessel, filtering and rapidly evaporating it. The objection to this method, however, is that without great care the whole of the ferrocyanate is not decomposed, a circumstance which much reduces its value for electro-metallurgy. By boiling, however, the ignited residue with spirits of wine this difficulty is said to be overcome, as the ferrocyanate is absolutely insoluble in that menstruum, while the cyanuret, at that heat, freely dissolves, and is as easily re-deposited on cooling.
“The cyanide of potassium, often mentioned when discussing metallo-cyanides, can be produced in several ways. You can obtain it by heating the yellow ferrocyanate of potash in a covered vessel until it glows red, then filtering and quickly evaporating the solution. However, the drawback of this method is that, without careful attention, not all of the ferrocyanate is decomposed, which significantly lowers its usefulness for electro-metallurgy. Boiling the ignited residue with alcohol is said to solve this problem, as the ferrocyanate is completely insoluble in alcohol, while the cyanide dissolves easily at that temperature and can be re-deposited upon cooling.”
“There is, however, a much better process by which this salt may be formed, viz. by simply transmitting hydrocyanic acid through potassium. Although the modes of making this acid are very numerous, there is but one which is likely to be employed on a very large scale, and that is its formation from the yellow ferrocyanate by means of sulphuric acid. This process is performed as follows: any given weight of the yellow salt is taken and dissolved in about five times its weight of water; this is placed in a retort, or some such analogous vessel, to which is then added a quantity of strong sulphuric acid, twice the weight of the salt, and diluted with three or four times its quantity of water. A pipe is carried from the neck of the retort to the receiving bottle, which should be kept as cool as possible.
“There is, however, a much better way to create this salt, which is by simply passing hydrocyanic acid through potassium. While there are many methods to produce this acid, only one is likely to be used on a large scale, and that is creating it from yellow ferrocyanate using sulfuric acid. The process is done as follows: take a specific weight of the yellow salt and dissolve it in about five times its weight in water; this is placed in a retort or a similar vessel, to which a quantity of strong sulfuric acid is added, equal to twice the weight of the salt, and diluted with three or four times that amount of water. A pipe is connected from the neck of the retort to the receiving bottle, which should be kept as cool as possible.”
“For small operations, those invaluable vessels, Florence flasks, answer well: a bent tube being connected at one end to its month, the other passing into the second vessel; heat should be cautiously applied by means of an Argand lamp, a little vessel of sand being placed under the flask, which helps the acid to decompose the salt. Prussic acid is then generated and passes through the tube to the recipient vessel, which is to be charged with liquor potassae.
For small operations, those essential vessels, Florence flasks, work well: a bent tube is connected at one end to its mouth, with the other end leading into the second vessel. Heat should be applied carefully using an Argand lamp, with a small container of sand placed under the flask to assist the acid in breaking down the salt. Prussic acid is then produced and travels through the tube to the receiving vessel, which should be filled with potash solution.
“When the potash is saturated, the operation is completed. The Germans recommend a strong, alcoholic solution of potassa to be used in the second vessel, for in this case, the hydrocyanic or prussic acid combines with the potassa, forming a hydrocyanate of potassa, or, the water being abstracted, the cyanuret of potassium, which spontaneously precipitates, on the saturation of the fluid, the cyanuret, being insoluble in strong alcohol. The ferrocyanate of potash may be considered as containing three equivalents of hydrocyanic acid, two of potash and one of iron; but, unfortunately, we can only obtain half the acid from the salt, owing to the formation of a compound during its decomposition which resists the action of the acid. The decomposition of this salt taking 2 equivalents or 426 grains (to avoid fractions) would afford 3 equivalents or 81 grains of hydrocyanic, or prussic acid, capable of forming 198 grains of cyanuret of potassium, while in the retort there would remain 384 grains or 3 equivalents of bisulphate of potash, and 1 equivalent or 174 grains of a peculiar compound, said to contain 3 equivalents of cyanogen, 1 of potassium, and one of iron (Pereira). It is manifest that, but for this later compound, we might double the quantity of hydrocyanic acid from the yellow salt.”
“When the potash is saturated, the process is complete. The Germans recommend using a strong alcoholic solution of potassa in the second vessel, as in this case, the hydrocyanic or prussic acid combines with the potassa, forming hydrocyanate of potassa, or, when the water is removed, cyanide of potassium, which spontaneously precipitates when the solution is saturated, since cyanide is insoluble in strong alcohol. Ferrocyanate of potash can be considered to contain three equivalents of hydrocyanic acid, two of potash, and one of iron; however, we can only obtain half the acid from the salt due to a compound formed during its decomposition that resists the action of the acid. The decomposition of this salt taking 2 equivalents or 426 grains (to avoid fractions) would produce 3 equivalents or 81 grains of hydrocyanic, or prussic acid, which can form 198 grains of cyanide potassium, while in the retort there would remain 384 grains or 3 equivalents of bisulphate of potash and 1 equivalent or 174 grains of a peculiar compound said to contain 3 equivalents of cyanogen, 1 of potassium, and 1 of iron (Pereira). It is clear that without this later compound, we could potentially double the amount of hydrocyanic acid from the yellow salt.”
The decomposition just described is the one usually received; but too much reliance must not be placed on its accuracy, for the analysis of the several compounds is too difficult for the results to be fully admitted. The residue left in the retort speedily turns to one of the blues, identical with, or allied to, Prussian blue. This is at best a disagreeable process to conduct, for the hydrocyanic acid formed adheres so strongly to the glass, that, instead of being freely given off, bubbles are evolved suddenly with such explosive violence as occasionally to crack the vessel. This may be remedied as far as possible by the insertion of plenty of waste pieces of platinum—if platinized, so much the better, as that facilitates the escape of the gas. The heat should be applied to every part of the vessel, and the flame should not be allowed to play upon one single part alone. Large commercial operations are performed in green glass or stone-ware retorts.
The decomposition described is the one typically accepted; however, we shouldn't rely too heavily on its accuracy, as analyzing the various compounds is too complex for the results to be completely trusted. The residue left in the retort quickly turns into one of the blues, similar to or related to Prussian blue. This process is unpleasant to carry out, as the hydrocyanic acid produced sticks tightly to the glass, leading to sudden bursts of gas that can sometimes crack the vessel due to explosive force. This can be mitigated as much as possible by adding a lot of used platinum pieces—platinized ones are even better, as they help the gas escape. Heat should be applied evenly to every part of the vessel, and the flame shouldn't be focused on just one area. Large-scale operations are usually conducted in green glass or stoneware retorts.
“Now for one word of advice to the tyro: Remember that you are working with prussic acid; therefore, never conduct the process in a room, the fumes being quite as poisonous as the solution of the acid itself; moreover, have always a bottle of ammonia or chlorine by your side, that should you have chanced to inhale more than is pleasant, it will be instantly at hand to counteract any bad effects. It is stated by Pereira, that a little sulphuric acid or hydroferrocyanic acid passes to the outer vessel, but probably the amount would be of no consequence for electro-metallurgy, otherwise, it might be as well to use a Woulfe’s apparatus, and discard the salt formed in the first vessel. To the large manufacturer it may be worth considering whether some other metallo-cyanuret, formed in a similar manner to the ferrocyanuret, might not be more advantageously employed, because the residue of the process last described contains a large quantity of cyanogen which the acid is unable to set free.
“Now for one piece of advice to the beginner: Remember that you are working with prussic acid, so never carry out the process in a room, since the fumes are just as toxic as the acid itself. Also, always keep a bottle of ammonia or chlorine nearby, so if you happen to inhale more than is comfortable, you can quickly counteract any negative effects. Pereira states that a small amount of sulfuric acid or hydroferrocyanic acid may transfer to the outer vessel, but the amount is likely negligible for electro-metallurgy. Otherwise, it might be better to use a Woulfe’s apparatus and discard the salt formed in the first vessel. For large manufacturers, it may be worth considering whether another metallo-cyanide, created similarly to ferrocyanide, could be used more effectively, since the residue from the process just described contains a significant amount of cyanogen that the acid can't release.”
“There are other modes of procuring prussic acid, besides the one which has been so tediously described; but these are found to be more expensive. The only one which I shall now notice is the process by which it is obtained from bicyanide of mercury. The bicyanide of mercury itself is formed when peroxide of mercury is digested with Prussian blue, the peroxide of mercury abstracting the whole of the cyanogen from the blue, and leaving the oxides of iron at the bottom of the vessel. The solution may be evaporated to dryness, and one part of the salt dissolved in six of water; one part of muriatic acid, sp. gr. 1.15, is then added, and the solution distilled, when the whole of the hydrocyanic acid passes over, and by being conducted into a solution of potassa, as in the former process, forms cyanuret of potassium. This process, though easier than the first described, is rather given as a resource under peculiar circumstances than as one to be adopted by the large manufacturer. The expense is the only objection, but in a small quantity this cannot be a consideration.
“There are other ways to obtain prussic acid besides the one that has been described in detail, but these methods tend to be more expensive. The only one I will mention now is the process of getting it from bicyanide of mercury. Bicyanide of mercury is created when mercury peroxide is treated with Prussian blue, which allows the mercury peroxide to extract all the cyanogen from the blue, leaving the iron oxides at the bottom of the container. The solution can be evaporated to dryness, and one part of the salt is dissolved in six parts of water; then, one part of hydrochloric acid (specific gravity 1.15) is added, and the solution is distilled. This releases all the hydrocyanic acid, which can then be directed into a solution of potassium hydroxide, as in the previous method, to form potassium cyanide. This process, while easier than the first one described, is more of an option for specific situations rather than for large-scale manufacturing. The only drawback is the cost, but for small quantities, this isn't a significant issue.”
“In giving this very rough outline of the general mode of forming salts, the minutiae necessary for chemical work have altogether been avoided, and those parts alone are entered upon which are more immediately necessary for the electro metallurgist to know and practice for himself. This will account for the long description of the cyanuret of potassium, while the preparation of the equally important and even more used acids, the sulphuric, muriatic, etc., commonly found in commerce, are altogether neglected.
“In providing this basic overview of how to form salts, I’ve skipped over the detailed specifics needed for chemical work and focused only on what’s most relevant for the electro metallurgist to understand and apply on their own. This explains the extensive description of potassium cyanide, while the preparation of other equally important and more commonly used acids like sulfuric and hydrochloric, which are readily available in the market, is completely left out.”
“In using solutions of cyanide of potassium, the workman should not immerse his arms into them, otherwise it occasionally happens that the solution produces very troublesome eruptions over the skin.”
“In using potassium cyanide solutions, the worker should not dip his arms into them; otherwise, it can sometimes cause very irritating skin rashes.”
HYPOSULPHITE OF SODA.
Hyposulphite of Soda.—This salt forms one of the important chemicals for the Daguerreotype operator. Its application to this art is of an interesting nature. It is used to dissolve the sensitive salt of silver which remains unchanged during the exposure in the camera. It has the property of readily dissolving the chloride, bromide and iodide of silver. It should be pure and free from sulphuret of sodium; should this last be present, it will cause brown spots of sulphurated silver upon the Daguerreotype impression. This annoyance is a great source of complaint from many operators, and ever will be, so long as it is prepared by men who have no reputation to lose, and whose eyes are blinded by the “Almighty Dollar.”
Hyposulfite of Soda.—This salt is one of the key chemicals for Daguerreotype photographers. Its use in this process is quite fascinating. It helps dissolve the sensitive silver salt that remains unchanged during the exposure in the camera. It easily dissolves silver chloride, bromide, and iodide. It needs to be pure and free from sodium sulfide; if sodium sulfide is present, it will create brown spots of sulfurated silver on the Daguerreotype image. This issue is a major complaint among many photographers and will continue to be as long as it is produced by people who have no reputation to uphold and whose eyes are fixed on making a quick buck.
A good article may be prepared as follows:
A good article can be prepared like this:
“Mix one pound of finely pulverized carbonate of soda with ten ounces of flowers of sulphur, and heat the mixture slowly in a porcelain dish till the sulphur melts. Stir the fused mass, so as to expose all its parts freely to the atmosphere, whereby it passes from the state of a sulphuret, by the absorption of atmospheric oxygen, into that of a sulphite, with the phenomenon of very slight incandescence. Dissolve in water, filter the solution, and boil it immediately along with flowers of sulphur. The filtered concentrated saline liquid will afford, on cooling, a large quantity of pure and beautiful crystals of hyposulphite of soda.”
“Combine one pound of finely powdered sodium carbonate with ten ounces of sulfur flowers, and gradually heat the mixture in a porcelain dish until the sulfur melts. Stir the melted mixture to ensure that all parts are exposed to the air, causing it to change from a sulfide to a sulfite through the absorption of oxygen, creating a slight glowing effect. Dissolve this in water, filter the solution, and then boil it right away together with sulfur flowers. Once cooled, the concentrated salty liquid will produce a large amount of pure and beautiful sodium hyposulfite crystals.”
Hyposulphite of Gold.—This compound salt is by a few considered preferable to the chloride of gold, but our experience has induced us to use the latter, believing we are enabled to produce a more brilliant and warm-toned impression with it. When the hyposulphite of gold is used in gilding, it requires less heat and a longer application, as there is some danger of producing a glossy scum over some parts of the surface of the plate. I prepare this salt as follows:
Hyposulphite of Gold.—Some people think this compound salt is better than gold chloride, but based on our experience, we prefer using the latter because it allows us to create a more vibrant and warm-toned impression. When using hyposulphite of gold for gilding, it needs less heat and a longer application time, as there's a risk of forming a glossy scum on certain areas of the plate's surface. I prepare this salt as follows:
Dissolve one part chloride of gold and four parts hyposulphite of soda in equal quantities of distilled water: pour the gold into the hyposulphite solution, in the same manner as in mixing the gilding solution; let it stand until it becomes limpid; filter and evaporate to dryness. Re-dissolve and add a few grains of burnt alum.
Dissolve one part gold chloride and four parts sodium hyposulfite in equal amounts of distilled water. Pour the gold into the hyposulfite solution the same way you would when mixing the gilding solution. Let it sit until it becomes clear, then filter it and evaporate it until dry. Re-dissolve and add a few grains of burnt alum.
After standing a few hours, filter and evaporate again. If not sufficiently pure, repeat the crystallization until it is so. For gilding, dissolve in water and use in the same manner as the common gilding solution.
After standing for a few hours, filter and evaporate again. If it's not pure enough, repeat the crystallization until it is. For gilding, dissolve in water and use it the same way as the regular gilding solution.
N.B.—The four following mixtures were employed in Neipce’s process in his earliest experiments:
N.B.—The four mixtures listed below were used in Neipce’s process during his earliest experiments:
Aqueous Solution of Bichloride of Mercury.—Eight grains of bichloride of mercury in 10,000 grains of distilled water.
Aqueous Solution of Bichloride of Mercury.—Eight grains of bichloride of mercury in 10,000 grains of distilled water.
Solution of Cyanide of Mercury.—A flask of distilled water is saturated with cyanide of mercury, and a certain quantity is decanted, which is diluted with an equal quantity of distilled water.
Solution of Cyanide of Mercury.—A flask of distilled water is saturated with cyanide of mercury, and a certain quantity is poured off, which is diluted with an equal amount of distilled water.
Acidulated White Oil of Petroleum.—This oil is acidulated by mixing with it one tenth of pure nitric acid, leaving it for at least 48 hours, occasionally agitating the flask. The oil, which is acidulated, and which then powerfully reddens litmus paper, is decanted. It is also a little colored, but remains very limpid.
Acidulated White Oil of Petroleum.—This oil is made acidic by mixing in one-tenth of pure nitric acid and letting it sit for at least 48 hours, occasionally shaking the flask. The oil, once acidulated, strongly turns litmus paper red and is then poured off. It has a slight color but remains very clear.
Solution of Chloride of Gold and Platinum.—In order not to multiply the solutions, take the ordinary chloride of gold, used for fixing the impressions, and which is composed of 1 gramme of chloride of gold and 50 grains of hyposulphate of soda, to a quart of distilled water.
Solution of Gold and Platinum Chloride.—To avoid creating multiple solutions, use the regular gold chloride that is used for fixing the images, which consists of 1 gram of gold chloride and 50 grains of sodium hyposulfite, mixed with a quart of distilled water.
With respect to chloride of platinum, 4 grains must be dissolved in 3 quarts of distilled water; these two solutions are mixed in equal quantities.
With regard to platinum chloride, 4 grains should be dissolved in 3 quarts of distilled water; these two solutions are then combined in equal amounts.
Acids.—I shall not go into the preparations of the various acids employed in the Daguerreotype. This would be useless to the operator, as there are few, if any, that it would be advisable to prepare. It is only necessary for the experimenter to be made acquainted with their properties, and this in order to prevent any haphazard experiments, which are too common among operators. Any person who may be desirous to try an experiment, should first study the agents he wishes to employ. By so doing much time and money will be saved; while the searcher after new discoveries would rarely become vexed on account of his own ignorance, or be obliged to avail himself of the experience of others in any department of science.
Acids.—I won’t go into the preparations of the different acids used in the Daguerreotype. This would be pointless for the operator, as there are few, if any, that it would be wise to prepare. It’s only important for the experimenter to understand their properties to avoid random experiments, which are all too common among operators. Anyone interested in trying an experiment should first study the substances they plan to use. This way, a lot of time and money can be saved; and those searching for new discoveries will rarely become frustrated due to their own ignorance or have to rely on the experience of others in any field of science.
Nitric Acid—Exists in combination with the bases, potash, soda, lime, magnesia, in both the mineral and vegetable kingdoms, and is never found insoluble. It has the same constituents as common air, but in different proportions. The strongest nitric acid contains in every pound, two and a quarter ounces of water. Pure nitric acid is colorless, with a specific gravity of 1.5, and boiling at 248 deg.. It is a most powerful oxidizing agent, and is decomposed with more or less rapidity, by almost all the metals, to which it yields a portion of its oxygen.
Nitric Acid—It exists in combination with bases like potash, soda, lime, and magnesia, found in both the mineral and plant worlds, and is never seen as insoluble. It has the same components as regular air, but in different amounts. The strongest nitric acid contains two and a quarter ounces of water in every pound. Pure nitric acid is colorless, has a specific gravity of 1.5, and boils at 248 degrees. It is a very powerful oxidizing agent and is broken down at various rates by almost all metals, from which it releases some of its oxygen.
The nitric acid of commerce, is generally the article used by the Daguerreotypist. This usually contains some chlorine and sulphuric acid. It is obtained by the distillation of saltpetre with sulphuric acid. It is employed in the Daguerreotype process for dissolving silver, preparing chloride or oxide, nitrate of silver, [the former used in galvanizing,] and in combination with muriatic acid for preparing chloride of gold, used in gilding. It is also used by some for preparing the plate.
The commercial nitric acid is typically the type used by photographers working with Daguerreotypes. This usually contains some chlorine and sulfuric acid. It is produced by distilling saltpeter with sulfuric acid. In the Daguerreotype process, it is used for dissolving silver, preparing silver chloride or oxide, and silver nitrate, with the former being used in galvanizing. It's also combined with hydrochloric acid to prepare gold chloride, which is used in gilding. Some also use it for preparing the plate.
Acidulated Solution.—This solution is used for cleaning the surface of the Daguerreotype plate. It has the property of softening the silver, and bringing it to a state in which it is very susceptible of being either oxidized or iodized, hence it contributes to increase the sensibility of the plate. The proportions are to one drop of acid add from 15 to 20 drops of water, or make the solution about like sharp vinegar to the taste.
Acidulated Solution.—This solution is used to clean the surface of the Daguerreotype plate. It softens the silver and prepares it to be easily oxidized or iodized, which increases the sensitivity of the plate. The proportions are to add one drop of acid to 15 to 20 drops of water, or make the solution taste similar to strong vinegar.
Nitro-Muriatic Acid.—Aqua Regia is a compound menstruum invented by the alchemists for dissolving gold. It is composed of colorless nitric acid (aqua-fortis) and ordinary muriatic acid; the mixture is yellow, and acquires the power of dissolving gold and platinum. These materials are not properly oxidized; it nearly causes their combination with chlorine, which is in the Muriatic acid.
Nitro-Muriatic Acid.—Aqua Regia is a solution created by alchemists to dissolve gold. It's made up of colorless nitric acid (aqua-fortis) and regular muriatic acid; the mixture turns yellow and gains the ability to dissolve gold and platinum. These substances aren't fully oxidized; it almost results in their combination with chlorine, which is present in the muriatic acid.
Hydrochloric Acid (Muriatic Acid).—This acid forms a valuable addition to the chemicals employed by the practical Daguerreotypist. This acid is formed by acting upon common salt (which is chloride of sodium) by concentrated sulphuric acid. The water of the acid is decomposed, and its hydrogen combines with the chloride of the salt to form muriatic acid, and this unites with the sulphuric acid to form sulphate of soda; 60 parts of common salt and 49 parts of concentrated sulphuric acid, afford, by this mutual action, 37 parts of muriatic acid and 72 parts of sulphate of soda. The muriatic acid of commerce has usually a yellowish tinge, but when chemically pure it is colorless. The former is commonly contaminated with sulphurous acid, sulphuric acid, chlorine, iron, and sometimes with arsenic.
Hydrochloric Acid (Muriatic Acid).—This acid is a valuable addition to the chemicals used by practical Daguerreotypists. It is made by treating common salt (which is sodium chloride) with concentrated sulfuric acid. The water in the acid breaks down, and its hydrogen combines with the chloride from the salt to create muriatic acid, which then mixes with sulfuric acid to produce sodium sulfate. By this interaction, 60 parts of common salt and 49 parts of concentrated sulfuric acid yield 37 parts of muriatic acid and 72 parts of sodium sulfate. Commercial muriatic acid typically has a yellowish tint, but when chemically pure, it is clear. The former often contains impurities like sulfurous acid, sulfuric acid, chlorine, iron, and sometimes arsenic.
Muriatic acid, from the fact of the presence of the chlorine, is used in the Daguerreotype process for dissolving gold, and in combination with various accelerators. Its presence can be detected by ammonia. A strip of paper dipped in this and waved to and fro will emit a thick white smoke if the acid vapor be in the atmosphere. The ammonia neutralizes the acid fumes. By reversing the experiment we can determine whether vapor of ammonia be in the air, and also deprive these suffocating and dangerous gases of their injurious properties, and remove them from the air. Every Daguerreotype operator should be furnished with, at least, a six ounce bottle of aqua ammonia. Its operation is very nearly the same on bromine and iodine vapor.
Muriatic acid, due to the presence of chlorine, is used in the Daguerreotype process for dissolving gold and in combination with various accelerators. You can detect its presence with ammonia. If you dip a strip of paper in ammonia and wave it back and forth, it will produce a thick white smoke if acid vapor is in the air. The ammonia neutralizes the acid fumes. By reversing the experiment, we can find out if ammonia vapor is present in the air and also eliminate the harmful properties of these suffocating and dangerous gases, removing them from the atmosphere. Every Daguerreotype operator should have at least a six-ounce bottle of ammonia solution on hand. Its action is very similar to that on bromine and iodine vapor.
Hydrofluoric Acid (Fluorohydric Acid).—This acid is used to form some of the most volatile and sensitive compounds employed in the Daguerreotype. It is one of the most dangerous bodies to experiment with: it is volatile and corrosive, giving off dense white fumes in the air. It combines with water with great heat. At 32 deg. it condenses into a colorless fluid, with a density 1.069. It is obtained from decomposition of fluorspar by strong sulphuric acid. It readily dissolves the silica in glass, and consequently cannot be kept in a vessel of that material. It is prepared and kept in lead. It is employed in accelerators on account of its fluorine.
Hydrofluoric Acid (Fluorohydric Acid).—This acid is used to create some of the most volatile and sensitive compounds used in Daguerreotype photography. It is one of the most dangerous substances to work with: it's volatile and corrosive, releasing dense white fumes into the air. It reacts with water, producing a lot of heat. At 32 degrees, it turns into a colorless liquid with a density of 1.069. It is produced by breaking down fluorspar with strong sulfuric acid. It easily dissolves the silica in glass, so it cannot be stored in glass containers. Instead, it is prepared and stored in lead. Its fluorine content makes it useful in accelerators.
One small drop on the tongue of a dog causes death. The operator who wishes to use it should pour some of the liquid for which he intends it into a graduate, or other vessel, and then add the desired quantity of acid. If by accident any of the spray should fall upon the skin, it should at once be copiously drenched with water.
One small drop on a dog's tongue can be fatal. The person planning to use it should pour some of the liquid they intend to use into a measuring cup or another container, and then add the required amount of acid. If any of the spray accidentally gets on the skin, it should be immediately rinsed thoroughly with water.
Sulphuric Acid.—There are two sorts of this acid: one is an oily, fuming liquid; this is made in Nordhausen, in Saxony, and is commonly called “Nordhausen sulphuric acid,” or oil of vitriol. The other which is the kind used in connection with the Daguerreotype, is common sulphuric acid. It is somewhat thinner, and when undiluted is not fuming. This acid may be obtained in a solid and dry state, called anhydrous sulphuric acid.
Sulfuric Acid.—There are two types of this acid: one is an oily, fuming liquid; this is produced in Nordhausen, Saxony, and is commonly referred to as “Nordhausen sulfuric acid” or oil of vitriol. The other type, which is used with the Daguerreotype, is regular sulfuric acid. It is a bit thinner and doesn’t fume when undiluted. This acid can also be found in a solid and dry form, known as anhydrous sulfuric acid.
The common sulphuric acid is made by burning sulphur, which forms sulphurous acid. To convert this into sulphuric acid and gain more oxygen, nitric acid, which is rich in that body, is added. It forms a limpid, colorless fluid, of a specific gravity of 1.8. It boils at 620 deg.; it freezes at 15 deg. It is acrid and caustic, and intensely acid in all its characters, even when largely diluted.
The typical sulfuric acid is produced by burning sulfur, which creates sulfurous acid. To turn this into sulfuric acid and increase the oxygen content, nitric acid, which is abundant in oxygen, is added. This results in a clear, colorless liquid with a specific gravity of 1.8. It boils at 620°F and freezes at 15°F. It is sharp and corrosive, and extremely acidic in all its properties, even when heavily diluted.
Its attraction for basis is such that it separates or expels all other acids, more or less perfectly, from their combinations. Its affinity for water is such that it rapidly absorbs it from the atmosphere, and when mixed with water much heat is evolved. It acts energetically upon animal and vegetable substances, and is a poisonous, dangerous substance to get on the skin. It is a powerful oxidizing agent; hence its use in the galvanic battery, for which purpose it is mostly used by the Daguerreotypist. The fumes of this being so much more offensive than nitric acid, the latter is sometimes used. It is also employed in some of the more sensitive accelerators.
Its ability as a base is so strong that it can effectively separate or remove other acids from their compounds. It has a strong attraction to water, quickly absorbing it from the air, and when mixed with water, it releases a lot of heat. It reacts vigorously with both animal and plant materials and can be harmful and dangerous if it comes into contact with skin. It is a powerful oxidizing agent, which is why it's used in galvanic batteries, particularly by Daguerreotypists. The fumes are much more unpleasant than those of nitric acid, so sometimes nitric acid is used instead. It's also used in some sensitive accelerators.
ACCELERATING SUBSTANCES.
Remarks on the Accelerating substances Used in the Daguerreotype.—I have now arrived at a point in this work, where the eye of the Daguerreotype public will intently search for something new. This search will prove in vain, at least so far as regards those who have enjoyed and embraced the opportunities for studying the principles of our art. Every experienced operator has in a degree become familiar with the mechanical uses of all the agents employed, while I fear but few understand the properties, and laws governing those properties, which are so indispensable to produce an image impressed upon the silver surface.
Remarks on the Accelerating Substances Used in the Daguerreotype.—I have now reached a point in this work where the Daguerreotype community will eagerly look for something new. However, this search will likely be fruitless, at least for those who have taken the time to study the principles of our craft. Every experienced operator is somewhat familiar with the mechanical uses of all the agents involved, but I worry that only a few truly understand the properties and the laws that govern those properties, which are essential for creating an image on the silver surface.
There are three substances which form the bases for producing a Daguerreotype; silver, iodine and bromine. Each forms a separate body which is indispensable to the operators success as the art is now practiced in America. With these three, compounds of great variety are formed.
There are three substances that are essential for creating a Daguerreotype: silver, iodine, and bromine. Each one is a crucial component for the operator’s success in the art as it’s currently practiced in America. With these three, various compounds are created.
The silver surface is first thoroughly cleaned and freed from all organic matter, then exposed to vapor of iodine, producing an iodide of silver. The plate upon which is this salt, is again exposed to the vapor of bromine, forming a bromo-iodide of silver, a salt also.
The silver surface is first carefully cleaned and cleared of all organic matter, then exposed to iodine vapor, creating silver iodide. The plate that has this salt is then exposed to bromine vapor, forming silver bromo-iodide, which is also a salt.
As most of the various accelerators are compounds of bromine, with either chlorine or fluorine combination, they partake somewhat of the nature of these latter, giving results which can be detected by the experienced operator. Thus muriatic acid is added for its chlorine, which can generally be detected by the impression produced, being of a light, soft, mellow tone, and in most cases presenting a brilliant black to that colored drapery. Those who wish to experiment with agents for accelerating substances, should first study to well understand their peculiar nature and properties; as well, also, to endeavor to find out what will be the probable changes they undergo in combination as an accelerator. This should be done before making the experiments. From the foregoing it will be seen that numerous compounds are formed from the same basis, and, consequently, it would be a waste of time and a useless appropriation to devote more of our space than is necessary to give the principal and most reliable combination.
As most of the different accelerators are bromine compounds, often combined with chlorine or fluorine, they share some characteristics with these elements, producing results that an experienced operator can identify. For instance, muriatic acid is added for its chlorine, which is usually noticeable by the light, soft, mellow tone it creates, often resulting in a brilliant black against that colored fabric. Anyone looking to experiment with substances that accelerate reactions should first take the time to thoroughly understand their unique nature and properties. They should also try to determine the likely changes these substances undergo when used as accelerators. This groundwork should be completed before conducting any experiments. From this, it's clear that many compounds can be made from the same base, so it would be inefficient to spend excessive time on anything other than the principal and most reliable combinations.
In America, the words “Quick” and “Quick Stuff,” are more generally used for and instead of the more proper names, “Sensitives,” or “Accelerators,” etc. As it has by use become common, I frequently use it in this work.
In America, the terms “Quick” and “Quick Stuff” are more commonly used instead of the more formal names like “Sensitives” or “Accelerators.” Since this has become standard through usage, I often use it in this work.
Liquid Accelerator, No. 1.—This mixture was used by me in 1849, and is given as it appeared in my “System of Photography,” published at the above date:
Liquid Accelerator, No. 1.—I used this mixture in 1849, and it's presented as it appeared in my "System of Photography," published at that time:
Take pure rain or distilled water, one quart, filter through paper into a ground stopper bottle, and add, for warm weather, one and a half ounce chloride of iodine; or for cold, one ounce; then add one ounce bromine, and shake well. Now with care not to allow the vapor to escape, add drop by drop, thirty drops of aqua ammonia, shaking well at each drop. Care must be taken not to add more at a time, as it evokes too much heat. This mixed, in equal proportions with John Roach’s quick, forms an excellent chemical combination. For this purpose, take one and a half ounce of each, to which add ten ounces water, for warm weather, or from six to seven for cold. Pour the whole into a large box, and it will work from two to four months. I am now using (1849) one charged as above which has been in constant use for three months, and works uniformly well. The above is right for half or full size boxes, but half of it would be sufficient for a quarter size box.
Take pure rainwater or distilled water, one quart, filter it through paper into a ground stopper bottle, and add, for warm weather, one and a half ounces of iodine chloride; or for cold weather, one ounce; then add one ounce of bromine and shake well. Now, carefully so that the vapor doesn’t escape, add thirty drops of ammonia drop by drop, shaking well after each drop. Be careful not to add more at once, as it generates too much heat. This mixture, in equal parts with John Roach’s quick, creates an excellent chemical combination. For this purpose, take one and a half ounces of each, then add ten ounces of water for warm weather, or six to seven ounces for cold. Pour everything into a large box, and it will work for two to four months. I am currently using (1849) one charged as described above, which has been in constant use for three months and works reliably well. The above is suitable for half or full-size boxes, but half of it would be enough for a quarter-size box.
Coat to the first shade of rose over iodine, change to a deep rosy red over quick, and black about one tenth the first.
Coat with the first shade of rose over iodine, switch to a deep rosy red over quick, and black about one-tenth of the initial amount.
I would not now recommend the addition of “John Roach’s quick,” as I believe equally good results can be produced without it. This liquid is now used by many, and is very good for taking views.
I wouldn't recommend adding “John Roach’s quick” anymore, since I believe you can achieve just as good results without it. Many people are using this liquid now, and it's great for taking pictures.
Lime Water Quick.—This mixture is more used at present than all the other liquids ever introduced. It produced the most uniform results, giving the fine soft tone so characteristic in pictures produces from accelerators containing chlorine. To one quart of lime water (this can be had of any druggist) add one and a half ounce of pulverized alum. This should be shook at intervals for twenty—four hours; then add one ounce of chloride of iodine and three fourths ounce of bromine.
Lime Water Quick.—This mixture is now more commonly used than any other liquids introduced before. It produces the most consistent results, providing the soft, fine tone that is so distinctive in pictures made from accelerators containing chlorine. To one quart of lime water (which you can get from any pharmacist), add one and a half ounces of powdered alum. Shake it at intervals for twenty-four hours; then add one ounce of iodine chloride and three-quarters of an ounce of bromine.
Lime Water.—This is easily prepared by putting lime into water, say a piece of quick-lime about the size of an egg into one quart of water. This should be shook occasionally for two or three days and allowed to settle, when the water can be poured off and used.
Lime Water.—This is easy to make by adding lime to water, like a piece of quick-lime about the size of an egg into one quart of water. This should be shaken occasionally for two or three days and allowed to settle, then the water can be poured off and used.
Use.—To one part of quick add six parts of water; coat to a light yellow over the iodine, to a rose color over the quick, and recoat about one tenth. The above coating may be increased or diminished, it matters not, so that there is not too much, and the proper proportions are preserved. Some add to the above a small quantity of magnesia, say about a teaspoonful to the quart of liquid.
Use.—Mix one part of quick with six parts of water; apply a light yellow coating over the iodine, a rose color over the quick, and then recoat about one-tenth of that. You can adjust the thickness of the coating as needed, as long as you don't use too much and maintain the proper proportions. Some people also add a small amount of magnesia, about a teaspoonful per quart of liquid.
Liquid Accelerator, No. 2.—The following was for a long time used by one of the first houses in the United States, and probably was one of the first liquids ever used. It produces a fine-toned picture, but is not considered as sure as the lime water quick:
Liquid Accelerator, No. 2.—For a long time, this was used by one of the top companies in the United States, and it was probably one of the first liquids ever utilized. It produces a high-quality image, but it isn’t considered as reliable as the quick lime water:
Take rain water one quart, add pulverized alum until it is a little sour to the taste, and a small piece, say one half inch square, of magnesia. Filter through paper, and add chloride of iodine one half ounce, bromine sufficient to take it up, which is a little less than half an ounce.
Take one quart of rainwater, add powdered alum until it tastes slightly sour, and include a small piece, about half an inch square, of magnesia. Filter it through paper, and add half an ounce of iodine chloride and enough bromine to dissolve it, which is just under half an ounce.
Charge with one of quick to six of water; coat over iodine to a soft yellow, nearly, but not quite, bordering on a rose; over quick to a dark purple, or steel, and back one sixth to one tenth.
Charge with one part quicksilver to six parts water; cover with iodine until it’s a soft yellow, almost, but not quite, touching on a rose color; then add more quicksilver until it turns a dark purple, or steel color, and adjust back to between one sixth and one tenth.
Wolcott’s American Mixture.—Van Loan Quick.—This mixture was first formed and used by T. Wolcott & Johnson and gained great celebrity for its productions. I have now a bottle hermetically sealed that contains about a half ounce of this mixture prepared in 1841 by John Johnson, now a resident of this city, and the former partner of Mr. Wolcott. The preparation of this mixture, as furnished by Mr. Johnson himself, is given as follows:
Wolcott’s American Mixture.—Van Loan Quick.—This mixture was first created and used by T. Wolcott & Johnson and became very famous for its results. I currently have a hermetically sealed bottle that contains about half an ounce of this mixture, prepared in 1841 by John Johnson, who now lives in this city and was the former partner of Mr. Wolcott. The method for making this mixture, as provided by Mr. Johnson himself, is as follows:
“One part of bromine, eight parts of nitric acid, sixteen parts of muriatic acid, water one hundred parts. This mixture should be allowed to stand for several days; it improves by age.
“One part of bromine, eight parts of nitric acid, sixteen parts of muriatic acid, and one hundred parts of water. Let this mixture sit for several days; it gets better with age.”
“Use.—A few drops say, 6 to 12, of this mixture, should be put into about 6 or 8 ounces of water; it will require frequent replenishing by the addition of a few more drops. The plate should be coated over the dry iodine to a red just bordering on a slate, and then exposed to the mixture only sufficiently long to change the color. If this is not done in less than six seconds it is not strong enough. Re-coat over the iodine full one fourth as long as first coating.”
“Use.—A few drops, say 6 to 12, of this mixture should be added to about 6 or 8 ounces of water; you'll need to top it off regularly with a few more drops. The plate should be coated over the dry iodine until it reaches a red that's just shy of slate. Then, expose it to the mixture only long enough to change the color. If this takes longer than six seconds, it's not strong enough. Re-coat over the iodine for a full fourth of the time used for the first coating.”
This exceedingly volatile compound is difficult to control from its instability; it is but little used. The impressions successfully produced by this mixture are very brilliant, and possess a pleasing peculiarity.
This highly unstable compound is hard to manage because of its instability; it’s rarely used. The effects created by this mixture are very vivid and have a nice uniqueness.
DRY SENSITIVES.
Hydrate of Lime.—The operation by which water is combined with lime is called slaking. Take a piece of quick lime, common lime used in mortar, and immerse it in warm water for about fifteen seconds; then place it in an iron or tin vessel. It will soon begin to swell, evolving a great deal of heat and emitting steam, and soon falls into a fine powder, hydrate of lime. This should be well stirred and allowed to cool, and then bottled in order to prevent it from giving off the hydrate and recovering the carbonic acid from the atmosphere. The last is detrimental to its use with bromine, and is one cause of the complaint that “it will not take bromine.” The hydrate of lime should, not be dried over a heat, as has been supposed by many, for in that case the hydrogen is expelled and it returns to a carbonate. It is advisable to cool it in a damp place like a ground cellar. Much of the lime in our market will not, except it be quite damp, combine with the bromine. This is owing to impurities. Nothing is equal to oyster-shell lime, which I use altogether.
Hydrate of Lime.—The process where water mixes with lime is called slaking. Take a piece of quick lime, the kind used in mortar, and soak it in warm water for about fifteen seconds; then place it in a metal or tin container. It will soon start to expand, generating a lot of heat and releasing steam, and then it will break down into a fine powder, known as hydrate of lime. This should be stirred well and allowed to cool, then stored in a sealed container to prevent it from losing its hydrate and absorbing carbonic acid from the air. The latter is harmful to its use with bromine, and is one reason people say “it won’t absorb bromine.” The hydrate of lime should not be dried with heat, as many believe, because in that case, the hydrogen is driven off and it turns back into a carbonate. It’s best to let it cool in a moist place like a basement. Much of the lime available in the market won’t mix with bromine unless it’s quite wet, due to impurities. Nothing compares to oyster-shell lime, which I use exclusively.
Bromide of Lime.—In preparing large quantities of this, we adopt the following method: Fill a four-quart bottle about two-thirds full of hydrate of lime; pour into this about one or two ounces of bromine; then shake well, add more of the bromine, shake well and let it stand for a few hours, adding sufficient bromine to give it a fine red color. It is better when kept in the large bottles, as it forms a more perfect combination: in other words it improves by age.
Bromide of Lime.—To prepare large amounts of this, we use the following method: Fill a four-quart bottle about two-thirds full with hydrated lime; then pour in about one or two ounces of bromine. Shake it well, add more bromine, shake it again, and let it sit for a few hours, adding enough bromine to achieve a nice red color. It’s better kept in large bottles, as it forms a more complete combination: in other words, it gets better with age.
Use.—Coat over the iodine to a rose red and then over this mixture to a purple or slate; recoat over the first about one fourth as long as first coating.
Use.—Apply a coat of iodine until it turns rose red, then add a layer of this mixture to achieve a purple or slate color; reapply over the first coat for about one fourth of the time it took for the initial coating.
Gurneys American Compound.—Of this compound there are two combinations, one for use, when the temperature of the atmosphere is above 65 or 70 deg., and the other at a lower temperature. The first is called No. 1, the second No. 2.
Gurney's American Compound.—There are two versions of this compound: one to use when the temperature is above 65 or 70 degrees, and the other for cooler temperatures. The first is known as No. 1, and the second as No. 2.
No. 1 is prepared by placing hydrate of lime in a bottle, say to three quarts of the hydrate of lime, add one ounce of pulverized burnt alum, and as much chloride of lime as can be put on a quarter of a dollar, and from 15 to 30 grains of dry pulverized iodine, or enough to change the color of the hydrate of lime, to the slightest possible tinge of yellow. There had better be less than carry the color to a deeper shade. The object of using the iodine is to form a compound with bromine that is not so volatile as the bromine itself. No matter how little iodine is combined with the bromine, the vapors possess their relative proportion; hence, only enough iodine to prevent “flaring,” or as it is often termed a “scum-coating,” is used. The iodine should be thoroughly combined with the lime, which will take about one or two days. Should add bromine the same as in bromide of lime, until the compound assumes a light red color.
No. 1 is made by putting hydrate of lime into a bottle, about three quarts of it, then adding one ounce of ground burnt alum, and as much chloride of lime as can fit on a quarter. Add between 15 to 30 grains of dry ground iodine, or just enough to give the hydrate of lime the faintest hint of yellow. It's better to use less than to make it a darker shade. The purpose of using iodine is to create a compound with bromine that isn’t as volatile as bromine itself. No matter how little iodine is mixed with bromine, the vapors contain their relative proportions; therefore, only enough iodine is used to prevent “flaring,” or what’s often called a “scum-coating.” The iodine should be well mixed with the lime, which will take about one or two days. Then add bromine just like in bromide of lime until the mixture turns a light red color.
No. 2 is prepared in the same manner as No. 1, except the addition of the iodine, which is omitted.
No. 2 is prepared the same way as No. 1, except that iodine is left out.
Use.—No. 1. Coat over the iodine to a bright yellow color, then over the compound, No. 1, to red color, recoat over iodine, about one sixth as long, as the time occupied in first coating.
Use.—No. 1. Apply a bright yellow coat over the iodine, then a red coat over the compound, No. 1, and reapply the coat over iodine for about one-sixth of the time it took for the first coating.
No. 2. Coat over iodine same as above, except recoat over the iodine about one fourth to one half as long as first coating.
No. 2. Apply a coat of iodine like before, but reapply over the iodine for about one fourth to one half the time of the first coating.
Dry Quick, No. 1.—Bromide of Lime and Starch.—The following compound forms an excellent accelerator, and is used by many. It is claimed for this preparation, that it will hold the bromine longer than others where starch is not employed. As regards this claim we do not think it can be substantiated. Our experience in practice has led us to the conclusion that there is no great difference as respects durability, but there is some little difference as regards the tone of the impressions produced by its use.
Dry Quick, No. 1.—Bromide of Lime and Starch.—The following mixture is a great accelerator and is used by many. It's said that this preparation can hold the bromine longer than others that don't use starch. However, we don’t believe this claim can be proven. Our practical experience has led us to conclude that there isn’t a significant difference in durability, but there is a slight difference in the quality of the images produced when it’s used.
To one quart of hydrate of lime add one quart of finely pulverized starch. To this mixture add bromine, until it assumes a deep yellow or pink color.
To one quart of hydrated lime, add one quart of finely ground starch. To this mixture, add bromine until it turns a deep yellow or pink color.
Starch may be added to any of the dry mixtures.
Starch can be added to any of the dry mixes.
Use.—Coat over the iodine to a deep yellow, then over this quick to a red color, recoat about one sixth of the time of first coating.
Use.—Apply a deep yellow coat over the iodine, then quickly add a red color on top of that. Reapply about one sixth of the time it took for the first coat.
I will here again remark, that the exact color of the coating is not essentially provided a proper proportion is preserved.
I want to point out again that the exact color of the coating isn’t crucial as long as the right proportion is maintained.
I have never seen it stated, though it be a fact worthy of note, that a proportionate time for coating over the iodine and accelerator, will not answer. For example: if a plate exposed to the vapor of iodine be perfectly coated in sixteen seconds, and then exposed to an accelerator, (not having iodine in its combination) receives its coating in four seconds, it will be found that a proper proportionate coating cannot be preserved by adopting, a proportion of time, but on the contrary, the time will diminish; for exposure over the accelerator, as in the above example, if it be desired to coat the plate with twice as much iodine as in the above example, the time would be, over iodine thirty-two seconds, and over the accelerator (to possess a proper proportion) from six to seven seconds. Hence it is that many inexperienced operators, when wishing to vary their usual manner of coating, fail in producing a favorable result. They coat calculating a proportion of time when they should not.
I’ve never seen this mentioned, but it’s worth noting that a proportional time for applying iodine and accelerator doesn’t work. For instance, if a plate exposed to iodine vapor gets fully coated in sixteen seconds, and then, when exposed to an accelerator (which doesn’t contain iodine) it gets coated in four seconds, you’ll find that you can’t maintain a proper proportional coating by sticking to a set amount of time. Instead, the time will actually decrease. If you want to coat the plate with twice as much iodine as before, you’d need to expose it to iodine for thirty-two seconds, and to the accelerator for about six to seven seconds to keep the right balance. This is why many inexperienced operators struggle when they try to change up their usual coating method. They tend to calculate based on a time proportion when they really shouldn’t.
Dry Quick, No. 2.—Bromide of Lime and Magnesia.—To one quart of hydrate of lime add one quart of magnesia, and mix them well together; add bromine same as in preparing bromide of lime; coat the same as over dry quick No. 1. This combination produces very uniform results, and is worked with much success by beginners.
Dry Quick, No. 2.—Bromide of Lime and Magnesia.—To one quart of hydrated lime, add one quart of magnesia and mix them thoroughly; then add bromine just like you would when preparing bromide of lime; coat it the same way as with dry quick No. 1. This mix yields consistent results and is often successfully used by beginners.
Chloro-Bromide of Lime.—To the bromide of lime add chloride of bromine until the mixture becomes a pale yellow color, resembling sulphur. It should be shook well, and enough of the chloride of bromine added to bring the compound to a deep blood red color.
Chloro-Bromide of Lime.—To the bromide of lime, add chloride of bromine until the mixture turns a light yellow color, similar to sulfur. It should be shaken well, and more chloride of bromine should be added to achieve a deep blood red color.
Use.—Coat over the iodine to a pink color, and then over the above to a red, or just changing the color. It should be remembered that accelerators containing chlorine do not admit of a great change of color of coating on the plate.
Use.—Apply a coat of iodine until it turns pink, then apply another coat to achieve a red color, or just to change the color. It's important to note that accelerators containing chlorine do not allow for significant changes in the color of the coating on the plate.
Iodide of Starch.—This mixture can be employed for coating over in warm weather, and prevent the flashing resulting at high temperatures. It may be used the same as the iodide alone.
Iodide of Starch.—This mix can be used for coating in warm weather and prevents flashing at high temperatures. It can be used just like the iodide on its own.
To six ounces of finely pulverized starch, add one fourth ounce of dry iodine.
To six ounces of finely powdered starch, add a quarter ounce of dry iodine.
Use.—Same as the dry iodine alone.
Use.—Same as the dry iodine alone.
The same combination may be made with lime, magnesia and other substances.
The same mix can be made with lime, magnesium, and other materials.
Concentrated Solution of Iodine for First Coating.—It may appear strange to some of our old operators that an aqueous solution of iodine can be used for coating the plate and forming the iodide of silver. It has long been a cry among most operators that it is impossible to succeed when the iodine box contains dampness. Now this is a great mistake, and we will here state that in all cases where dampness appears upon a properly prepared Daguerreotype plate, it is the result of a different temperature of the metal from the air which surrounds it. Mr. Senter, of Auburn, was the first of our operators who used a solution of iodine for coating the plate, and we several years since saw his results, which would rival the production of any other operator. A concentrated solution of iodine is prepared by putting into a common bottle two thimblesful of hyposulphite of soda and a rather larger quantity of iodine, so that there may be more than sufficient. Add to it about 40 ounces of common water (heated to 60 or 70 degrees), by little and little, moving, the bottle to warm it, for fear of breaking. After shaking it a short time, the water is rapidly and strongly colored. The solution should be poured into a bottle with a ground stopper, and when cool used for iodizing.
Concentrated Iodine Solution for First Coating.—It might seem odd to some of our experienced operators that a water-based iodine solution can be used to coat the plate and create silver iodide. Many operators have long claimed that success is impossible when the iodine box is damp. This is a significant misunderstanding. We want to clarify that whenever dampness appears on a properly prepared Daguerreotype plate, it results from a temperature difference between the metal and the surrounding air. Mr. Senter from Auburn was the first of our operators to use an iodine solution for coating the plate, and we observed his results several years ago, which could compete with those of any other operator. To prepare a concentrated iodine solution, place two thimbles full of hyposulphite of soda and a larger amount of iodine into a regular bottle, ensuring there's plenty. Gradually add about 40 ounces of ordinary water (heated to 60 or 70 degrees), moving the bottle to warm it up and prevent it from breaking. After shaking it briefly, the water will become quickly and intensely colored. The solution should be transferred to a bottle with a ground glass stopper, and once it's cool, it can be used for iodizing.
A solution of sufficient strength can be made by moistening or just covering the iodine with water.
A strong enough solution can be made by wetting or just covering the iodine with water.
Chloride of Iodine as an Accelerator.—This is probably one of the best accelerators that can be used for coating the plate for taking views; it works too slow, however, to meet the wants of the operating room, yet its use was formerly, for a long time, adhered to by some of our best professors. In producing views with this, we are successful in obtaining well-developed impressions, with a depth of tone and richness of appearance not to be met with in the productions of any other substances. I give its use as furnished me by an old and experienced operator, and published in Humphrey’s Journal, vol. i. p. 180:
Chloride of Iodine as an Accelerator.—This is probably one of the best accelerators for coating the plate when taking photos; it works too slowly, though, for the demands of the operating room. Still, some of our top professors used it for a long time. When using this, we’re able to get well-developed images with a depth of tone and richness of appearance that you won't find with any other substances. I share its use as it was given to me by an experienced older operator, published in Humphrey’s Journal, vol. i. p. 180:
“As the process of using chloride of iodine may be of interest to some of our subscribers, I take pleasure in giving the following manipulation. To one ounce of chloride of iodine add two ounces of water; place this mixture in a coating-box, the same as quick stuff; coat the plate with dry iodine to a light yellow, or lemon color; then bring the coating to a deep pink over the chloride. The plate must be recoated over the dry iodine.”
“As the process of using iodine chloride might interest some of our readers, I'm happy to share the following method. Add two ounces of water to one ounce of iodine chloride; put this mixture in a coating box, just like you would with quick stuff; coat the plate with dry iodine until it reaches a light yellow or lemon color; then turn the coating to a deep pink over the iodine chloride. The plate needs to be recoated over the dry iodine.”
This combination has been very successfully used in one of our most extensive establishments in this city, and the superiority of the pictures produced by it was considered as an equivalent for the additional time required to bring out the impressions.
This combination has been very successfully used in one of our largest facilities in this city, and the quality of the pictures produced by it was seen as worth the extra time needed to develop the prints.
Chlorine as an Accelerator.—I shall here refer to but a single experiment in which I employed chlorine gas for coating the plate. I was provided with a retort, the neck of which was fitted to the jar of my coating-box, through a hole drilled for its reception. This was fitted perfectly tight in my coating-box. I placed some pure undiluted bromine water and the agents necessary for producing chlorine gas (in small quantity) in the retort. The result was that my first experiment produced an impression completely solarized in all its parts by an exposure of four seconds of time, which would have required an exposure of twenty seconds to produce a perfectly developed impression by the usual process.
Chlorine as an Accelerator.—I will mention just one experiment where I used chlorine gas to coat the plate. I had a retort with a neck that fit into the jar of my coating box through a hole I drilled for it. This was sealed tightly in my coating box. I added some pure undiluted bromine water and the substances needed to generate a small amount of chlorine gas in the retort. The outcome was that my first experiment created a fully solarized impression in just four seconds, whereas it would typically take twenty seconds to achieve a perfectly developed impression using the standard method.
Another trial immediately produced one of the finest toned impressions I ever saw, perfectly developed in one second of time.
Another trial quickly yielded one of the best-toned impressions I've ever seen, perfectly developed in just one second.
My next two or three experiments proved total failures. I was unable to produce even a sign of an impression. By accident my retort was broken, and not being in a locality convenient to obtain another, my experiments were necessarily suspended.
My next two or three experiments were complete failures. I couldn't produce even a hint of an impression. By chance, my retort broke, and since I wasn't in a place where I could easily get another one, I had to pause my experiments.
My attention was not called to this subject again for several years, when I noticed an account of some similar experiments by F. A. P. Barnard and Dr. W. H. Harrington, the latter of whom is now of the firm of Dobyns & Harrington, of New Orleans.
My attention wasn’t drawn to this topic again for several years, until I came across an article about similar experiments conducted by F. A. P. Barnard and Dr. W. H. Harrington, who is now associated with the firm of Dobyns & Harrington in New Orleans.
From reading this article, I found my own difficulties explained. Too much of the chlorine gas was present in my coating jar. I would like to see some of our enterprising operators investigate this combination.
From reading this article, I found my own struggles described. There was too much chlorine gas in my coating jar. I hope some of our resourceful operators look into this combination.
It is a singular fact, that the vapors of bromine and chlorine combining upon the iodide of silver, produce a more sensitive coating than when the two are combined in solution, as in chloride of bromine solution. Those having Humphrey’s Journal at hand, can refer to vol. i. p. 142.
It’s a unique fact that when the vapors of bromine and chlorine combine on silver iodide, they create a more sensitive coating than when the two are mixed in a solution, like in a bromine chloride solution. Those with Humphrey’s Journal can check vol. i. p. 142.
To use Bromine Water or other Accelerators in Hot Weather.—An excellent plan for using bromine water is as follows:
To use Bromine Water or other Accelerators in Hot Weather.—A great way to use bromine water is as follows:
Fill a two-ounce bottle quarter full of it, and then fill the bottle with fine sand, which serves to preserve a low temperature; then place the bottle in a porous cup, same as used in the battery; fill this also with sand, and close the end with plaster of Paris. Place this in a coating-box, and it will be found to act with great uniformity and be quite permanent.
Fill a two-ounce bottle a quarter of the way full with it, then fill the rest of the bottle with fine sand, which helps keep a low temperature. Next, put the bottle in a porous cup, like the ones used in batteries; fill this cup with sand as well and seal the end with plaster of Paris. Put this setup in a coating box, and you'll find it works very consistently and lasts a long time.
Bromide of Lime, another accelerator, can be used in the same manner, except it is, only necessary, when a solid sensitive is used, to mix it with the sand without placing it in a bottle. This method is employed with great success by a few, who have regarded it as a secret worth keeping.
Bromide of Lime, another accelerator, can be used in the same way, but it’s only necessary, when using a solid sensitive, to mix it with the sand without putting it in a bottle. A few people have used this method with great success, considering it a secret worth keeping.
A Combination, requiring the Use of only One Coating-box.—It is often wondered by beginners, why some solution requiring only one coating cannot be employed. This can be done, but the results are not so satisfactory as when two or more are employed. Such an accelerator may be produced by adding alcoholic solution of iodine to a solution of chlorate of potash, until the latter will take up no more of the former, and to each ounce, by measure of this solution, ten drops of a saturated solution of bromide in water are added. The solution of chlorate of potash is made by diluting, one part of a saturated solution of the salt with ten parts of water. The use of the chlorate is simply as a solvent of iodine.
A Combination That Only Requires One Coating Box.—Beginners often wonder why some solutions that only need one coating can't be used. They can be, but the results aren't as good as when two or more are used. You can create such an accelerator by adding an alcoholic iodine solution to a chlorate of potash solution until it can't absorb any more iodine. For each ounce of this solution, you add ten drops of a saturated bromide solution in water. To make the chlorate of potash solution, dilute one part of the saturated salt solution with ten parts of water. The chlorate is used just as a solvent for the iodine.
Fats as Accelerators.—The use of fats, oils, or greasy substances, has been one of the most emphatic prohibitions about the Daguerreotype plate. Yet it has been proved that its presence in a small quantity upon the silver surface has the effect of reducing the time of exposure in the camera from two-thirds to three-fourths. An application may be made as follows: Pour sweet oil, or rub beef or mutton fat, on a common buff, which is free from all polishing powders. With this, buff a well-cleaned plate, and it will leave a scum, which should be mostly removed by using another buff, which should be clean. Coat the plate in the usual manner, and the result will be a great reduction in the time of exposure in the camera. The impression produced upon a plate so prepared presents, when coming from the vapor of mercury, a grey, scummy appearance, which, on the application of heat in gilding, does not improve; hence its use is not generally adopted.
Fats as Accelerators.—Using fats, oils, or greasy substances has been one of the most strongly discouraged practices with the Daguerreotype plate. However, it has been shown that a small amount on the silver surface can reduce the exposure time in the camera by about two-thirds to three-fourths. Here’s how to apply it: Pour sweet oil or rub beef or lamb fat onto a common buff that is free from all polishing powders. Use this to buff a well-cleaned plate, which will leave a residue that should be mostly wiped away with another clean buff. Coat the plate as usual, and you’ll notice a significant decrease in the exposure time in the camera. The image produced on a plate prepared this way shows a grey, scummy appearance when exposed to mercury vapor, and this doesn’t improve with heat during gilding; therefore, it’s not widely used.
We have instituted some investigations upon this subject, and in the present volume, we shall not refer to it further. Those wishing to learn more fully the effect of light upon organic substances will find Robert Hunt’s “Researches on Light” an invaluable work.
We have conducted some investigations on this topic, and in this volume, we won’t discuss it further. Those who want to learn more about the effect of light on organic substances will find Robert Hunt’s “Researches on Light” to be an invaluable resource.
CHAPTER IV.
LIGHT AND OPTICS.
Light—Optics—Solar Spectrum—Decomposition of Light—Light, Heat, and Actinism—Blue Paper and Color for the Walls of the Operating Room—Proportions of Light, Heat, and Actinism composing a Sunbeam—Refraction—Reflection—Lenses—Copying Spherical Aberration—Chromatic Aberration.
Light—Optics—Solar Spectrum—Breaking Down Light—Light, Heat, and Actinism—Blue Paper and Colors for the Walls of the Operating Room—Components of Light, Heat, and Actinism in a Sunbeam—Refraction—Reflection—Lenses—Reproducing Spherical Aberration—Chromatic Aberration.
It is advisable that persons engaging in the Daguerreotype art should have at least a little knowledge of the general principles of light and optics. It is not the author’s design here to give a full treatise on these subjects, but he only briefly refers to the matter, giving a few facts.
It’s recommended that people getting into the art of Daguerreotype should have at least some understanding of the basic principles of light and optics. The author doesn’t intend to provide a complete discussion on these topics but just briefly touches on them, sharing a few key facts.
It has been well observed by an able writer, that it is impossible to trace the path of a sunbeam through our atmosphere without feeling a desire to know its nature, by what power it traverses the immensity of space, and the various modifications it undergoes at the surfaces and interior of terrestrial substances.
It has been noted by an insightful writer that it's impossible to follow a sunbeam through our atmosphere without wanting to understand its nature, what power allows it to travel the vastness of space, and the different changes it undergoes when it hits the surfaces and interiors of earthly materials.
Light is white and colorless, as long as it does not come in contact with matter. When in apposition with any body, it suffers variable degrees of decomposition, resulting in color, as by reflection, dispersion, refraction, and unequal absorption.
Light is white and colorless as long as it doesn’t interact with anything. When it hits any object, it experiences different levels of breakdown, leading to color through reflection, dispersion, refraction, and uneven absorption.
To Sir I. Newton the world is indebted for proving the compound nature of a ray of white light emitted from the sun. The object of this work is not to engage in an extended theory upon the subject of light, but to recur only to some points of more particular interest to the photographic operator.
To Sir I. Newton, the world owes a debt for demonstrating the complex nature of a beam of white light from the sun. This work isn't meant to delve into a lengthy theory about light, but to focus on some specific points that are of particular interest to the photography operator.
The decomposition of a beam of light can be noticed by exposing it to a prism. If, in a dark room, a beam of light be admitted through a small hole in a shutter, it will form a white round spot upon the place where it falls. If a triangular prism of glass be placed on the inside of the dark room, so that the beam of light falls upon it, it no longer has the same direction, nor does it form a round spot, but an oblong painted image of seven colors—red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. This is called the solar spectrum, and will be readily understood by reference to the accompanying diagram, Fig. 1.
The breakdown of a beam of light can be observed by shining it through a prism. In a dark room, if light comes in through a small hole in the shutter, it creates a white round spot wherever it hits. If you place a triangular glass prism inside the dark room so that the light beam hits it, the light changes direction. Instead of forming a round spot, it creates an elongated image with seven colors—red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. This is known as the solar spectrum, which can be easily understood by looking at the accompanying diagram, Fig. 1.
{133}
{133}
To those who are unacquainted with the theory of light (and for their benefit this chapter is given), it may be a matter of wonder how a beam of light can be divided.
To those who are unfamiliar with the theory of light (and this chapter is intended for their benefit), it might be surprising how a beam of light can be split.
![[Illustration: Fig. 1]](images/fig1.gif)
This can be understood when I say, that white light is a bundle of colored rays united together, and when so incorporated, they are colorless; but in passing through the prism the bond of union is severed, and the colored rays come out singly and separately, because each ray has a certain amount of refracting (bending) power, peculiar to itself. These rays always hold the same relation to each other, as may be seen by comparing every spectrum or rainbow; there is never any confusion or misplacement.
This can be understood when I say that white light is a collection of colored rays grouped together, and when they're combined this way, they appear colorless; but when they pass through a prism, the connection is broken, and the colored rays emerge individually and separately, because each ray has its own unique refracting (bending) power. These rays always maintain the same relationship to each other, as can be seen by looking at any spectrum or rainbow; there's never any confusion or misplacement.
There are various other means of decomposing {134} white light besides the prism, of which one of the principal and most interesting to the Daguerreotypist is by reflection from colored bodies. If a beam of white light falls upon a white surface, it is reflected without change; but if it falls upon a red surface, only the red ray is reflected: so also with yellow and other colors. The ray which is reflected corresponds with the color of the object. It is this reflected decomposed light which prevents the beautifully-colored image we see upon the ground glass in our cameras.
There are several other ways to break down {134} white light besides using a prism, one of the main and most intriguing methods for a photographer is by reflecting it off colored surfaces. When a beam of white light hits a white surface, it reflects without change; however, when it hits a red surface, only the red light is reflected, and the same goes for yellow and other colors. The reflected light corresponds to the object's color. This reflected, broken-down light is what stops the beautifully colored image we see on the ground glass in our cameras.
![[Illustration: Fig. 2]](images/fig2.gif)
A sunbeam may be capable of three divisions—LIGHT, HEAT, and ACTINISM; the last causes all the chemical changes, and is the acting power upon surfaces prepared to receive the photographic image. The accompanying illustration, Fig. 2, will readily bring to the mind of the reader the relation of these one to another, and their intensities in the different parts of a decomposed sunbeam.
A sunbeam can be divided into three parts: LIGHT, HEAT, and ACTINISM. The last one causes all the chemical changes and is the active energy on surfaces designed to capture the photographic image. The illustration accompanying this text, Fig. 2, will help the reader easily understand how these parts relate to each other and their intensities in the different sections of a broken-down sunbeam.
The various points of the solar spectrum are represented in the order in which they occur between A, and B, this exhibits the limits of the Newtonian spectrum, corresponding with Fig. 1. Sir John Herschel and Seebeck have shown that there exists, beyond the violet, a faint violet light, or rather a lavender to b, to which gradually becomes colorless; similarly, red light exists beyond the assigned limits of the red ray to a. The greatest amount of actinic power is shown at E opposite the violet; hence this color “exerts” the greatest amount of influence in the formation of the photographic image.
The different points of the solar spectrum are shown in the order they appear between A and B, which demonstrates the limits of the Newtonian spectrum, as seen in Fig. 1. Sir John Herschel and Seebeck have revealed that there is a faint violet light, or more like a lavender, beyond the violet, which gradually becomes colorless; similarly, red light is present beyond the defined limits of the red ray to a. The highest level of actinic power is found at E, opposite the violet; thus, this color "exerts" the most influence in creating the photographic image.
(Blue paper and blue color have been somewhat extensively used by our Daguerreotype operators in their operating rooms and skylights, in order to facilitate the operation in the camera. I fancy, however, that this plan cannot be productive of as much good as thought by some, from the fact, that the light falling upon the subject, and then reflected into the camera, is, coming through colorless glass, not affected by such rays as may be reflected from the walls of the operating room; and even if it were so, I conceive that it would be injurious, by destroying the harmony of shadows which might otherwise occur.) The greatest amount of white light is at C; the yellow contains less of the chemical power than any other portion of the solar spectrum. It has been found that the most intense heat is at the extreme red, b.
(Blue paper and blue color have been used quite a bit by our Daguerreotype operators in their studios and skylights to help with the camera operation. However, I believe that this approach might not be as beneficial as some think, because the light hitting the subject and then reflecting into the camera is coming through colorless glass, unaffected by any rays that may be reflected off the walls of the studio; and even if it were the case, I think it would be harmful by disrupting the harmony of shadows that might otherwise be present.) The highest amount of white light is at C; yellow has less chemical power than any other part of the solar spectrum. It has been discovered that the most intense heat is at the far red, b.
Artificial lights differ in their color; the white light of burning charcoal, which is the principal light from candles, oil and gas, contains three rays—red, yellow, and blue. The dazzling light emitted from lime intensely heated, known as the Drummond light, gives the colors of the prism almost as bright as the solar spectrum.
Artificial lights vary in color; the white light from burning charcoal, which is the main light from candles, oil, and gas, contains three rays—red, yellow, and blue. The brilliant light produced from intensely heated lime, known as the Drummond light, displays colors from the prism nearly as vividly as the solar spectrum.
If we expose a prepared Daguerreotype plate or sensitive paper to the solar spectrum, it will be observed that the luminous power (the yellow) occupies but a small space compared with the influence of heat and chemical power. R. Hunt, in his Researches on Light, has presented the following remarks upon the accompanying illustration:
If we expose a prepared Daguerreotype plate or sensitive paper to sunlight, we can see that the light power (the yellow) takes up only a small area compared to the effects of heat and chemical power. R. Hunt, in his Researches on Light, has shared the following comments on the accompanying illustration:
![[Illustration: Fig. 3]](images/fig3.gif)
“If the linear measure, or the diameter of a circle which shall include the luminous rays, is 25, that of the calorific spectrum will be 42.10, and of the chemical spectrum 55.10. Such a series of circles may well be used to represent a beam from the sun, which may be regarded as an atom of Light, surrounded with an invisible atmosphere of Heat, and another still more extended, which possesses the remarkable property of producing chemical and molecular change.
“If the straight measure, or the diameter of a circle that includes the light rays, is 25, then the diameter of the heat spectrum will be 42.10, and that of the chemical spectrum will be 55.10. This series of circles can effectively represent a beam from the sun, which can be seen as a particle of Light, enclosed by an invisible layer of Heat, and another broader layer that has the amazing ability to cause chemical and molecular changes."
A ray of light, in passing obliquely through any medium of uniform density, does not change its course; but if it should pass into a denser body, it would turn from a straight line, pursue a less oblique direction, and in a line nearer to a perpendicular to the surface of that body. Water exerts a stronger refracting power than air; and if a ray of light fall upon a body of this fluid its course is changed, as may be seen by reference to Fig. 4.
A ray of light, when it passes at an angle through any medium with uniform density, doesn’t change direction; however, if it enters a denser material, it will deviate from a straight line, taking a less angled path and aligning more closely to a perpendicular angle to the surface of that medium. Water has a stronger refracting ability than air; so when a ray of light hits a body of water, its path changes, as illustrated in Fig. 4.
![[Illustration: Fig. 4]](images/fig4.gif)
It is observed that it proceeds in a less oblique direction (towards the dotted line), and, on passing on through, leaves the liquid, proceeding in a line parallel to that at which it entered. It should be observed that at the surface of bodies the refractive power is exerted, and that the light proceeds in a straight line until leaving the body. The refraction is more or less, and in all cases in proportion as the rays fall more or less obliquely on the refracting surface. It is this law of optics which has given rise to the lenses in our camera tubes, by which means we are enabled to secure a well-delineated representation of any object we choose to picture.
It has been noted that it moves in a less angled direction (toward the dotted line) and, as it passes through, exits the liquid, continuing in a line that is parallel to the one it entered. It’s important to note that at the surface of objects, the refractive power is at play, and the light moves in a straight line until it leaves the object. The amount of refraction varies based on how the rays hit the refracting surface at different angles. This principle of optics has led to the creation of the lenses in our camera tubes, which allow us to capture a clear image of any object we want to photograph.
When a ray of light passes from one medium to another, and through that into the first again, if the two refractions be equal, and in opposite directions, no sensible effect will be produced.
When a ray of light moves from one medium to another and then back into the first one, if the two refractions are equal and in opposite directions, there will be no noticeable effect.
The reader may readily comprehend the phenomena of refraction, by means of light passing through lenses of different curves, by reference to the following diagrams:—
The reader can easily understand the phenomenon of refraction through light passing through lenses with different curves, by looking at the following diagrams:—
![[Illustration: Fig. 5, 6, 7]](images/fig5.gif)
Fig 5 represents a double-convex lens, Fig. 6 a double-concave, and Fig. 7 a concavo-convex or meniscus. By these it is seen that a double-convex lens tends to condense the rays of light to a focus, a double-concave to scatter them, and a concavo-convex combines both powers.
Fig 5 shows a double-convex lens, Fig. 6 shows a double-concave lens, and Fig. 7 shows a concavo-convex lens or meniscus. From these, we can see that a double-convex lens concentrates light rays to a focus, a double-concave lens spreads them out, and a concavo-convex lens combines both functions.
If parallel rays of light fall upon a double-convex lens, D D, Fig. 8, they will be refracted (excepting such as pass directly through the centre) to a point termed the principal focus.
If parallel rays of light hit a double-convex lens, D D, Fig. 8, they will be bent (except for those that go straight through the center) to a point known as the principal focus.
![[Illustration: Fig. 8]](images/fig8a.gif)
The lines A B C represent parallel rays which pass through the lens, D D, and meet at F; this point being the principal focus, its distance from the lens is called the focal length. Those rays of light which are traversing a parallel course, when they enter the lens are brought to a focus nearer the lens than others. Hence the difficulty the operator sometimes experiences by not being able to “obtain a focus,” when he wishes to secure a picture of some very distant objects; he does not get his ground glass near enough to the lenses. Again, the rays from an object near by may be termed diverging rays. This will be better comprehended by reference to Fig. 9, where it will be seen that the dotted lines, representing parallel rays, meet nearer the lenses than those from the point A. The closer the object is to the lenses, the greater will be the divergence. This rule is applicable to copying. Did we wish to copy a 1/6 size Daguerreotype on a 1/16 size plate, we should place it in such a position to the lenses at A that the focus would be at F, where the image would be represented at about the proper size. Now, if we should wish to copy the 1/6 size picture, and produce another of exactly the same dimensions, we have only to bring it nearer to the lenses, so that the lens D E shall be equi-distant from the picture and the focus, i. e. from A to B. The reason of this is, that the distance of the picture from the lens, in the last copy, is less than the other, and the divergence has increased, throwing, the focus further from the lens.”
The lines A B C represent parallel rays that pass through the lens, D D, and meet at F; this point is the principal focus, and its distance from the lens is called the focal length. Rays of light that are traveling in a parallel direction, when they enter the lens, are focused closer to the lens than others. This is why the operator sometimes struggles to “obtain a focus” when trying to capture a picture of very distant objects; the ground glass is not positioned close enough to the lenses. On the other hand, the rays from a nearby object can be described as diverging rays. This will be clearer with reference to Fig. 9, where the dotted lines representing parallel rays meet closer to the lenses than those from point A. The closer the object is to the lenses, the greater the divergence will be. This rule also applies to copying. If we want to copy a 1/6 size Daguerreotype onto a 1/16 size plate, we should position it relative to the lenses at A so that the focus is at F, where the image would be sized correctly. Now, if we want to copy the 1/6 size picture and create another of the exact same dimensions, we just need to bring it closer to the lenses so that the lens D E is equidistant from the picture and the focus, i.e., from A to B. The reason for this is that in the last copy, the distance of the picture from the lens is shorter than before, and the divergence has increased, pushing the focus further from the lens.
![[Illustration: Fig. 9]](images/fig9.gif)
These remarks have been introduced here as being important for those who may not understand the principles of enlarging or reducing pictures in copying.
These comments have been added here because they’re important for anyone who may not grasp the concepts of enlarging or reducing images when copying.
I would remark that the points F and A, in Fig. 9, are termed “conjugate foci.”
I would like to note that the points F and A in Fig. 9 are referred to as "conjugate foci."
If we hold a double-convex lens opposite any object, we find that an inverted image of that object will be formed on a paper held behind it. To illustrate this more clearly, I will refer to the following woodcut:
If we place a double-convex lens in front of any object, we can see that an inverted image of that object will appear on a piece of paper held behind it. To explain this more clearly, I will refer to the following woodcut:
![[Illustration: Fig. 10]](images/fig10.gif)
“If A B C is an object placed before a convex lens, L L, every point of it will send forth rays in all directions; but, for the sake of simplicity, suppose only three points to give out rays, one at the top, one at the middle, and one at the bottom; the whole of the rays then that proceed from the point A, and fall on the lens L L, will be refracted and form an image somewhere on the line A G E, which is drawn direct through the centre of the lens; consequently the focus E, produced by the convergence of the rays proceding from A, must form an image of A, only in a different relative position; the middle point of C being in a direct line with the axis of the lens, will have its image formed on the axis F, and the rays proceeding from the point B will form an image at D; so that by imagining luminous objects to be made up of all infinite number of radiating points and the rays from each individual point, although falling on the whole surface of the lens, to converge again and form a focus or representation of that point from which the rays first emerged, it will be very easy to comprehend how images are formed, and the cause of those images being reversed.
“If A B C is an object placed in front of a convex lens, L L, every point of it will emit rays in all directions; however, for simplicity, let’s just consider three points that emit rays: one at the top, one in the middle, and one at the bottom. The rays that come from point A and hit the lens L L will be refracted and create an image somewhere along the line A G E, which is drawn straight through the center of the lens. Therefore, the focus E, created by the convergence of the rays from A, will form an image of A, just in a different relative position. The middle point of C, being in a direct line with the lens axis, will have its image formed on the axis F, and the rays from point B will create an image at D. By imagining luminous objects as made up of an infinite number of radiating points and the rays from each point converging to form a focus or representation of the original point, it's easy to understand how images are formed and why those images are reversed.”
“It must also be evident, that in the two triangles A G B and D G E, that E D, the length of the image, must be to A B, the length of the object, as G D, the distance of the image, is to G B, the distance of the object from the lens.
“It must also be clear that in the two triangles A G B and D G E, the length of the image E D must relate to the length of the object A B just as the distance of the image G D relates to the distance of the object G B from the lens."
It will be observed that in the last cut the image produced by the lens is curved. Now, it would be impossible to produce a well-defined image from the centre to the edge upon a plain surface; the outer edges would be misty, indistinct, or crayon-like. The centre of the image might be represented clear and sharp on the ground glass, yet this would be far from the case in regard to the outer portions. This is called spherical aberration, and to it is due the want of distinctness which is frequently noticed around the edges of pictures taken in the camera. To secure a camera with a flat, sharp, field, should be the object of every operator; and, in a measure, this constitutes the great difference in cameras manufactured in this country.
It should be noted that in the last shot, the image produced by the lens is curved. It would be impossible to create a clear image from the center to the edge on a flat surface; the outer edges would appear blurry, indistinct, or crayon-like. While the center of the image might be clear and sharp on the ground glass, this clarity doesn’t extend to the outer areas. This issue is known as spherical aberration, and it contributes to the lack of clarity often seen around the edges of photos taken with a camera. Every photographer should aim to have a camera with a flat, sharp field; this is partly what distinguishes different cameras made in this country.
Spherical aberration is overcome by proper care in the formation of the lens: “It can be shown upon mathematical data that a lens similar to that given in the following diagram—one surface of which is a section of an ellipse, and the other of a circle struck from the furthest of the two foci of that ellipse—produces no aberration.
Spherical aberration can be avoided with careful lens design: “Mathematical data shows that a lens like the one in the following diagram—where one surface is part of an ellipse and the other is a circle drawn from one of the ellipse's foci—results in no aberration.
“At the earliest period of the employment of the camera obscura, a double-convex lens was used to produce the image; but this form was soon abandoned, on account of the spherical aberration so caused. Lenses for the photographic camera are now always ground of a concavo-convex form, or meniscus, which corresponds more nearly to the accompanying diagram.”
“At the earliest stage of using the camera obscura, a double-convex lens was used to create the image; however, this design was quickly replaced due to the spherical distortion it caused. Lenses for photographic cameras are now always shaped as concavo-convex, or meniscus, which aligns more closely with the accompanying diagram.”
![[Illustration: Fig. 11]](images/fig11.gif)
Chromatic Aberration is another difficulty that opticians have to contend with in the manufacturing of lenses. It will be remembered, that in a former page (133) a beam of light is decomposed by passing through a glass prism giving seven distinct colors—red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet.
Chromatic Aberration is another challenge that opticians face when making lenses. It’s worth recalling that on a previous page (133), a beam of light is split into seven distinct colors—red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet—when it passes through a glass prism.
Now, as has been said before, the dissimilar rays having an unequal degree of refrangibility, it will be impossible to obtain a focus by the light passing through a double-convex lens without its being fringed with color. Its effect will be readily understood by reference to the accompanying cut.
Now, as mentioned before, different rays have varying degrees of refractivity, so it's impossible to get a clear focus with light passing through a double-convex lens without a color fringe. This effect can be easily understood by looking at the accompanying illustration.
![[Illustration: Fig. 8]](images/fig8b.gif)
If L L be a double convex-lens, and R R R parallel rays of white light, composed of the seven colored rays, each having a different index of refraction, they cannot be refracted to one and the same point; the red rays, being the least refrangible, will be bent to r, and the violet rays, being the most refrangible, to v: the distance v r constitutes the chromatic aberration, and the circle, of which the diameter is a l, the place or point of mean refraction, and is called the circle of least aberration. If the rays of the sun are refracted by means of a lens, and the image received on a screen placed between C and o, so as to cut the cone L a l L, a luminous circle will be formed on the paper, only surrounded by a red border, because it is produced by a section of the cone L a l L, of which the external rays L a L l, are red; if the screen be moved to the other side of o, the luminous circle will be bordered with violet, because it will be a section of the cone M a M l, of which the exterior rays are violet. To avoid the influence of spherical aberration, and to render the phenomena of coloration more evident, let an opaque disc be placed over the central portion of the lens, so as to allow the rays only to pass which are at the edge of the glass; a violet image of the sun will then be seen at v, red at r, and, finally, images of all the colors of the spectrum in the intermediate space; consequently, the general image will not only be confused, but clothed with prismatic colors.”
If L L is a double convex lens, and R R R are parallel rays of white light, made up of the seven colors, each having a different index of refraction, they can't all be bent to the same point. The red rays, being the least refracted, will bend to r, and the violet rays, being the most refracted, will bend to v: the distance v r represents the chromatic aberration, and the circle, with a diameter of a l, is the point of average refraction, known as the circle of least aberration. When sunlight is passed through a lens and the image is projected onto a screen placed between C and o, cutting the cone L a l L, a bright circle will appear on the paper, only surrounded by a red border, because it's created by a section of the cone L a l L, where the outer rays L a L l are red. If the screen is moved to the other side of o, the bright circle will be bordered with violet, since it will be a section of the cone M a M l, where the outer rays are violet. To minimize the impact of spherical aberration and make the color effects more obvious, place an opaque disc over the center of the lens, allowing only the edge rays to pass through. This will result in a violet image of the sun at v, red at r, and finally, images of all the colors of the spectrum in between; therefore, the overall image will not only appear blurred but will also display prismatic colors.
To overcome the difficulty arising from the chromatic aberration, the optician has only to employ a combination of lenses of opposite focal length, and cut from glass possessing different refrangible powers, so that the rays of light passing through the one are strongly refracted, and in the other are bent asunder again, reproducing white light.
To solve the problem caused by chromatic aberration, the optician just needs to use a combination of lenses with opposite focal lengths, made from glass with different refractive properties. This way, the rays of light passing through one lens are strongly bent, while in the other lens, they are spread out again, recreating white light.
To the photographer one of the most important features, requiring his particular attention, is, that he be provided with a good lens. By the remarks given in the preceding pages, he will be enabled, in a measure, to judge of some of the difficulties to which he is occasionally subjected. We have in this country but two or three individuals who are giving their attention to the manufacture of lenses, and their construction is such, that they are quite free from the spherical or chromatic aberration.
To the photographer, one of the most important things that needs his attention is having a good lens. From the comments in the previous pages, he'll be able to understand some of the challenges he might face. In our country, there are only a couple of people focused on making lenses, and their designs are quite free from spherical or chromatic distortion.
CHAPTER V.
To make Plates for the Daguerreotype—Determining the Time of Exposure in the Camera—Instantaneous Process for Producing Daguerreotype—Galvanizing the Daguerreotype Plate—Silvering Solution—Daguerreotype without Mercury—Management of Chemicals—Hints and Cautions—Electrotyping—Crayon Daguerreotypes—Illuminated Daguerreotypes—Natural Colors in Heliography—Multiplying Daguerreotypes on one Plate—Deposit in Gilding—Practical Hints on the Daguerreotype.
To create plates for the daguerreotype—figuring out the exposure time in the camera—instant process for making daguerreotypes—galvanizing the daguerreotype plate—silvering solution—daguerreotype without mercury—handling chemicals—tips and warnings—electrotyping—crayon daguerreotypes—illuminated daguerreotypes—natural colors in heliography—multiplying daguerreotypes on one plate—deposit in gilding—practical tips on the daguerreotype.
TO MAKE PLATES FOR THE DAGUERREOTYPE.
I do not give the method employed by our regular plate manufacturers; this is not important, as the operator could not possibly profit by it from the fact of the great expense of manufacturing. The following will be found practical:
I won't share the method used by our regular plate manufacturers; it's not important since the operator wouldn't benefit from it due to the high costs of production. The following will be practical:
Procure a well planished copper plate of the required size, and well polish it, first with pumice stone and water, then with snake stone, jewelers’ rouge. Plates can be purchased in a high state of preparation from the engravers. Having prepared the copper-plate, well rub it with salt and water, and then with the silvering powder. No kind answers better than that used by clock-makers to silver their dial-plates. It is composed of one part of well washed chloride of silver, five parts of cream of tartar, and four parts of table salt. This powder must be kept in a dark vessel, and in a dry place. For a plate six inches by five, as much of this composition as can be taken up on a shilling is sufficient. It is to be laid in the centre of the copper, and the figures being wetted, to be quickly rubbed over every part of the plate, adding occasionally a little damp salt. The copper being covered with the silvering is to be speedily well washed in water, in which a little soda is dissolved, and as soon as the surface is of a fine silvery whiteness, it is to be dried with a very clean warm cloth. In this state the plates may be kept for use. The first process is to expose the plate to the heat of a spirit flame, until the silvered surface becomes of a well-defined golden-yellow color; then, when the plate is cold, take a piece of cotton, dipped in very dilute nitric acid, and rub lightly over it until the white hue is restored, and dry it with very soft clean cloths. A weak solution of the hydriodate of potash, in which a small portion of iodine is dissolved, is now passed over the plate with a wide camel’s hair brush. The silver is thus converted, over its surface, into an ioduret of silver; and in this state it is exposed to light, which blackens it. When dry, it is to be again polished, either with dilute acid or a solution of carbonate of soda, and afterwards with dry cotton, and the smallest possible portion of prepared chalk: by this means a surface of the highest polish is produced. The rationale of this process is, in the first place, the heat applied dries off any adhering acid, and effects more perfect union between the copper and silver, so as to enable it to bear the subsequent processes. The first yellow surface appears to be an oxide of silver with, possibly, a minute quantity of copper in combination, which being removed leaves a surface chemically pure.
Get a well-polished copper plate of the right size and polish it well, first with pumice stone and water, then with snake stone and jeweler's rouge. Plates can be bought ready-prepped from engravers. After preparing the copper plate, rub it well with salt and water, then with the silvering powder. The best powder is the one used by clockmakers for their dial plates, which is made of one part well-washed silver chloride, five parts cream of tartar, and four parts table salt. This powder should be stored in a dark container and kept in a dry place. For a plate that’s six inches by five, a quantity that can be picked up on a shilling is enough. Place it in the center of the copper, dampen the figures, and quickly rub the mixture over every part of the plate, occasionally adding a bit of damp salt. After covering the copper with silvering, wash it thoroughly in water mixed with a little soda, and once the surface is a nice silvery white, dry it with a clean, warm cloth. The plates can be stored like this for later use. The first step is to hold the plate to the heat of a spirit flame until the silver surface turns a clear golden-yellow color; then, when the plate cools, take a piece of cotton dipped in very dilute nitric acid and lightly rub it over until the white color returns, then dry it with very soft, clean cloths. Next, apply a weak solution of potassium hydriodide, with a small amount of iodine dissolved in it, over the plate using a wide camel's hair brush. This converts the silver on the surface into silver iodide, and then expose it to light, which will darken it. When it dries, polish it again with either dilute acid or a solution of sodium carbonate, and follow up with dry cotton and just a tiny amount of prepared chalk. This will create a surface with the highest polish. The reason for this process is that the applied heat removes any leftover acid and creates a better bond between the copper and silver, allowing it to endure the subsequent steps. The initial yellow surface seems to be a silver oxide possibly containing a tiny bit of copper in combination, which, when removed, leaves a chemically pure surface.
Another Method.—The best and simplest mode with which we are acquainted is to divide an earthenware vessel with a diaphragm: one side should be filled with a very dilute solution of sulphuric acid, and the other with either a solution of ferroprussiate of potash, or muriate of soda, saturated with chloride of silver. The copper plate, varnished on one side, is united, by means of a copper wire, with a plate of zinc. The zinc plate being immersed in the acid, and the copper in the salt, a weak electric current is generated, which precipitates the silver in a very uniform manner over the entire surface.
Another Method.—The best and simplest way we know is to divide a clay pot with a barrier: one side should be filled with a very diluted solution of sulfuric acid, and the other with either a solution of ferrocyanide of potassium or sodium chloride, saturated with silver chloride. The copper plate, coated on one side, is connected, using a copper wire, to a zinc plate. With the zinc plate immersed in the acid and the copper in the salt, a weak electric current is created, which deposits silver evenly across the entire surface.
Another Method.—A piece of brass or of polished copper, brass is preferred, is perfectly planished and its surface made perfectly clean. A solution of nitrate of silver, so weak that the silver is precipitated slowly, and a brownish color, on the brass, is laid uniformly over it, “at least three times,” with a camel’s hair pencil. After each application of the nitrate, the plate should be rubbed gently in one direction, with moistened bitartrate of potassa, applied with buff. This coat of silver receives a fine polish from peroxide of iron and buff. Proofs are said to have been taken on it, comparable with those obtained on French plates.
Another Method.—A piece of brass or polished copper, with brass being preferred, should be perfectly smoothed out and its surface cleaned thoroughly. A very diluted solution of silver nitrate that causes the silver to slowly form a brownish layer on the brass is applied evenly over it, “at least three times,” using a camel’s hair brush. After each application of the nitrate, the plate should be gently rubbed in one direction with damp cream of tartar, using a buff. This layer of silver is polished using iron oxide and a buff. It's said that proofs taken from it are comparable to those made on French plates.
M. SOLIEL’S PROCESS FOR DETERMINING THE TIME OF EXPOSURE IN THE CAMERA.
M. Soliel has proposed the use of the chloride of silver to determine the time required to produce a good impression on the iodated plate in the camera. His method is to fix at the bottom of a tube, blackened within, a piece of card, on which chloride of silver, mixed with gum or dextrine, is spread. The tube thus disposed is turned from the side of the object of which we wish to take the image, and the time that the chloride of silver takes to become of a greyish slate color will be the time required for the light of the camera to produce a good effect on the iodated silver.
M. Soliel has suggested using silver chloride to determine how long it takes to create a good impression on the iodized plate in the camera. His method involves placing a piece of card, coated with silver chloride mixed with gum or dextrin, at the bottom of a tube that’s blackened on the inside. The tube is then oriented away from the object we want to capture, and the time it takes for the silver chloride to turn a grayish slate color will indicate how long the camera's light needs to create a good effect on the iodized silver.
INSTANTANEOUS PROCESS FOR PROCURING DAGUERREOTYPES.
The following method of producing Daguerreotypes has by some been named as above. Most experienced operators have been long acquainted with the effect of the vapor of ammonia upon the chemically coated plate. I will here insert Mr. W. H. Hewett’s plan of proceeding. This gentleman, in referring to it (published in 1845), says:
The following method of creating Daguerreotypes has been referred to as mentioned above. Most experienced operators have long been aware of the effect of ammonia vapor on the chemically coated plate. I will now include Mr. W. H. Hewett’s procedure. This gentleman, in discussing it (published in 1845), states:
“This improvement consists in using the vapor of ammonia, as an object to accelerate the action of light upon the plate. The effect is produced upon a simple iodized plate, but still more upon a plate prepared in the ordinary way, with both iodine and bromine. By this means, the author obtained impressions instantaneously in the sunshine, and in five to ten seconds in a moderate light; and he hopes to be able to take moving objects. It can be applied by exposing the prepared plate over a surface of water, to which a few drops of ammonia have been added (sufficient to make it smell of ammonia); or the vapor can be introduced into the camera during the action. In fact, the presence of ammonia, in the operating-room, appears to have a good effect, as it also neutralizes the vapors of iodine and bromine that may be floating about, and which are so detrimental to the influences of light upon the plate.”
“This improvement involves using ammonia vapor to enhance the effect of light on the plate. The result occurs on a simple iodized plate, but even more so on a plate prepared in the usual manner with both iodine and bromine. With this method, the author was able to achieve instant impressions in sunlight and within five to ten seconds in moderate light; he hopes to capture moving subjects as well. This can be done by placing the prepared plate over a water surface with a few drops of ammonia added (enough to give it an ammonia scent); alternatively, the vapor can be brought into the camera during exposure. In fact, having ammonia present in the operating area seems to be beneficial, as it also neutralizes the iodine and bromine vapors that may linger in the air, which are harmful to the light's effect on the plate.”
GALVANIZING THE DAGUERREOTYPE PLATE.
In consideration of the importance of galvanized plates, I shall endeavor to give as plain and concise a manner of manipulation as possible. For some time it was a question among the operators generally, as to the beneficial result of electrotyping, the Daguerreotype plate, but for a few years past our first operators have found it a fact, that a well electro-silvered surface is the best for producing a portrait by the Daguerreotype.
Considering the importance of galvanized plates, I will try to explain the handling process as clearly and simply as possible. For a while, there was a debate among operators about the effectiveness of electrotyping the Daguerreotype plate, but in recent years our first operators have discovered that a well electro-silvered surface is the best for producing a portrait using the Daguerreotype.
From my own experiments, I have found that a plate, by being galvanized, can be rendered more sensitive to the operation of the light in proportion of one to five, viz.: if a plate as furnished by the market, be cleaned, polished, coated and exposed in the camera, if the required time to freely develop an impression be ten seconds, a similar plate prepared in like manner and galvanized, will produce an equally well-defined image in eight seconds. In connection with this subject, there is one fact worthy of notice; a plate with a very heavy coating of pure silver, will not produce an equally developed image, as a plate with a thinner coating, hence the thin coating, providing it entirely covers the surface, is the best, and is the one most to be desired. The experiment is plain and simple. Let the slate receive a heavy or thick coating by the electrotype, then polish, coat, expose in the usual manner, and the result will be a flat, ashy, indistinct impression; when, on the other hand, the thin coating will produce a bright, clear and distinct image, with all the details delineated.
From my own experiments, I have found that a galvanized plate can be made more sensitive to light by a factor of one to five. For example, if a commercially available plate is cleaned, polished, coated, and exposed in the camera, and it takes ten seconds to develop a clear impression, a similar plate that is prepared and galvanized will produce an equally well-defined image in eight seconds. One noteworthy fact in this context is that a plate with a very thick coating of pure silver does not produce an equally developed image compared to a plate with a thinner coating. Therefore, a thin coating, as long as it completely covers the surface, is the best option and the most desirable. The experiment is straightforward. If the slate receives a thick coating through electrotyping, then it is polished, coated, and exposed in the usual way, the result will be a flat, dull, and unclear impression. On the other hand, a thin coating will yield a bright, clear, and distinct image with all details clearly defined.
The style of battery best for the purpose has been, and now is, a question of dispute among operators; some preferring the Daniell battery to Smee’s. Some claim the superiority of the first from its uniformity of action; others, of the latter, for its strength. I consider either good, and for the inexperienced would prefer the Daniell. This is more simple in its construction, while it has certainty in action. The more skillful electrotyper would prefer Smee’s, and this is the one most generally in use. I would remark that the plan of galvanizing plates should be followed by every operator, and when once thoroughly tested, no one will abandon it.
The best type of battery for this purpose has always been a topic of debate among users; some prefer the Daniell battery over Smee’s. Some argue that the Daniell is superior because it consistently performs well, while others favor Smee’s for its strength. Personally, I think both are good, but for beginners, I'd recommend the Daniell. It’s simpler to build and works reliably. More skilled electrotypers might lean towards Smee’s, which is the most commonly used. I would also suggest that every operator should use the method of galvanizing plates, and once it's been thoroughly tested, nobody will want to give it up.
SILVERING SOLUTION.
To any desired quantity of chloride of silver in water add, little by little, cyanide of potassium, shaking well at each addition, until all the cyanide is dissolved. Continue this operation, and add the cyanide, until all the precipitate is taken up and held in solution.
To any desired amount of silver chloride in water, gradually add potassium cyanide, shaking well after each addition, until all the cyanide is dissolved. Keep doing this and continue adding the cyanide until all the precipitate is dissolved and kept in solution.
This solution is now ready for the plate-cup. Enough water may be added to cover any sized plate when held perpendicular in the cup. The strength of the solution may be kept up by occasionally adding the chloride of silver and cyanide of potassium. There should alway be a very little excess of the cyanide.
This solution is now ready for the plate-cup. You can add enough water to cover any sized plate when it’s held upright in the cup. The strength of the solution can be maintained by occasionally adding some silver chloride and potassium cyanide. There should always be a slight excess of cyanide.
The plate should be well cleaned and buffed, and the solution well stirred before it is immersed. Care should be observed to keep the solution clean, and allow no particle of dust to come in contact with the surface of the plate. The plate is now to be attached to the pole of the battery.
The plate should be thoroughly cleaned and polished, and the solution should be mixed well before immersion. It's important to keep the solution clean and ensure that no dust comes into contact with the plate's surface. Now, the plate needs to be connected to the battery pole.
After remaining a short time, it assumes a blue color; take it out, rinse freely with pure water, then dry with a spirit lamp, and it is ready for buffing. Buff and coat in the usual manner. Some operators are in the practice of immersing the plate in the solution and buffing twice. This additional silvering is no improvement wherever there has been a proper first coating.
After staying in the solution for a little while, it turns blue; take it out, rinse it thoroughly with clean water, then dry it with a spirit lamp, and it’s ready to be buffed. Buff and coat it as usual. Some people have a habit of dipping the plate in the solution and buffing it twice. This extra silvering doesn’t make a difference if there has been a proper first coating.
Sometimes the operator is troubled with streaks or scum on the plate. This may arise from three causes, all of which experience must teach the experimenter to avoid; first, too great an excess of cyanide in the solution; second, a lack of silver; third, the current too strong. Another annoyance arises from the solution being dirty and the dirt collecting on the surface. When this is the case, the dirt is sure to come in contact with the surface of the plate as it is plunged into the solution, and the result is a scum that it is difficult to dispose of. This can be prevented only by frequent filtering. One thing should always be borne in mind in electrotyping Daguerreotype plates—that in order to secure a perfectly coated surface, the plate should be perfectly cleaned. In this point, many who have tried the electrotype process have failed, attributing their ill success to other than the proper cause.
Sometimes the operator faces issues with streaks or scum on the plate. This can happen for three reasons, which experience should teach the experimenter to avoid: first, too much cyanide in the solution; second, a shortage of silver; and third, the current being too strong. Another problem occurs when the solution is dirty and the dirt gathers on the surface. When this happens, the dirt is likely to touch the surface of the plate as it is immersed in the solution, resulting in a scum that’s hard to clean off. This can only be prevented by filtering frequently. One important thing to remember in electrotyping Daguerreotype plates is that to achieve a perfectly coated surface, the plate must be impeccably cleaned. Many who have attempted the electrotype process have failed at this point, mistakenly blaming their lack of success on other factors.
DAGUERREOTYPES WITHOUT MERCURY.
The following process possesses some interest, and is worthy a trial from operators. M. Natterer, of Vienna, discovered a process for obtaining proofs on iodized plates with the chloride of sulphur, without the use of mercury. A plate of silver is iodized in the usual manner, and then placed on the top of a vessel six or eight inches high, having at the bottom, in a small cup, a few drops of chloride of sulphur; it should remain exposed to the action of the vapor until the sombre yellow color is changed to a red, after which it is brought to a focus in the camera, where it is exposed to the light in the camera, for about the time necessary to produce an ordinary daguerreotype. The plate is then taken out and examined in the camera by the light of a candle. It often occurs that no trace of the image is as yet perceptible, but if the plate is heated by placing over a spirit lamp the unprepared side, or if left for some time in the dark, or, lastly, if exposed only a few seconds to a weak, dimmed light, the positive picture then appears with all its shades. Of these three modes of bringing out the image, the second is superior to the others.
The following process is quite interesting and worth trying out for operators. M. Natterer from Vienna discovered a method for getting proofs on iodized plates using chloride of sulfur, without mercury. A silver plate is iodized in the usual way and then placed on top of a container about six or eight inches high, which contains a small cup with a few drops of chloride of sulfur at the bottom. It should be exposed to the vapor until the dull yellow color turns red. After that, it’s focused in the camera and exposed to light for about the same time it takes to create a regular daguerreotype. The plate is then removed from the camera and checked under candlelight. Often, no image is visible at first, but if the unprepared side is heated over a spirit lamp, left in the dark for a while, or exposed for just a few seconds to a weak, dim light, the positive image will then appear with all its details. Of these three methods for revealing the image, the second one is the best.
MANAGEMENT OF CHEMICALS.
It is necessary, first of all, to know that you have a chemical which is capable of producing good results when in skillful hands. For this reason it is best to prepare your own quick, after some formula which is known to be good. Those quick-stuffs which contain chloride of iodine are noted for their depth of tone while they probably operate with less uniformity than those which are destitute of it. For operating under ordinary circumstances, especially with an inferior light, probably no accelerator is more quick and sure than Wolcott’s. It also produces a very fine, white pleasing picture, though lacking that depth of impression so much to be desired. The dry quick operates with surety, and its use is simple and easy, producing an impression much like Wolcott’s. For those having a good and permanent light, however, we would recommend a chemical giving more body to the impression.
It’s important, first of all, to know that you have a chemical that can produce good results when used skillfully. For this reason, it’s best to prepare your own quick solution based on a proven formula. Quick chemicals that contain iodine chloride are known for their deep tone, though they may not work as consistently as those without it. Under typical conditions, especially in poor lighting, there’s probably no accelerator more effective and reliable than Wolcott’s. It also creates a very nice, bright impression, although it lacks the depth that’s often desired. The dry quick operates reliably, is simple to use, and produces an impression similar to Wolcott’s. However, for those with a good and consistent light source, we recommend a chemical that provides a richer impression.
There is a class of accelerators called sensitives, claiming to work in from three to ten seconds, which, however, will be found very little, if any, more sensitive than this. We frequently work it with the ordinary coating in twelve and fifteen seconds. The manner in which the sensitives are worked is by coating very light. In this way, a flat, shallow picture is obtained in a few seconds; and the same can be done with any of the more volatile quicks.
There’s a type of accelerator called sensitives that claims to work in three to ten seconds, but they really aren’t much more sensitive than this. We often achieve results with the regular coating in twelve to fifteen seconds. The way sensitives are used is by applying a very light coat. This allows for a flat, shallow image to be created in just a few seconds, and the same effect can be achieved with any of the quicker volatile options.
It is a fact not generally known, that a plate coated in a light chemical room is more sensitive than when coated in darkness. By admitting a free, uniform light, and exposing the plate to it a few seconds after coating, then timing short in the camera, a very light, clear impression is obtained. The time in the camera is reduced in proportion to the previous action of light. The shades, of course, are destroyed, and the tone injured; still, for taking children, we have succeeded better by this method than by the use of “sensitives.” The discovery of this principle was accidental, while operating where the direct ray s of the sun, entering the window just before sunset, fell on the curtain of our dark room, rendering it very light within.
It's not commonly known that a plate coated in a well-lit room is more sensitive than one coated in darkness. By letting in a consistent light and exposing the plate to it for a few seconds after coating, then using a shorter timeframe in the camera, you can get a very light, clear image. The time in the camera is decreased in relation to the previous light exposure. Naturally, the shades are lost, and the tone is affected; however, for photographing children, we've had better success with this method than with the use of "sensitives." This principle was discovered by chance while we were working in a space where direct sunlight coming through the window just before sunset lit up the darkroom significantly.
The selection of iodine is not unimportant. Reject, at once, that which has anything like a dull, black, greasy appearance; and select that which is in beautiful large crystalline scales, of a purple color, and brilliant steel lustre.
The choice of iodine is quite significant. Immediately discard anything that looks dull, black, and greasy; instead, choose iodine that has large, beautiful crystalline scales, a purple color, and a shiny steel finish.
Solarization, and general blueness of all the light parts of the picture, were formerly great obstacles to success, though now scarcely thought of by first-class artists. Beginners in the art, however, are still apt to meet with this difficulty. It is occasioned by dampness in the iodine box, which causes the plate to become coated with a hydro-iodide of silver, instead of the iodide. The remedy is in drying your iodine. If in summer, you can open your box and set it in sunshine a few minutes; or if in winter, set it under a stove a short time. The true method, however, is to dry it by means of the chloride of calcium. It has such a remarkable affinity for water, that a small fragment placed in the open air, even in the dryest weather, soon becomes dissolved.
Solarization and the overall blueness of the light areas in the image were once major hurdles for success, but now they are hardly considered by top artists. However, beginners in the field still tend to struggle with this issue. It happens due to moisture in the iodine box, which leads to the plate being covered with a hydro-iodide of silver instead of the iodide. The solution is to dry your iodine. In the summer, you can open your box and leave it in the sun for a few minutes; or in the winter, place it near a stove for a short time. The best method, though, is to use calcium chloride to dry it out. It has such a strong affinity for water that even a small piece left out in the open, regardless of how dry the weather is, quickly absorbs moisture.
Take one or two ounces of this chemical, heat it in the drying bath, or in a hot stove, to perfect dryness; place it in a small glass toy dish, or large watch crystal, and set it in the centre of your iodine box. Take this out and heat to dryness every morning. Adopt this process, and with your mercury at a high temperature, you will never be troubled with blue pictures.
Take one or two ounces of this chemical, heat it in the drying bath or a hot stove until completely dry; put it in a small glass dish or a large watch crystal, and place it in the center of your iodine box. Remove this and heat it to dryness every morning. Follow this process, and with your mercury at a high temperature, you'll never have issues with blue pictures.
Young operators are apt to impute all want of success in operating to their chemicals, even though the cause is quite as likely to be elsewhere. Failure is quite likely to occur from dampness in the buffs, or in the polish; it is therefore necessary to be constantly on the guard in this quarter. With a view to this, always scrape your buffs with a dull knife, or with one blade of your shears, the first thing in the morning, and after brushing them thoroughly, dry them, either in the sun, by a stove, or in the buff-dryer. It is equally important that the polish and the brush should be kept dry.
Young operators often blame their lack of success on their chemicals, even when the issue might be elsewhere. Failures can easily happen due to dampness in the buffs or the polish, so it's essential to stay vigilant about this. To address this, always scrape your buffs with a dull knife or one blade of your shears first thing in the morning. After thoroughly brushing them, make sure to dry them either in the sun, near a stove, or in the buff-dryer. It's just as important to keep the polish and the brush dry.
Want of success may arise from vapors of iodine or bromine in the camera box, mercury bath, or even in the buffs. It is incredible how small a quantity of these vapors will affect the effect of light when coming in contact with the plate, after or during the exposure in the camera. It is therefore necessary to be cautious not to mix chemicals, nor open your boxes or bottles in your room, but take them out to do it. Never hurry the operation through from lack of confidence in the result. The fact of anything being out of order, forms no excuse for slighting the process. If unsuccessful, do not pursue the same course every trial, but vary with a view to detect the cause of the difficulty.
The lack of success may come from iodine or bromine vapors in the camera box, mercury bath, or even in the buffers. It’s surprising how even a tiny amount of these vapors can influence the effect of light when they come into contact with the plate during or after exposure in the camera. Therefore, it’s important to be careful not to mix chemicals or open your boxes or bottles in your room; instead, take them outside to do so. Never rush the process out of a lack of confidence in the outcome. Just because something seems off doesn’t mean you should ignore the proper procedure. If you're not successful, don't keep doing the same thing; instead, change your approach to figure out what might be causing the issue.
In case of a long series of failures, institute a regular course of investigation, after this manner, commencing where the trouble is most likely to occur:
In the event of a prolonged series of failures, set up a consistent investigation process, starting from the point where the issue is most likely to happen:
1. Are the plates well cleaned?
1. Are the plates cleaned properly?
2. Is the iodine dry? If the impressions come out blue, you may rest assured it is not. Take out the iodine, wipe and dry the box, and dry the calcium.
2. Is the iodine dry? If the impressions turn blue, you can be sure it's not. Remove the iodine, wipe and dry the box, and dry the calcium.
3. Is the quick battery of the right strength? If dry, it must change the plate in from six to fifteen seconds. If any of the chloride of iodine class, it may vary from five seconds to a minute. Begin by coating light, and increase on each trial, observing the effect. If the light side of the picture seems loth to come out, and shows no contrast with the dark side, it is to be inferred that your battery is too strong, and must be reduced with water or set out in the open air for a few minutes, with the lid off. If working an old battery, never renew very strong, or it will work dark and heavy. A battery, to work well, should be gradually losing strength, but never gaining. An old battery, however, may be quickened up and made to work well for some time, by adding five of six drops of sulphuric acid, repeating the quantity as often as necessary, providing always that acid be not used in manufacturing the quick.
3. Is the quick battery the right strength? If it's dry, it should change the plate in six to fifteen seconds. If it's one of the chloride of iodine types, it can take anywhere from five seconds to a minute. Start by applying a light coat, then gradually increase it with each attempt, paying attention to the results. If the lighter side of the picture struggles to emerge and shows no contrast with the darker side, it suggests that your battery is too strong and needs to be diluted with water or exposed to the open air for a few minutes, with the lid off. When using an old battery, avoid renewing it too strongly, or it will produce a dark and heavy result. For a battery to function well, it should steadily lose strength over time, never gain it. However, an old battery can be revitalized and made to work effectively for a period by adding five or six drops of sulfuric acid, repeating this as needed, as long as acid isn’t used in making the quick.
4. Have the plates lost their sensitiveness by being many times exposed to mercury? Clean and burn them; but if French plates, burn light, or you spoil them.
4. Have the plates lost their sensitivity after being exposed to mercury multiple times? Clean and heat them, but if they’re French plates, heat them lightly, or you'll ruin them.
5. Are the buff s dry and clean? Examine the plate critically after buffing to detect any appearance of scum or film on the surface. If so, the longer you buff the more it shows. Scrape and dry the buffs thoroughly.
5. Are the buffs dry and clean? Carefully check the plate after buffing for any signs of scum or film on the surface. If you notice any, the more you buff, the more it will be visible. Scrape and dry the buffs completely.
6. Is the mercury free from scum and dirt? If not, filter. Is it also far enough from the coating boxes? Should be at least three feet, and kept covered.
6. Is the mercury clean and free of scum and dirt? If not, filter it. Is it also far enough away from the coating boxes? It should be at least three feet away and kept covered.
7. Is the mercury sufficiently heated? This is important. Long exposure, however, will answer the same purpose.
7. Is the mercury heated enough? This is important. Prolonged exposure, however, will achieve the same result.
8. Are your lenses clean, and in proper place?
8. Are your lenses clean and in the right position?
9. Are the tablets in focus with the ground-glass? If you can attribute the failure to none of these, mix a new box of some other kind of quick, say the dry, for instance. If you fail in the same manner here, take time, wash your buffs, overhaul all the chemicals, and start anew. Do not be discouraged.
9. Are the tablets aligned with the ground-glass? If you can't blame any of these, mix a new batch of a different quick, like the dry one, for example. If you still have the same problem, take a break, clean your buffs, check all the chemicals, and start fresh. Don't get discouraged.
There is no day so dark but that the sun will shine again. We will close with this brief summary of advice:
There is no day so dark that the sun won’t shine again. We'll wrap up with this quick summary of advice:
Clean your plates. Keep everything dry. Keep the mercury hot. Follow these instructions carefully, and you must succeed.
Clean your plates. Keep everything dry. Keep the mercury hot. Follow these instructions closely, and you'll succeed.
HINTS AND CAUTIONS.
First of all, cleanliness should be observed. When there is dust or dirt about your room, particularly about the work-bench, failures will be frequent; for the smallest particles of rotten-stone, when allowed to come in contact with the buffs, will produce scratches on the surface of the plate, which very much injures the operation, and often causes failures.
First of all, you should keep things clean. If there's dust or dirt in your room, especially around the workbench, you'll often encounter problems. Even tiny bits of rotten-stone can scratch the surface of the plate when they come into contact with the buffs, which seriously affects the process and can lead to failures.
Dust flying about the room is injurious, if allowed to fall on the plate, either before or after it has been coated, as it causes black spots which cannot be removed.
Dust flying around the room is harmful if it lands on the plate, whether before or after it’s been coated, because it creates black spots that can’t be removed.
The polished plate should not be allowed to come in contact with a strong current of air, for it tends to oxidize the surface. Breathing on the surface should also be avoided, for the same reason.
The polished plate shouldn’t be exposed to a strong airflow, as it can cause the surface to oxidize. Additionally, avoid breathing on the surface for the same reason.
The plate should, in all cases, be buffed immediately before using, and not allowed to stand any length of time. It should be held with the polished face downward.
The plate should always be buffed right before use and not left to sit for a long time. It should be held with the polished side facing down.
It is always best that the plate should be of the same temperature of the atmosphere in the room.
It’s always best for the plate to be the same temperature as the room.
Keep the camera and mercury-bath perfectly free from the vapors of iodine and bromine; for the presence of the slightest degree of either of the above will injure the impression in no small degree. As a preventive, let the camera be exposed to the sun or fire for a few minutes in the morning.
Keep the camera and mercury bath completely free from the vapors of iodine and bromine; even the smallest amount of either will seriously damage the image. To prevent this, allow the camera to be exposed to sunlight or heat for a few minutes in the morning.
Filter your mercury often, to keep the surface free from film and dust.
Filter your mercury regularly to keep the surface clear of film and dust.
The hyposulphite solution should be filtered through sponge every time it is used.
The hyposulphite solution should be filtered through a sponge every time it’s used.
The direct rays of light must not enter the camera in conjunction with those reflected from the object; or the picture will be veiled, and the color of the plate changed to a thick green.
The direct rays of light shouldn't enter the camera along with those reflected from the object; otherwise, the image will be obscured, and the plate will turn a deep green.
If the plate be iodized only to a light-yellow, the result might be of a bluish or grey tinge: and this is generally the case, when the quick is new and strong, and there is an excess of it on the plate, and yet not enough to form the bromide iodide of silver; in which case it would wholly spoil the impression.
If the plate is iodized just to a light yellow, the result might have a bluish or gray tint: this usually happens when the mercury is new and strong, and there's too much of it on the plate, but not enough to form the bromide iodide of silver; in that situation, it would completely ruin the impression.
Your iodine will be found to operate more successfully, when the time required for coating the plate does not fall short of fifteen seconds, or exceed one minute.
Your iodine will work better when the time needed to coat the plate is at least fifteen seconds and no more than one minute.
Too quick coating can be avoided by using less iodine in your box. In the summer months, when the weather is 80 deg. and over, one quarter of an ounce, or even less, will work to advantage.
Too quick coating can be avoided by using less iodine in your container. In the summer months, when the temperature is 80 degrees and above, a quarter of an ounce, or even less, will be beneficial.
ELECTROTYPING.
I am indebted to Mr. J. H. Fitzgibbons for the following process, which he employed in producing the excellent specimens he exhibited at the Crystal Palace:
I owe a debt of gratitude to Mr. J. H. Fitzgibbons for the following process that he used to create the outstanding specimens he displayed at the Crystal Palace:
“I shall endeavor to lay down in as comprehensive a manner as possible the method by which I have been enabled to produce the most satisfactory results. I use a Smee’s battery (another kind will do). After filling the cell, of common size, nearly full with water; add about quarter of an ounce of sulphuric acid. Mix this well, and let it stand for about three hours, or until the action of the battery becomes weak, when it is in order to work with a very uniform action. Put one pound of sulphate of copper in one quart of water; stir it until the sulphate of copper is all dissolved, and then add one half ounce of sulphuric acid and a quarter of an ounce of nitric acid. This solution, well mixed, should be filtered, and it is ready for use. It is very important that the solution should be kept clean, clear, and free from all foreign substance. The above quantity of this solution will be found sufficient for electrotyping a dozen of the sixth-size plates. When it is required to be strengthened, it is only necessary to add a little of the sulphate of copper.
“I will try to explain as thoroughly as possible the method I've used to achieve the best results. I use a Smee's battery (another type will work too). Fill a standard-sized cell nearly to the top with water, then add about a quarter ounce of sulfuric acid. Mix it well and let it sit for about three hours, or until the battery’s action weakens, as this ensures a very consistent operation. Mix one pound of copper sulfate in one quart of water; stir until the copper sulfate is completely dissolved, then add half an ounce of sulfuric acid and a quarter ounce of nitric acid. This solution, when well mixed, should be filtered and it will be ready to use. It’s crucial that the solution remains clean, clear, and free from any impurities. The amount of this solution mentioned above should be enough for electrotyping a dozen plates of sixth size. If it needs to be strengthened, just add a bit more copper sulfate.”
“With the battery prepared as above, and the solution of sulphate of copper in a vessel of proper dimensions to receive your plate, connect the galvanic current, and immerse the impressioned plate, letting it remain until a thin film of copper has been formed, then the battery can be strengthened, and the impression will be of sufficient thickness to be removed in from eight to twelve hours. An old Daguerreotype plate attached to the opposite pole of the battery (copper side towards the face of the plate to be electrotyped), will answer the same purpose as the silver-plate.
“With the battery set up as described, and the copper sulfate solution in a container that's the right size for your plate, connect the galvanic current and dip the prepared plate into the solution. Leave it there until a thin layer of copper forms. Then, you can boost the battery, and the layer will be thick enough to remove in about eight to twelve hours. An old Daguerreotype plate connected to the opposite pole of the battery (with the copper side facing the plate being electrotyped) will work just as well as the silver plate.”
“The great difficulty in taking an electrotype impression, and preserving the original, has been attributed to the battery being too powerful. I am led to believe from practice that the principal difficulty has been in the Daguerreotype plate itself, for if we use an impression that has been taken but a few days, and taken in the usual way, we will find it difficult to succeed without spoiling both the copy and original, and so also with an old impression.
“The main challenge in creating an electrotype impression while keeping the original intact has been thought to be due to the battery's strength. From my experience, I believe the key issue lies with the Daguerreotype plate itself. If we use an impression that's only a few days old and was made in the usual manner, it will be hard to succeed without damaging both the copy and the original. The same issue applies to older impressions.”
“I have found the most certain method to be as follows:—Coat the Daguerreotype plate as usual, except use less of the accelerators, the proportion of iodine coating being greater, of course the time of exposure in the camera will be lengthened. Mercurialize it at about a temperature requiring to develop the image, from six to eight minutes, at least. Gilding the Daguerreotype has much to do towards producing a good electrotype copy. This should be done by applying a little heat, and gilding very slowly, giving a coating of gold with the greatest possible uniformity. By this method, I have been enabled to produce any number of proofs. I have produced a dozen from one impression, and it remains as perfect as when first taken.
“I have found the most reliable method to be as follows: Coat the Daguerreotype plate as usual, but use less of the accelerators, so the proportion of iodine coating will be greater. Naturally, this means the exposure time in the camera will be longer. Develop it in mercury for about six to eight minutes, depending on the temperature needed to develop the image. Gilding the Daguerreotype is crucial for creating a good electrotype copy. This should be done by applying a little heat and gilding very slowly, ensuring a uniform coating of gold. With this method, I've been able to produce any number of proofs. I've made a dozen from one impression, and it stays just as perfect as when it was first taken."
“By a little judgment and care the operator will be enabled to produce the electrotype copy of the Daguerreotype plate without any difficulty. The electrotype copy should be immediately put under a glass and sealed in the same manner as the ordinary Daguerreotype.”
“By using a bit of judgment and care, the operator will be able to create an electrotype copy of the Daguerreotype plate without any trouble. The electrotype copy should be placed under glass right away and sealed just like a regular Daguerreotype.”
CRAYON DAGUERREOTYPES.
This process is patented in the United States, by J. A. Whipple, of Boston, and of course no honorable person will use it for his own benefit without purchasing a right.
This process is patented in the United States by J. A. Whipple of Boston, and of course, no honorable person will use it for personal gain without purchasing the rights.
A white back-ground is generally employed, the object being to blur the lower portion of the plate, leaving the head of the subject in relief. Every Daguerreotypist is familiar with the fact that a motion of any body between the camera and the sitter will cause a “blur.” Cut a piece of thin paper and scallop it, making a semicircle. This is kept straight by means of a wire frame, and it is to be moved in front of the lower part of the body of the sitter during the time of exposure of the plate in the camera. Develop over mercury as usual, and the result will be a crayon Daguerreotype.
A white background is usually used to blur the lower part of the image, leaving the subject's head sharp. Every daguerreotypist knows that any movement between the camera and the person being photographed will cause a "blur." Cut a piece of thin paper into a scalloped semicircle. This is held straight with a wire frame and is moved in front of the lower part of the sitter during the exposure of the plate in the camera. Develop using mercury as usual, and the result will be a crayon daguerreotype.
Another method is to have a wheel with a hole cut through it of a diameter of about 12 inches. This hole is so cut as to leave teeth resembling those of a large saw. This wheel is so arranged that it can be turned around, which should be done during the time of exposure in the camera. It must be placed between the camera and the sitter, and at such a distance from the camera as to allow such proportion of the body of the sitter be seen upon the ground-glass as is desired. It will be readily seen that by turning this wheel during the operation will produce the same result as the paper being moved in the other method. The teeth make the “blur.” The side of the wheel towards the camera may be black, by which means the result will be a dark instead of a light border.
Another method is to use a wheel with a hole cut in it that’s about 12 inches in diameter. The hole is shaped to leave teeth like those of a large saw. This wheel is designed to rotate, and it should be turned while the camera is exposing the image. It needs to be positioned between the camera and the sitter, at a distance that allows the desired portion of the sitter’s body to be visible on the ground-glass. It's clear that rotating this wheel during the process will achieve the same effect as moving the paper in the other method. The teeth create the “blur.” The side of the wheel facing the camera can be black, resulting in a dark border rather than a light one.
ILLUMINATED DAGUERREOTYPES.
This process is also patented, and the remarks on the preceding subject will apply in this case. The plate is prepared and exposed as in the usual method of the Daguerreotype. A white back-ground is employed. Let the head of the sitter come in the middle of the plate, and before exposing it to the vapors of mercury, put a small mat or diaphragm, having a small hole through it, over or directly on the surface of the plate. This diaphragm should be bevelled, and the bevel should be towards the surface of the plate; this, in order to prevent too sharp a line on the impression. It will be readily seen that if an impressioned plate so covered is placed over the mercury, it will be developed on such portions only as are exposed. The principle is so familiar that further explanations are unnecessary.
This process is also patented, and the comments on the previous topic will apply here as well. The plate is prepared and exposed just like in the standard method of the Daguerreotype. A white background is used. Position the sitter’s head in the center of the plate, and before exposing it to the mercury vapors, place a small mat or diaphragm with a small hole in it directly on the surface of the plate. This diaphragm should be beveled, with the bevel facing the surface of the plate to avoid creating too sharp of a line in the impression. It will be clear that if a covered plate is placed over the mercury, only the areas that are exposed will be developed. The principle is so well-known that no further explanations are needed.
NATURAL COLORS IN HELIOGRAPHY.
This subject is worthy the attention of every operator. The following process is so plain and easy of trial that any Daguerreotypist can try it. This is as given by Mr. James Campbell, and was published in Humphrey’s Journal of the Daguerreotype and Photographic Arts, vol. 5, page 11. Mr. Campbell has done much to further the process announced by M. Neipce, and his experiments have proved highly successful.
This topic deserves the attention of every operator. The following process is so straightforward and easy to test that any Daguerreotypist can try it. This information comes from Mr. James Campbell and was published in Humphrey’s Journal of the Daguerreotype and Photographic Arts, vol. 5, page 11. Mr. Campbell has contributed greatly to the method introduced by M. Neipce, and his experiments have been very successful.
The following is submitted as worthy of trial:
The following is offered for consideration:
“The proper preparation of the chloridated plate, to enable it to receive colored impressions is an object of the first importance to those wishing to experiment on it, and consequently requires particular notice. The plate may be prepared by making it the positive pole of a battery, and letting it at the same time be immersed in chlorine water. The negative pole should be a slip of platinum. All the colors may be produced from a plate so prepared if the chlorine and water are in the right proportions; but generally one color or the other predominates, according to the amount of chlorine in the liquid. By adding the chlorides of strontian, uranium, potassium, sodium, iron, or copper to the liquid, various effects may be produced, and these bodies will be found to produce the same color on the plate that their flame gives to alcohol.
“The proper preparation of the chlorinated plate to allow it to capture colored impressions is very important for anyone wanting to experiment with it, and therefore needs special attention. The plate can be prepared by making it the positive pole of a battery while also immersing it in chlorine water. The negative pole should be a piece of platinum. All colors can be produced from a plate prepared this way if the chlorine and water are in the correct proportions; however, usually one color will dominate based on the amount of chlorine in the liquid. By adding the chlorides of strontium, uranium, potassium, sodium, iron, or copper to the liquid, various effects can be achieved, and these substances will produce the same color on the plate that their flames give to alcohol.”
“The honor of this discovery is due to M. Neipce. Copper gives a variegated flame; hence many colors may be impressed on a plate prepared with a solution of its chloride.
“The credit for this discovery goes to M. Neipce. Copper produces a colorful flame; therefore, many colors can be transferred to a plate treated with a solution of its chloride.”
“M. Neipce recommends a solution of the mixed chlorides of copper and iron, and it is with these, that I have been most successful. As the chlorides of copper and iron are not much used in the arts, they are not generally found for sale in the shops; and it may be well to furnish those not much versed in chemistry with an easy method of preparing them.
“M. Neipce suggests a solution made from mixed chlorides of copper and iron, and I've had the best results with those. Since copper and iron chlorides aren't commonly used in industry, they're not usually available in stores; so it could be helpful to provide a simple method for those who aren't very familiar with chemistry to make them.”
“They may be made directly from either metal by dissolving it in hydrochloric acid; but they may be formed by a cheaper method, and by which also the acid fumes are avoided.
“They can be made directly from metal by dissolving it in hydrochloric acid; however, there’s a cheaper method that also avoids the acid fumes.”
“Sulphate of iron or copper, or both together, may be dissolved in water and then neutralized with common crude potash, or its carbonate or bicarbonate—known commonly as pearl ash and saleratus. If either of the latter be used, there will be formed sulphate of potash and a carbonate of the metal used, and there will also be a considerable effervescence of carbonic acid, which will, if care is not taken, cause the mixture to run over the vessel. After the copper or iron salt is neutralized, which is known by its ceasing to effervesce, the carbonate of the metal will settle slowly, and will at first nearly fill the vessel. The supernatant fluid, which is sulphate of potash in solution, may now be carefully poured off, and its place filled with water; this operation should be repeated several times until the water which passes off is tasteless. The carbonate of the metal rapidly changes to an oxide by contact with the air, and it will generally be found, when it is sufficiently washed, that it is at least half oxide. On adding hydrochloric acid cautiously to the mixture, a chloric of the metal will be formed, and carbonic acid will be evolved from the remaining carbonate. The chloride formed is soluble; but as there are two chlorides of these metals, and we wish to produce the one which contains the most chlorine, it is best to add the acid cautiously until the solution is decidedly acid. After filtering the solution, it is fit for use; and it should be preserved in well-stoppered bottles. The water used should be rain or distilled water.
“Sulphate of iron or copper, or both, can be dissolved in water and then neutralized with regular crude potash or its carbonate or bicarbonate—commonly known as pearl ash and baking soda. If either of the latter is used, sulphate of potash and a carbonate of the metal will form, and there will be a significant effervescence of carbonic acid, which, if not handled carefully, can cause the mixture to overflow the container. Once the copper or iron salt is neutralized, indicated by the lack of effervescence, the carbonate of the metal will settle slowly and will initially nearly fill the vessel. The liquid on top, which is sulphate of potash in solution, can now be carefully poured off, and the space filled with water; this process should be repeated several times until the water that drains off is tasteless. The carbonate of the metal quickly changes to an oxide when exposed to air, and it will generally be found that when sufficiently washed, it is at least half oxide. By cautiously adding hydrochloric acid to the mixture, a chloride of the metal will form, and carbonic acid will be released from the remaining carbonate. The resulting chloride is soluble; however, since there are two chlorides of these metals, and we want to produce the one that contains the most chlorine, it's best to add the acid gradually until the solution is definitely acidic. After filtering the solution, it is ready for use, and it should be stored in well-stoppered bottles. The water used should be rainwater or distilled water.”
“About one part of the mixed chlorides should be used to three or four of water.
“Use about one part of the mixed chlorides to three or four parts of water.
“The battery may be either Smee’s, Daniell’s, or Grove’s; if of either of the former, it should be of two series; if of the latter, one cup is sufficient.
“The battery can be either Smee’s, Daniell’s, or Grove’s; if it’s one of the first two, it should have two series; if it’s the last one, one cup is enough.”
“The plate on being immersed in the liquid, almost instantly takes a violet color. It should be allowed to remain from two to five minutes, according to the strength of the battery, and until it becomes nearly black. It should now be carefully washed, and afterwards heated over a spirit lamp until it takes a cherry-red color, and it is then ready for exposure in the camera. Before speaking of exposing the plate, it may be well to speak of some difficulties which the inexperienced operator may find in preparing it. If the battery is not in good order, and a sufficient current is not passed through the solution, the plate will become coated—and apparently almost as well as when the battery is working well—but on exposure it will give a negative picture, and but little colored; while if the battery is in good order, the impression is invariably positive.
“The plate, when immersed in the liquid, quickly turns a violet color. It should stay in the solution for two to five minutes, depending on the battery's strength, until it becomes almost black. After that, it needs to be carefully washed and then heated over a spirit lamp until it turns cherry-red; at this point, it’s ready for exposure in the camera. Before discussing how to expose the plate, it’s important to address some challenges that inexperienced operators might encounter while preparing it. If the battery isn't functioning properly and not enough current is flowing through the solution, the plate will get coated—seemingly just as well as if the battery is working correctly—but when exposed, it will result in a negative image with limited color; whereas, if the battery is functioning properly, the impression will always be positive.”
“Sometimes on heating the plate after washing, the surface is covered with spots or assumes a variegated appearance. This indicates that the solution is impure, or that the plate have not been thoroughly washed and are still contaminated with the soluble chlorides which are contained in the solution.
“Sometimes when you heat the plate after washing it, the surface gets spots or looks uneven. This means that the solution is impure, or that the plate hasn’t been completely cleaned and still has some soluble chlorides from the solution on it.”
“From the fact that the plate if prepared with positive electricity gives a positive picture, while it prepared otherwise it gives a negative, it is evident that electricity plays an important part in this process. The same is true to some extent with the compounds formed with iodine, bromine, and fluorine.
“From the fact that when the plate is prepared with positive electricity it produces a positive image, while if prepared differently it produces a negative one, it is clear that electricity plays a significant role in this process. The same is somewhat true for the compounds formed with iodine, bromine, and fluorine.”
“On heating the plate, the brown coating of chloride melts into a translucent enamel, and the heat should be withdrawn when a cherry-red color is produced. It the heat is continued longer, the plate assumes a lighter color, and becomes less sensitive; and the enamel will finally scale off. To produce a picture by the ordinary process of M. Neipce, unaccelerated, it should be exposed for from three to five hours to sunlight in the camera, though pictures may be procured by contact, in from fifteen to thirty minutes.”
“When you heat the plate, the brown chloride coating melts into a clear enamel, and you should remove the heat once it turns a cherry-red color. If you keep the heat on longer, the plate will lighten in color and become less sensitive; eventually, the enamel will start to chip off. To create an image using M. Neipce's standard method without acceleration, it should be exposed to sunlight in the camera for about three to five hours, although you can get images by contact in just fifteen to thirty minutes.”
MULTIPLYING DAGUERREOTYPES ON ONE PLATE.
I have produced some interesting specimens of the Daguerreotypic art, by exposing in the camera only a portion of the sensitive plate to the action of light. When on the exposed portion an image is formed, then taking the tablet into the dark room, change ends and expose the sensitive portion, and produce another image, developing as usual. This plan is adapted for taking likenesses for lockets. Two images can be presented as sitting side by side, by covering half the plate with black paper, and exposing as before. In this manner we have been enabled to surprise persons by exhibiting their portrait on the same plate with a stranger’s. Daguerreotypists must be cautious in practicing this, as it might not be agreeable to the parties whose likenesses are together, by the above process. It is impossible to produce an impression without a line being seen where the edge of the paper prevented the operation of the light.
I’ve created some fascinating examples of the Daguerreotype method by only exposing part of the sensitive plate to light. When an image appears on the exposed section, I take the plate into a dark room, flip it, and expose the sensitive part again to create another image, then develop it as usual. This technique is perfect for capturing likenesses for lockets. Two images can be displayed side by side by covering half the plate with black paper and exposing it again, just like before. This way, we can surprise people by showing their portrait alongside that of a stranger on the same plate. Daguerreotypists need to be careful when doing this, as it might not sit well with those whose likenesses are combined in this manner. It's impossible to create an impression without a line appearing where the edge of the paper blocked the light.
I have recently seen a fine specimen produced by another plan, which far exceeds the above, there being no line, or any peculiarity denoting two exposures. The specimen referred to, was a gentleman represented on one plate by two full length portraits. This was produced by using a black velvet for the background. The plate was exposed sufficient time to produce one impression, and then the gentleman assumed another position, and is repeated as looking at himself. From the fact that the time required to develop black velvet being so much longer than that for producing a portrait, we are enabled to produce the above interesting results.
I recently came across an impressive example created using a different method, which far surpasses the one mentioned above, as there’s no line or any indication of two exposures. The example in question features a gentleman captured on one plate with two full-length portraits. This was achieved by using black velvet as the background. The plate was exposed long enough to create one impression, and then the gentleman changed his position and was captured again, as if he's looking at himself. Because developing black velvet takes much longer than creating a portrait, we can achieve these intriguing results.
DEPOSIT IN GILDING.
Regarding specks from bad water, I would remark that gilding should be made only with distilled water. Thus made, it produces very little deposit, even by long keeping. It therefore preserves its original strength, and works with great uniformity.
Regarding specks from bad water, I would say that gilding should only be done with distilled water. When done this way, it creates very little residue, even after being stored for a long time. Thus, it maintains its original strength and works very consistently.
Every grain of deposit contains at least 7-10 its weight of gold, easily discoverable by the blowpipe. Such gilding is continually deteriorating, which with good chloride and distilled water may be prevented. Distilled water should also be used for the hyposulphite. and for cleaning plates. Any good, clear water may be afterwards used for washing off, with equally good results. I am very rarely troubled with specs, and deem this as the main reason.
Every grain of deposit contains at least 7-10 times its weight in gold, which can be easily found using a blowpipe. This gilding keeps deteriorating, but good chloride and distilled water can help prevent that. Distilled water should also be used for the hyposulphite and for cleaning plates. Any good, clear water can be used afterwards for rinsing, yielding similar results. I rarely have issues with specs, and I believe that's the main reason.
With a portable still attached to a cooking stove, I obtain half a gallon of water per hour, and with very little trouble. A small tin retort or still connected with a Leibig’s condenser, would not add much to the “traps” of the travelling operator, and save him many a disreputable specimen.—T. J. BAILEY.—Humphrey’s Journal.
With a portable still connected to a stove, I can collect half a gallon of water per hour with minimal effort. A small tin retort or still linked to a Liebig condenser wouldn’t take up much space for a traveling operator and would help them avoid many questionable specimens.—T. J. BAILEY.—Humphrey’s Journal.
PRACTICAL HINTS ON THE DAGUERREOTYPE.
The following is from Humphrey’s Journal, vol. 5, and from the pen of Dr. WM. HARRINGTON, one of the most able writers upon the subject of the Daguerreotype in this country:
The following is from Humphrey’s Journal, vol. 5, and from the pen of Dr. WM. HARRINGTON, one of the most skilled writers on the subject of the Daguerreotype in this country:
THE CAUSE OF THE DIFFICULTY THAT SOMETIMES OCCURS TO PREVENT THE PRODUCTION OF A CLEAR IMPRESSION UPON A DAGUERREOTYPE PLATE.
Beyond all doubt this is traceable to dampness. Truly this is not a new thought; but where does this dampness come from? How does it originate, and where is it located? Generally it has been referred to a point entirely remote from its real location.
Beyond all doubt, this is due to dampness. This isn’t a new idea; but where does this dampness come from? How does it start, and where is it found? Usually, it has been linked to a place far removed from its actual source.
This dampness exists particularly upon the surface of the plate; is obviously derived immediately from the atmosphere; and is owing to a certain relative temperature of the plate with the hygrometric condition of the atmosphere.
This dampness is especially noticeable on the surface of the plate; it clearly comes directly from the atmosphere; and it results from the specific temperature of the plate in relation to the humidity in the air.
Whenever this relation exists between the plate and atmosphere, a precipitation of moisture takes place upon the surface of the plate, which render all efforts at polishing impracticable. This interference is not confined to the buffing operation alone, but sometimes is discoverable even in the ordinary process of scouring. Every one at all experienced in this art will remember that it is not always an easy matter for him, by scouring, to bring his plate to the desired lustre. All his efforts become unavailing; the more he rubs, the duller the surface of his plate appears; and although he renews his cotton repeatedly, still he is obliged to content himself with an unsatisfactory finish.
Whenever there’s a relationship between the plate and the atmosphere, moisture condenses on the surface of the plate, making it impossible to polish. This problem isn’t limited to just buffing but can also be seen during the regular scouring process. Anyone with experience in this craft knows that it’s not always easy to achieve the desired shine through scouring. All efforts can become futile; the more he rubs, the duller the plate seems, and even if he changes his cotton repeatedly, he still has to settle for a finish that doesn't meet his expectations.
This relative condition is not confined to any particular season of the year, nor to any certain thermometric temperature; but may occur in summer as well as in winter; the weather being warm or cold, wet or dry, clear or cloudy, raining or shining. Under any of these circumstances, if the relation of the plate and atmosphere be such as to invite upon the plate a precipitation of humidity from the atmosphere, the prospect of producing a clear impression is quite problematical.
This situation isn’t limited to any specific season or temperature; it can happen in both summer and winter, whether it’s warm or cold, wet or dry, clear or cloudy, raining or sunny. In any of these conditions, if the relationship between the plate and the atmosphere encourages moisture to settle on the plate, the chances of getting a clear impression are pretty uncertain.
It is reasonable to expect this occurrence from the fact that metal is a good radiator, and radiation reduces the temperature of a metallic body below that of the atmosphere. Consequently, if this relative condition happens, the result will be as I have stated.
It makes sense to expect this happening because metal is a good radiator, and radiation lowers the temperature of a metal object below that of the surrounding air. So, if this situation occurs, the outcome will be as I've mentioned.
Bodies may be colder than the atmosphere and yet derive no moisture from it; while at the same time the driest atmosphere is not devoid of moisture, but will part with it under certain conditions.
Bodies can be colder than the surrounding air and still not absorb any moisture from it; meanwhile, the driest air isn’t completely free of moisture but will release it under specific conditions.
Assuming for granted that this relative condition between the plate and atmosphere, disposing the former to receive the humidity of the latter, constitutes the great obstacle the operator has to contend with in producing, a clear proof upon the plate, the remedy naturally suggests itself, and is very simple. It consists in merely heating the plate above the temperature of the atmosphere, previous to polishing, and retaining that temperature during the operation. Various measures might be devised to effect the desired object; one of which consists of a sheet-iron box, heated from the inside by a spirit-lamp, upon the top of which are to be kept the plates ready to undergo the process of being polished; the blocks of the swing or any other vice; or the iron bed belonging to Lewis’s vice.
Assuming that the relationship between the plate and the atmosphere, which allows the plate to absorb humidity from the air, is the main challenge the operator faces in producing a clear image on the plate, a straightforward solution comes to mind. It simply involves heating the plate above the atmospheric temperature before polishing it and maintaining that temperature during the process. Various methods can be implemented to achieve this goal; one option is to use a sheet-iron box heated from within by a spirit lamp, on which the plates that are about to be polished can be placed, along with the blocks of the swing or any other vice, or the iron bed that belongs to Lewis’s vice.
In cold weather, when it is necessary to keep a fire in the preparation room, all of the above may be so arranged in the vicinity of the fire as to receive the requisite degree of heat for the purpose specified.
In cold weather, when it’s important to keep a fire in the preparation room, everything mentioned above can be arranged near the fire to get the necessary amount of heat for the intended purpose.
This part of the subject, however, is left entirely for the ingenuity of the operator. No matter by hat means he accomplishes the object; all that is required is to heat the plate above the temperature of the atmosphere and retain that heat during the process of polishing.
This part of the topic, however, is completely up to the creativity of the operator. It doesn't matter how they achieve the goal; all that's needed is to heat the plate above the ambient temperature and keep that heat during the polishing process.
Since the adoption of this method, in connection with my partner, T. J. Dobyns, even in this humid climate of ours, when everything in the room is dripping with moisture, it has been attended with invariable success.
Since we started using this method, along with my partner, T. J. Dobyns, even in our humid climate where everything in the room feels wet, it has consistently been successful.
CHOICE OF PLATES, ETC.
In the great catalogue of complaints made by operators, none is more common than that alleged against the quality of plates in general use. Although the greatest diversity of opinion exists upon this subject, nevertheless the plates of every manufactory share in this universal condemnation.
In the extensive list of complaints from operators, none is more frequent than the one regarding the quality of commonly used plates. While there's a wide range of opinions on this issue, the plates from every manufacturer are all affected by this general criticism.
To be sure it cannot be denied but that this necessary article of utility in the photographic art has undergone a sad deterioration in quality owing to the increasing demand and great reduction in price—the plates of the present day being by no means so heavily coated with silver as formerly—but the complaint alluded to is not predicated so much upon the thinness of silver as upon a mysterious something which has conferred upon the plates the epithet of not good.
It can't be denied that this essential item in photography has sadly declined in quality because of the rising demand and significant drop in price. Today's plates are definitely not as heavily coated with silver as they used to be. However, the issue isn't just about the reduced silver thickness; it's more about some mysterious quality that has led people to label the plates as not good.
That this complaint is in a great measure groundless appears evident from the fact that while, with the same brand of plates one operator can work successfully, another encounters the greatest difficulty; while one is able to produce beautifully clear and altogether satisfactory results, the other labors under the troublesome annoyance of innumerable specks, large dark insensitive patches and brown map-like portions, together with divers other blemishes, sufficient to prevent him from obtaining anything like a tolerable impression.
That this complaint is largely unfounded is clear from the fact that while one operator can successfully use the same brand of plates, another struggles significantly; one produces beautifully clear and completely satisfactory results, while the other faces the frustrating issue of countless specks, large dark insensitive patches, and brown map-like areas, along with various other flaws, enough to prevent them from achieving even a decent impression.
From this wide difference in the results of the two operators using identically the same article, it is but reasonable to conclude that the complaint is founded in error; while the inference is no more than just, that the fault may be traced to a want of practical skill on the part of the complaining operator himself; rather than to the inferior quality of the plates.
From this significant difference in the results of the two operators using the exact same material, it makes sense to conclude that the complaint is based on a mistake; and it’s fair to assume that the issue may stem from a lack of practical skill on the part of the complaining operator himself, rather than the poor quality of the plates.
The question, then, whether the plates are unfit for use, or whether those who pronounce them so understand how to use them, appears to be satisfactorily answered. It therefore becomes a matter worthy of investigation, to ascertain what superior judgment and skill one operator possesses over another which enable him to work successfully a quality of plate, pronounced by the other entirely useless.
The question now is whether the plates are actually unusable, or if those calling them so just don't know how to use them properly. This seems to be answered satisfactorily. Therefore, it’s worth investigating what skills and judgment one operator has over another that allow him to successfully use a type of plate that the other considers completely useless.
Suppose we make a critical examination of one of the repudiated plates. From its external appearance we have little hesitation in pronouncing it to be French; indeed, this presumption is strongly corroborated by the fact that it is ornamented upon one of its corners with a brand to designate the manufactory from which it emanated.
Suppose we take a closer look at one of the rejected plates. From its outward look, we can confidently say it’s French; in fact, this assumption is strongly supported by the fact that it has a mark in one corner indicating the factory where it was made.
Upon close inspection we cannot fail to notice a striking peculiarity upon the surface; the roughness is very remarkable; the planishing hammer has left amazingly visible indications of its busy work. One would suppose the manufacturer intended the surface of the plate to represent the undulations of the sea, instead of that smooth and level character so strongly recommended by M. Daguerre.
Upon closer look, we can't help but notice a striking oddity on the surface; the roughness is quite noticeable; the planishing hammer has left very clear signs of its constant activity. One might think the manufacturer aimed for the surface of the plate to mimic the waves of the ocean, rather than the smooth and even finish strongly suggested by M. Daguerre.
Such a plate necessarily requires at the hand of the operator considerable labor before the surface is in a proper condition to receive a suitable polish from the buffer. The least reflection in the world should teach any one that so long as the undulatory character continues upon the surface of the plate, it is in a very imperfect condition for buffing, because the buffer cannot touch every point equally; the elevated portions alone receiving a high degree of polish while the depressed portion, from their roughness acting as nuclei, gather dust, rouge, and other foreign bodies, so detrimental to sensitiveness. The secret of the superior judgment and skill of one operator over another, is intimately connected with this point: his success depends very much upon the first process of cleaning the plate.
A plate like this requires a lot of work from the operator before its surface is ready for a proper polish from the buffer. The slightest reflection should make it clear that as long as the surface of the plate remains uneven, it’s not in good shape for buffing. The buffer can't reach every spot equally; only the raised areas get polished well, while the lower areas, because of their roughness, trap dust, rouge, and other foreign particles, which can really affect sensitivity. The difference in skill and judgment between operators is closely tied to this issue: their success largely hinges on how well they clean the plate in the first step.
Let us examine the manipulation of the complaining operator. He takes one of these plates and gives it a careful scouring with rotten-stone and alcohol or any other liquid preferred for this part of the operation—that is, he gives it what he terms a careful scouring—very gently indeed because, from the frequent trials he is in the habit of making in the camera, he fears he will rub the silver entirely away before he succeeds in obtaining a good impression. The dark patches, specks, and granular appearance resulting entirely from the unevenness of the surface of the plate, look like copper to him, and he is surprised that he should have rubbed away the silver so soon, particularly by such delicate handling.
Let’s look at how the complaining operator manipulates the plate. He picks one of the plates and carefully cleans it with rotten stone and alcohol or any other liquid he prefers for this step—that is, he gives it what he calls a careful cleaning—very gently, indeed, because from the many tests he regularly does in the camera, he worries that he will completely rub off the silver before he manages to get a good image. The dark spots, specks, and grainy texture that come from the uneven surface of the plate look like copper to him, and he’s surprised that he has worn away the silver so quickly, especially with such gentle handling.
The judgment and experience of the successful operator, however, teach him that scouring injures a plate less than buffing. He knows that unless the hammer marks be obliterated, he cannot by the buffer produce a surface of uniform polish and sensitiveness, without which a fair proof is extremely doubtful; he knows that the time employed in the preliminary operation of cleaning the plate properly is economy.
The judgment and experience of a successful operator, however, teach them that scouring damages a plate less than buffing does. They understand that unless the hammer marks are removed, they can't achieve a consistently polished and sensitive surface with the buffer, which is essential for a decent proof to be likely; they know that the time spent on properly cleaning the plate initially is a smart investment.
There is a style of French plates in the market, denominated heavy, which are truly excellent, if properly managed. Much patience, however, is required to remove the marks of the hammer; but with tripoli and alcohol the surface is readily cut down, and the plate is then susceptible of a beautiful black lustre by polishing with the buffer. The complaining operator could not succeed by his own method with one of the plates; he would encounter all manner of clouds and other unaccountable phenomena; he would imagine this plate entirely worn out before it was half cleaned, and soon fix in his own estimation the reputation of the heavy plate.
There’s a type of French plates on the market, called heavy, which are really great if used correctly. However, it takes a lot of patience to get rid of the hammer marks; but with tripoli and alcohol, the surface can be easily smoothed down, and then the plate can achieve a beautiful black shine by polishing with a buffer. The frustrated operator couldn’t get good results with one of the plates using his own method; he would see all sorts of smudges and other strange issues; he would think this plate was completely worn out before it was even half cleaned, and quickly decide that the heavy plate wasn't worth it.
In making a choice of plates, therefore, it would appear to be a matter of perfect indifference with an experienced operator what kind he would use, except so far only as the labor required in cleaning them was to be taken into consideration.
In choosing plates, it seems that for an experienced operator, it doesn’t really matter what type they use, except for how much effort is needed to clean them.
The distinction between a scale plate, a Scovill No. 1, S. F., heavy A, star, crescent, eagle, or any other brand, consists in the superior finish of some, and the thinness of the silver in the cheaper qualities.
The difference between a scale plate, a Scovill No. 1, S. F., heavy A, star, crescent, eagle, or any other brand is based on the better finish of some and the thinner layer of silver in the more affordable options.
Consequently, let the complaining operator but employ the diligence inculcated in this article, to clean his plate thoroughly, so as to bring it to a perfectly even and level surface, and he will seldom be troubled with specks, clouds, dark patches, and the host of other obstacles which heretofore have tormented him.
Consequently, if the complaining worker applies the hard work discussed in this article to clean their plate properly, making sure it’s completely smooth and even, they will rarely face issues like spots, clouds, dark marks, and other problems that have previously caused them trouble.
CHAPTER VI.
AN ACCOUNT OF WOLCOTT AND JOHNSON’S EARLY EXPERIMENTS, IN THE DAGUERREOTYPE. BY JOHN JOHNSON.
AN ACCOUNT OF WOLCOTT AND JOHNSON’S EARLY EXPERIMENTS, IN THE DAGUERREOTYPE. BY JOHN JOHNSON.
[From Humphrey’s Journal, vol. ii 1851]
[From Humphrey’s Journal, vol. ii 1851]
As a general thing, however perfect any invention may be deemed by the inventor or discoverer, it falls to the lot of most, to be the subject of improvement and advancement, and especially is this the case with those new projects in science which open an untrodden field to the view of the artisan. Such has been, in an eminent degree, the case with the discovery first announced to the world by Mons. Jean Jaques Claude Daguerre, of Paris, in the year 1839, and which excited unbounded astonishment, curiosity and surprise. It may be questioned had any other than Daguerre himself discovered a like beautiful combination, whether the world would have been favored with details exhibiting so much care, patience and perseverance as the Daguerreotype on its introduction. Shortly after, these details reached the United States, by Professor S. F. B. Morse, of New York, who was, at the time of the discovery, residing in Paris. By this announcement, the whole scientific corps was set in operation, many repeating the experiments, following carefully the directions pointed out by Daguerre, as being necessary to success. Among the number in the United States, was Alexander S. Wolcott (since deceased) and myself; both of this city. On the morning of the 6th day of October, 1839, I took to A. Wolcott’s residence, a full description of Daguerre’s discovery, he being at the time engaged in the department of Mechanical Dentistry, on some work requiring his immediate attention, the work being promised at 2 P.M. that day; having, therefore, no opportunity to read the description for himself (a thing he was accustomed to do at all times, when investigating any subject). I read to him the paper, and proposed to him that if he would plan a camera (a matter he was fully acquainted with, both theoretically and practically), I would obtain the materials as specified by Daguerre. This being agreed to, I departed for the purpose, and on my return to his shop, he handed me the sketch of a camera box, without at all explaining in what manner the lens was to be mounted. This I also undertook to procure. After 2, P.M., he had more leisure, when he proceeded to complete the camera, introducing for that purpose a reflector in the back of the box, and also to affix a plate holder on the inside, with a slide to obtain the focus on the plate, prepared after the manner of Daguerre. While Mr. Wolcott was engaged with the camera, I busied myself in polishing the silver plate, or rather silver plated copper; but ere reaching the end preparatory to iodizing, I found I had nearly or quite removed the silver surface from off the plate, and that being the best piece of sliver-plated copper to be found, the first remedy at hand that suggested itself, was a burnisher, and a few strips were quickly burnished and polished. Meantime, the camera being finished, Mr. Wolcott, after reading for himself Daguerre’s method of iodizing, prepared two plates, and placing them in the camera, guessed at the required time they should remain exposed to the action of the light; after mercurializing each in turn, and removing the iodized surface with a solution of common salt two successful impressions were obtained, each unlike the other! Considerable surprise was excited by this result, for each plate was managed precisely like the other. On referring to Daguerre, no explanation was found for this strange result; time, however, revealed to us that one picture was positive, and the other negative. On this subject I shall have much to say during the progress of the work. Investigating, the cause of this difference occupied the remainder of that day. However, another attempt was agreed upon, and the instruments, plates, etc., prepared and taken up into an attic room, in a position most favorable for light. Having duly arranged the camera, I sat for five minutes, and the result was a profile miniature (a miniature in reality,) or a plate not quite three-eighths of an inch square. Thus, with much deliberation and study, passed the first day in Daguerreotype—little dreaming or knowing into what a labyrinth such a beginning was hastening us.
As a general rule, no matter how perfect an invention may seem to its inventor or discoverer, it usually becomes the subject of further improvement and development. This is especially true for new scientific projects that introduce unexplored possibilities for workers. Such was the case with the discovery first introduced to the world by Monsieur Jean Jaques Claude Daguerre in Paris in 1839, which generated immense astonishment, curiosity, and surprise. One might wonder whether anyone other than Daguerre himself would have produced such a beautiful combination, and if so, whether the world would have received such careful, patient, and dedicated details as those shared with the introduction of the Daguerreotype. Shortly after, these details arrived in the United States through Professor S. F. B. Morse from New York, who was residing in Paris at the time of the discovery. This announcement energized the scientific community, prompting many to repeat the experiments by closely following Daguerre’s directions necessary for success. Among those in the United States were Alexander S. Wolcott (now deceased) and myself, both from this city. On the morning of October 6, 1839, I brought a full description of Daguerre’s discovery to A. Wolcott’s house, as he was busy with work in Mechanical Dentistry that needed his immediate attention, with the work promised for 2 P.M. that day. Since he had no chance to read the description himself (something he usually did when looking into any topic), I read the paper to him and suggested that if he would design a camera (a subject he was well-versed in, both theoretically and practically), I would gather the materials specified by Daguerre. He agreed, and I left to do so. When I returned to his workshop, he handed me a sketch of a camera box but didn’t explain how the lens was to be mounted. I took it upon myself to find that out. After 2 P.M., he had more time to work, and he continued to build the camera, adding a reflector at the back of the box and attaching a plate holder inside with a slide to focus the plate, as Daguerre had instructed. While Mr. Wolcott worked on the camera, I focused on polishing the silver-plated copper plate. However, before I could iodize it, I realized I’d almost entirely removed the silver surface from the plate. Since it was the best piece of silver-plated copper available, I thought to use a burnisher, and I quickly polished a few strips. Meanwhile, once the camera was completed, Mr. Wolcott, after reading Daguerre’s method of iodizing, prepared two plates and placed them in the camera, estimating the exposure time to the light. After mercurializing each plate and washing away the iodized surface with salt solution, we successfully obtained two impressions, each different from the other! This unexpected result caused significant surprise, as both plates were treated in exactly the same way. Upon checking Daguerre’s work, we found no explanation for this odd outcome; however, over time, we discovered that one image was positive and the other negative. I’ll have much more to say about this as we progress. Investigating the cause of this difference took the rest of that day. Nevertheless, we agreed to make another attempt, and we prepared the instruments and plates, taking them up to an attic room with the best light. Once I set up the camera, I sat for five minutes, resulting in a profile miniature (actually, a miniature) on a plate not quite three-eighths of an inch square. Thus, with much thought and study, the first day in Daguerreotype passed—little did we know into what a complicated journey this beginning would lead us.
[Description of apparatus represented on pages 192 and 199:]
A.—The Box—about 4 inches long by about 2 outside diameter.
B.—The
Reflector soldered to a brass screw, and mounted in the rear of the box.
c.—The slide to regulate the focus to the plate holder.
d.—The
standard to the plate holder screwed to the slide.
f.—The
plate-holder frame having two small ledges, * *, for the plate to rest
upon.
[Description of apparatus represented on pages 192 and 199:]
A.—The Box—approximately 4 inches long and about 2 inches in outside diameter.
B.—The Reflector attached to a brass screw, mounted at the back of the box.
C.—The slide to adjust the focus to the plate holder.
D.—The standard for the plate holder, secured to the slide.
F.—The plate-holder frame with two small ledges, * *, for the plate to rest on.
{192}
{192}
g.—The plate resting upon the ledge., * *, and kept against the frame by
the spring
h. The plates used were about 3/8 of an inch square.
A.—The window with the sashes removed.
g.—The plate sitting on the ledge, * *, and held against the frame by the spring
h. The plates used were about 3/8 of an inch square.
A.—The window with the sashes taken out.
B and C (p. 199) are large looking-glasses mounted as plain reflectors, the lower one C having rotary motion upon the saddle, resting upon the sill of the window in order to direct the rays of the sun upon the reflector B, at any hour of the day—the vertical motion of the reflector C being necessary, the sun varying in altitude so much during the hours most favorable to the production of portraits. The reflector C was {193} kept up to the required position by the handle lever, upright post and bolts. Reflector B was hinged at its upper end at the top of the window frame, the only motion being necessary was that which would reflect upon the sitter the incident rays from reflector C—the reflector B being kept at the required angle by the connecting lever m, etc. Suitable back-grounds were placed behind the sitter.
B and C (p. 199) are large mirrors set up as simple reflectors. The lower one, C, can rotate on its mount, resting on the window sill to direct sunlight onto the reflector B at any time of day. The vertical movement of reflector C is important because the sun's position changes significantly during the hours best for taking portraits. Reflector C is held in place by a handle lever, upright post, and bolts. Reflector B is hinged at its upper end at the top of the window frame, with the only necessary movement being that which allows it to reflect sunlight onto the sitter from reflector C. Reflector B is kept at the right angle by a connecting lever and other components. Suitable backgrounds are placed behind the sitter.
![[Illustration: Fig. 12]](images/fig12.gif)
The reflector B and C, had frequently to be renewed, the heat of the sun soon destroying their brilliance or power of reflecting, light, before renewing them, however, we resorted to the springing of them, by which means their power was increased for a period.
The reflectors B and C often needed to be replaced because the sun quickly diminished their brightness and ability to reflect light. Before replacing them, though, we would spring them, which temporarily boosted their effectiveness.
The camera or reflecting apparatus, invented by Mr. Wolcott, was, from the nature of the case, better adapted at that day to the taking of portraits from life, than any other instruments. After carefully examining the camera described by Daguerre, and the time stated as necessary to produce action for an image, it became evident to the mind of Mr. Wolcott at once, that more light could be obtained (as the field of view required was not large) by employing a reflector of short focus and wide aperture, than from a lens arrangement, owing to spherical aberration and other causes. Many experiments having been tried with the small instrument figured (p. 199), a reflector for taking portraits from life was determined on, having eight inches diameter, with twelve inches focal distance for parallel rays; this was to admit plates of two inches wide by two and a half long Mr. Wolcott having on hand reflectors of the right diameter, for Newtonian telescopes, of eight feet focal distance, resolved (as it was a matter of experiment) to grind down or increase the curve for the focal distance before named—this required time. In the mean time, many plans were pursued for making good plates, and the means of finishing, them. As the completion of the large reflector drew to a close, our mutual friend, Henry Fitz, Jr., returned from England, whither he had been on a visit, and when he heard what we were about, kindly offered his assistance; he being well versed in optics, and having been before engaged with Mr. Wolcott, in that and other business is offer was gladly accepted—Mr. Wolcott himself having frequent engagement; to fill as operator in the details of mechanical dentistry. Thus, by the aid of Mr. Fitz, the reflector was polished, and experiments soon after tried on plates of two by tow and a half inches, with tolerable success. Illness on my part quite suspended further trial for nearly four weeks.
The camera or reflecting device invented by Mr. Wolcott was, at that time, better suited for taking life portraits than any other instruments. After closely examining the camera described by Daguerre and the time needed to capture an image, Mr. Wolcott realized that more light could be gathered (since the required field of view wasn't large) by using a short-focus reflector with a wide aperture instead of a lens arrangement, due to issues like spherical aberration. After trying various experiments with the small device illustrated (p. 199), a decision was made to create a reflector for capturing life portraits, having an eight-inch diameter and a twelve-inch focal distance for parallel rays. This design was meant to accommodate plates measuring two inches wide by two and a half inches long. Mr. Wolcott had reflectors of the right diameter for Newtonian telescopes with eight feet focal distances and decided (as it was an experimental matter) to grind down or adjust the curvature for the previously mentioned focal distance—this required time. In the meantime, various plans were developed to create good plates and finishing techniques. As the large reflector neared completion, our mutual friend, Henry Fitz, Jr., returned from his trip to England and, upon hearing about our project, generously offered his help; he had a strong background in optics and had previously collaborated with Mr. Wolcott on similar work, making his offer gladly accepted—especially since Mr. Wolcott was frequently busy with mechanical dentistry tasks. With Mr. Fitz's assistance, the reflector was polished, and soon afterward, experiments were conducted on the two by two and a half-inch plates with reasonable success. Unfortunately, I fell ill and had to pause further trials for nearly four weeks.
On my recovery, early in January, 1840, our experiments were again resumed with improved results, so much so as to induce Mr. Wolcott and myself to entertain serious thoughts of making a business of the taking of likenesses from life, intending to use the reflecting apparatus invented by Mr. Wolcott, and for which he obtained Letters Patent, on the 8th day of May, 1840. Up to January 1st, 1840, all experiments had been tried on an economical scale, and the apparatus then made, was unfit for public exhibition; we resolved to make the instruments as perfect as possible while they were in progress of manufacture. Experiments were made upon mediums for protecting the eyes from the direct light of the sun, and also upon the best form and material for a back-ground to the likenesses. The length of time required for a “sitting,” even with the reflecting apparatus, was such as to render the operation anything but pleasant. Expedients were ever ready in the hands of Wolcott: blue glass was tried and abandoned in consequence of being, at that time, unable to procure a piece of uniform density and surface: afterwards a series of thin muslin screens secured to wire frames were prepared as a substitute for blue glass. The objections to these screens, however, were serious, inasmuch as a multiplication of them became necessary to lessen the intensity of the light sufficiently for due protection to the eyes, without which, the likenesses, other than profiles, were very unpleasant to look upon. Most of the portraits, then of necessity were profiles formed upon back-grounds, the lighter parts relieved upon black, and the darker parts upon light ground; the back-ground proper being of light colored material with black velvet so disposed upon the light ground, this being placed sufficiently far from the sitter, to produce harmony of effect when viewed in the field of the camera. Other difficulties presented themselves seriously to the working of the discovery of Daguerre, to portrait taking—one of which was the necessity for a constant and nearly horizontal light, that the shaded portions of the portrait should not be too hard, and yet, at the same time, be sufficiently well developed without the “high light” of the picture becoming overdone, solarized or destroyed. In almost all the early specimens of the Daguerreotype, extremes of light and shade presented themselves, much to the annoyance of the early operators, and seriously objectionable were such portraits. To overcome this difficulty, Mr. Wolcott mounted, with suitable joints, upon the top of his camera, a large looking-glass or plane reflector, in such a manner that the light of the sun (as a strong light was absolutely necessary), when falling upon the glass could be directed upon the person in an almost horizontal direction.
On my recovery, early in January 1840, we resumed our experiments with much better results, inspiring Mr. Wolcott and me to seriously consider turning our likeness-capturing efforts into a business. We planned to use the reflecting device invented by Mr. Wolcott, for which he received a patent on May 8, 1840. Up until January 1, 1840, all experiments had been carried out on a budget, and the equipment created was not suitable for public display; we decided to refine the instruments as we manufactured them. We experimented with ways to protect the eyes from direct sunlight and also looked into the best materials and shapes for the background of the portraits. The time required for a "sitting," even with the reflecting device, made the process quite uncomfortable. Wolcott always had solutions on hand: we tried blue glass but abandoned it because we couldn't find a piece with uniform density and surface at that time. Later, we used a series of thin muslin screens attached to wire frames as a substitute for blue glass. However, we faced serious issues with these screens, as we needed multiple layers to reduce the light to a safe level for the eyes; without this, portraits other than profiles were very unpleasant to view. Most portraits ended up being profiles, displayed against backgrounds where lighter areas stood out on black and darker areas on lighter surfaces. The actual background was made of light-colored material with black velvet arranged on the light surface, placed far enough from the sitter to achieve a balanced look when viewed through the camera. Other significant challenges arose in the application of Daguerre's discovery to portrait photography, one being the need for a constant and nearly horizontal light so that shaded areas wouldn’t appear too stark, while also being well-developed without the highlights becoming overexposed, solarized, or ruined. In almost all early Daguerreotype images, extreme contrasts of light and shadow were evident, much to the frustration of early photographers, and these portraits had serious flaws. To address this issue, Mr. Wolcott mounted a large mirror or plane reflector to the top of his camera with appropriate joints, allowing sunlight—essential for the process—to be directed at the subject almost horizontally.
Early in February, 1840, Mr. Johnson, Sen., (since deceased) sailed for Europe with a few specimen likenesses taken with the instruments completed as above, with the intention of patenting the invention. On his arrival a joint arrangement was effected with Mr. Richard Beard, of London, in patenting and working the invention in England. Up to February, 1840, but few friends had been made acquainted with the progress of the art in the hands of Mr. Wolcott and myself. From time to time reports reached us from various sources of the success of others, and specimens of landscapes, etc., were exhibited at Dr. James R. Chilton’s laboratory, in Broadway, much to the gratification of the numerous visitors and anxious expectants for this most wonderful discovery. Dr. Chilton, Professor J. J. Mapes, Professor J. W. Draper. Professor S. F. B. Morse, all of this city; Mr. Cornelius, Dr. Goddard and others of Philadelphia; Mr. Southworth, Professor Plumbe, and numerous others were early in the field; all, however, using the same description of camera as that of Daguerre, with modification for light, either by enlargement by lens and aperture for light, or by shortening the focal distance.
In early February 1840, Mr. Johnson, Sr. (now deceased) set sail for Europe with a few sample likenesses taken using the completed instruments, intending to patent the invention. Upon arrival, he made a joint agreement with Mr. Richard Beard in London to patent and develop the invention in England. By February 1840, only a few friends were aware of the progress of the art in the hands of Mr. Wolcott and me. Occasionally, we received reports from various sources about the successes of others, and examples of landscapes, etc., were displayed at Dr. James R. Chilton’s lab on Broadway, much to the delight of the many visitors and eager spectators awaiting this incredible discovery. Dr. Chilton, Professor J. J. Mapes, Professor J. W. Draper, and Professor S. F. B. Morse, all from this city; Mr. Cornelius, Dr. Goddard, and others from Philadelphia; Mr. Southworth, Professor Plumbe, and many more were early adopters; all were using a similar type of camera as Daguerre’s, but modified for light, either by enlarging through lenses and apertures for light or by reducing the focal distance.
At a conversational meeting of the Mechanics’ Institute, Professor J. J. Mapes being present, a question was asked if any one present could give information relative to portraiture from life by the Daguerreotype. Mr. Kells, a friend of Mr. Wolcott and a scientific and practical man (since deceased), at once marked out upon the black-board, the whole as contrived by Mr. Wolcott. This gave publicity to the invention of Mr. Wolcott. Shortly after, Professor Mapes, Dr. Chilton, and many others, sat for their portraits, and were highly gratified. Professor Morse also came and proposed to Mr. Wolcott to join him in the working of the invention, etc.
At a meeting of the Mechanics’ Institute, with Professor J. J. Mapes in attendance, someone asked if anyone could share information about capturing portraits from life using the Daguerreotype. Mr. Kells, a friend of Mr. Wolcott and an experienced and knowledgeable individual (who has since passed away), immediately drew on the blackboard, outlining everything created by Mr. Wolcott. This brought attention to Mr. Wolcott's invention. Soon after, Professor Mapes, Dr. Chilton, and several others had their portraits taken and were very pleased with the results. Professor Morse also approached Mr. Wolcott and suggested that they collaborate on developing the invention.
From this time much interest was manifested by our friends in our progress. Rooms were obtained in the Granite Buildings, corner of Broadway and Chambers street, and fitted for business. The rooms being small, it was soon found impracticable to use the arrangement of looking-glass, as previously spoken of; a new plan became necessary, to introduce which, the sashes were removed, {199} and two large looking-glasses were mounted in proper frames, thus:—
From this time on, our friends showed a lot of interest in our progress. We got some rooms in the Granite Buildings, at the corner of Broadway and Chambers Street, and set them up for business. Since the rooms were small, we quickly realized that the previous arrangement with the mirrors wouldn’t work; we needed a new plan. To implement this, the window frames were taken out, and two large mirrors were installed in proper frames, like this:—
![[Illustration: Fig. 13]](images/fig13.gif)
Just in front, and between the sitter and {200} the reflector, upon a proper stand, were used those paper muslin screen before described; also screens of tissue paper. These screens, however, when they were used, required so much time for a sitting, that some other medium, as a protection to the eyes, became absolutely necessary. The most plausible thing that suggested itself was blue glass; but, as this could not be found, numerous were the expedients proposed by the friends of the art, who from time to time visited our rooms. At the suggestion of Professor Mapes (who is ever ready to assist those in perplexity), a trough of plate glass s, about twenty-eight inches square in the clear, and from three to four inches thick, was filled with a solution of ammonia sulphate of copper, and mounted on the frame as in the sketch, which, for a time, answered extremely well; soon, however, decomposition of this solution became apparent from the increased length of time required for a sitting, although to the eye of an observer, no visible cause for such long sittings could be pointed out. Professor Mapes being appealed to, suggested that to the above solution a little acid be added which acted like a charm—shortening the time for a sitting from six, eight, or ten minutes to that of about one. Decomposition, however, would go on by the action of light and heat through the solution. New solutions were tried, when the whole were finally abandoned as being, too uncertain and troublesome. (The reflecting apparatus R, was placed upon the stand as in the sketch, with a wedge for elevating the camera, between it and the table, to obtain the image properly upon the plate.) A quantity of blue window glass was next obtained, and holes drilled through the corners of it, and several sheets were wired together to increase the size, and, when complete, was suspended from the ceiling in its proper place, and so arranged that when a person was sitting, this sheet of glass could be moved to and from, the object of which was to prevent shadows on the face of the sitter produced from the uneven surface of the glass. This latter contrivance was used until a perfect plate of glass was procured.
Just in front, and between the sitter and {200} the reflector, a proper stand held the paper muslin screens previously mentioned, along with tissue paper screens. However, these screens took too much time for a sitting, making it essential to find another medium to protect the eyes. The most feasible option that came to mind was blue glass, but since that wasn’t available, many suggestions came from art enthusiasts visiting our studio. At the suggestion of Professor Mapes, who is always eager to help in tricky situations, we used a trough of plate glass, about twenty-eight inches square and three to four inches thick, filled with a solution of ammonium sulfate of copper, mounted on a frame as shown in the sketch. For a while, this worked very well; however, we soon realized the solution was breaking down because sitting times increased, although there was no visible reason for the longer sittings. When we consulted Professor Mapes, he recommended adding a little acid to the solution, which worked like magic—reducing the sitting time from six, eight, or ten minutes to about one minute. Unfortunately, decomposition still happened due to light and heat affecting the solution. We tried various new solutions, but ultimately, they were deemed too unpredictable and cumbersome. The reflecting apparatus R was positioned on the stand as in the sketch, with a wedge under the camera to align the image properly on the plate. We then acquired some blue window glass, drilled holes in the corners, and wired several sheets together to increase size. Once complete, this setup was suspended from the ceiling in its right place, allowing it to be moved back and forth to prevent shadows on the sitter's face caused by the glass's uneven surface. This setup was used until we finally got a perfect plate of glass.
The number of persons desirous of obtaining, their miniatures, induced many to entertain the idea of establishing themselves in the Art as a profession, and numerous were the applications for information; many persons paying for their portraits solely with the view of seeing the manner of our manipulations, in order that they might obtain information to carry on likeness-taking as a business.
The number of people wanting to get their portraits made led many to consider becoming professional artists, and there were many requests for information; lots of individuals paid for their portraits just to observe our techniques so they could learn how to take likenesses as a business.
The reflecting camera being a very troublesome instrument to make, and difficulties besetting us from every source, but little attention could be given to teaching others; and, indeed, as the facts seemed to be at this time, we knew but little of the necessary manipulations ourselves. In course of time, several established themselves. The first one, after ourselves, who worked the discovery of Daguerre for portrait taking in this city, was a Mr. Prosch; followed soon after by many others, in almost all cases copying the reflecting arrangement for light, as figured above, many using it even after we had long abandoned that arrangement for a better one.
The reflecting camera was a really tricky tool to create, and with challenges coming at us from all directions, we couldn’t focus much on teaching others. Honestly, we didn’t know very much about the necessary techniques ourselves at that point. Over time, several people got established in the field. The first one, after us, who used Daguerre's discovery for portrait photography in this city was a Mr. Prosch. He was followed soon by many others, most of whom copied the light setup we had figured out above, with many still using it long after we had switched to a better design.
Innumerable obstacles to the rapid advance of the daguerreotype, presented themselves almost hourly, much to the annoyance of ourselves, and those dependent upon our movements for their advancement. Among the most difficult problems of the day, was the procuring of good plates. Messrs. Corduran & Co. were among the first to supply the trade; at that early day, however, it was a very rare thing, to be able to procure an even perfect surface, from the fact that a pure surface of silver could scarcely be obtained, the manufacturers deeming it too much trouble to prepare silver plated copper with pure silver—the result was, that in attempting to polish perfectly such plated metal as could be procured, the plates would become cloudy, or colored in spots, from the fact of having more or less alloy, according as more or less of the silver surface was removed in polishing the plate fit for an impression. To explain more clearly, it was the practice of most silver platers to use an alloy for silver-plating. In the reduction of the ingot to sheet metal, annealing has to be resorted to, and acid pickles to remove oxides, etc. The number of times the plated metal is exposed to heat and acid in its reduction to the required thickness, produces a surface of pure silver. The most of this surface is, however, so rough as to be with difficulty polished, without in places removing entirely this pellicle of pure metal, and exposing a polished surface of the alloy used in plating. Whenever such metal was used, very unsightly stains or spots frequently disfigured the portraits. The portrait, or portion of it, developed upon the pure silver, being much lighter or whiter than that developed upon the alloy; it therefore appeared that the purer the silver, the more sensitive the plate became. Accordingly, we directed Messrs. Scovills, of Connecticut, to prepare a roll of silver-plated metal, with pure silver; it fortunately proved to be a good article, but, unfortunately, a pound of this metal (early in 1840) cost the round sum of $9. Like descriptions of metal, the same gentlemen would be glad to furnish, at this time, for $4. Soon after this, some samples of English plated metal, of a very superior quality, came to our possession, and relieved us from the toil of making and plating one plate at a time, an expedient we were compelled to resort to, to command material to meet the pressing demands for portraits.
Countless obstacles to the quick progress of the daguerreotype popped up almost every hour, much to the frustration of us and those relying on our work for their advancement. One of the toughest challenges of the time was sourcing good plates. Messrs. Corduran & Co. were among the first to supply the trade; however, back then, it was extremely rare to find a perfectly smooth surface because getting pure silver was nearly impossible. Manufacturers found it too troublesome to prepare silver-plated copper with pure silver. As a result, when we tried to polish the available plated metal, the plates would become cloudy or stained in patches due to the varying amounts of alloy that got removed while polishing them for impressions. To clarify, most silver platers used an alloy for silver plating. During the process of turning the ingot into sheet metal, they had to use heat and acid solutions to get rid of oxides, etc. The number of times the plated metal was heated and treated with acid to reach the needed thickness created a surface of pure silver. However, this surface was often too rough to polish without completely removing some of that thin layer of pure metal and exposing the polished surface of the alloy underneath. Whenever such metal was used, ugly stains or spots would often ruin the portraits. The part of the portrait developed on pure silver appeared much lighter or whiter than that developed on the alloy, so it seemed that the purer the silver, the more sensitive the plate became. Therefore, we instructed Messrs. Scovills of Connecticut to create a roll of silver-plated metal with pure silver; luckily, it turned out to be a good product, but unfortunately, a pound of this metal (early in 1840) cost a hefty $9. The same type of metal is now available for $4. Shortly after, we received some samples of English plated metal of much higher quality, which freed us from the hassle of creating and plating one plate at a time, a method we had to rely on to obtain materials to meet the urgent demand for portraits.
Having it now in our power to obtain good plated metal, a more rapid mode of polishing than that recommended by Daguerre was attempted as follows:
Having the ability to get high-quality plated metal now, we tried a faster way of polishing than the method suggested by Daguerre as follows:
This metal was cut to the desired size, and having a pair of “hand rolls” at hand, each plate, with its silvered side placed next to the highly polished surface of a steel die, was passed and repassed through the rolls many times, by which process a very smooth, perfect surface was obtained. The plates were then annealed, and a number of plates thus prepared were fastened to the bottom of a box a few inches deep a foot wide, and eighteen inches long; this box was placed upon a table and attached to a rod connected to the face plate of a lathe, a few inches from its centre, so as to give the box a reciprocating motion. A quantity of emery was now strewn over the plates, and the lathe set in motion. The action produced wag a friction or rubbing of the emery over the surface of the plates.
This metal was cut to the right size, and with a pair of "hand rolls" handy, each plate, with its silver side facing the highly polished surface of a steel die, was rolled back and forth through the rolls multiple times, resulting in a very smooth, perfect surface. The plates were then annealed, and several plates prepared this way were attached to the bottom of a box a few inches deep, a foot wide, and eighteen inches long. This box was placed on a table and connected to a rod linked to the lathe's face plate, positioned a few inches from its center to create a back-and-forth motion. A quantity of emery was then spread over the plates, and the lathe was set in motion. The action created friction, rubbing the emery over the surface of the plates.
When continued for some time, a greyish polish was the result. Linseed, when used in the same manner, gave us better hope of success, and the next step resorted to was to build a wheel and suspend it after the manner of a grindstone. The plates being secured to the inner side of the wheel or case, and as this case revolved, the seeds would constantly keep to the lower level, and their sliding over the surface of the plates would polish or burnish their surfaces. This, with the former, was soon abandoned; rounded shots of silver placed in the same wheel were found not to perform the polishing so well as linseed. Buff-wheels of leather with rotten-stone and oil, proved to be far superior to all other contrivances; and, subsequently, at the suggestion of Professor Draper, velvet was used in lieu of buff leather, and soon superseded all other substances, both for lathe and hand-buffs, and I would add, for the benefit of new beginners that those who are familiar with its use, prefer cotton velvet. The only requisite necessary is, that the buffs made of cotton velvet should be kept dry and warm.
When used over time, a grayish polish was the outcome. Linseed, when used similarly, gave us better chances of success, and the next step was to create a wheel and suspend it like a grindstone. The plates were secured to the inside of the wheel or case, and as this case rotated, the seeds would constantly settle to the bottom, and their sliding over the surface of the plates would polish or burnish them. This method, along with the previous one, was quickly abandoned; rounded silver shots placed in the same wheel were found to polish less effectively than linseed. Buff wheels made of leather with rotten stone and oil proved to be far superior to all other devices; and later, at the suggestion of Professor Draper, velvet was used instead of buff leather and soon replaced all other materials, both for lathes and hand buffs. I would also mention for the benefit of beginners that those who are experienced with its use prefer cotton velvet. The only requirement is that the cotton velvet buffs should be kept dry and warm.
The greater number of operators, with whose practice I am familiar, use, for polishing plates, prepared tripoli, imported from France, or Browne’s rotten-stone. The former of these articles is very objectionable, inasmuch as there is no positive certainty of being enabled to procure or make the article of uniform grit—the nature of the substance rendering, it impossible to reduce it to varying degrees of evenness, by the well known process of washing, for that purpose, and the burning of rotten-stone changes its chemical nature somewhat, at the same time rendering, this invaluable article harsh and gritty. And especially, no reliance can be placed upon burned rotten stone if purchased from those who do not give very great attention and care to its preparation; and the same remarks apply to rouge.
The majority of operators I know use either prepared tripoli imported from France or Browne’s rotten-stone for polishing plates. The first option is quite problematic because there's no guarantee that you can get or create a consistent grit. The nature of the substance makes it impossible to achieve varying levels of evenness through the standard washing process, and burning rotten-stone alters its chemical properties, making this valuable material rough and gritty. Additionally, you can’t rely on burned rotten-stone if you buy it from suppliers who don’t pay careful attention to its preparation; the same goes for rouge.
The best article for polishing Daguerreotype plates is rotten-stone, such as can be procured in any town, prepared after the following manner: Procure, say half a dozen wide-mouthed bottles, of suitable dimensions, numbering each from one to six. Put into No. 1 about half a pound of rotten-stone, and nearly fill the bottle with water. Then, with a proper stick or spatule, mix well the rotten-stone and water; after which, let No. 1 rest for, say one minute, then carefully pour off into bottle No. 2 (or, what would be better, draw off by a syphon) as much of the floating particles of rotten-stone as is suspended in the water. Again fill bottle No. 1 with water, agitate it as before, and decant it to bottle No. 2, care being taken to draw off only the suspended particles of rotten-stone.
The best article for polishing Daguerreotype plates is rotten stone, which you can easily find in any town. Here's how to prepare it: Get about six wide-mouthed bottles of a suitable size and label them from one to six. Put about half a pound of rotten stone into bottle No. 1 and fill the bottle nearly to the top with water. Then, using a stick or spatula, mix the rotten stone and water well. After that, let bottle No. 1 sit for about one minute, then carefully pour off into bottle No. 2 (or, even better, use a siphon) as much of the floating particles of rotten stone as you can. Fill bottle No. 1 with water again, shake it up as before, and pour it into bottle No. 2, making sure to only draw off the suspended particles of rotten stone.
When a sufficient quantity of washings from bottle No. 1 is collected into bottle No. 2, a similar process must be gone through, as above stated, for No. 1; the difference being in the care required, and in the time allowed between the stirring or mixing the rotten-stone and water. The floating particles of rotten-stone, after four minutes’ subsiding, will be found fine enough for the finest Daguerreotype polishing required.
When enough washings from bottle No. 1 are collected in bottle No. 2, the same process described above needs to be followed for No. 1; the only differences are the level of care needed and the time allowed between mixing the rotten-stone and water. After four minutes of settling, the floating particles of rotten-stone will be fine enough for the finest Daguerreotype polishing needed.
A quantity of such washings may be collected in a large bottle, and allowed to stand a few hours, when all the rotten-stone will have settled. The water may be poured off and the rotten-stone put into an evaporating dish, and while being dried, must be constantly stirred to obtain an impalpable powder.
A quantity of these washings can be collected in a large bottle and left to sit for a few hours, during which time all the rotten-stone will settle at the bottom. The water can then be poured off, and the rotten-stone should be placed in an evaporating dish. While it's drying, it needs to be stirred constantly to achieve a fine powder.
Further washings may in like manner be resorted to for finer qualities of rotten-stone. In my practice, I have used the articles at two and four minutes’ settling, and occasionally have prepared it after standing for eight minutes. So fine a quality as this, however, is seldom required. In using, rotten-stone, I mix with it, for polishing, fine olive oil, until I obtain a thin paste—and the best of all methods for polishing (well planished) Daguerreotype plates, is one like that used for glass by lens polishers; that is, by using a disc or buff-wheel, and having, a suitable holder by which to secure the plate, and then by pressing the plate against the revolving buff, well saturated with the mixed oil and rotten-stone, a very good surface is obtained. A quantity of plates may be prepared in this way, and all the adhering oil, etc., may be removed by a clean hand, or lathe buff, after which each plate must be heated to the point necessary to burn off the remaining oil great care being required not to overheat the plate. A very slight excess of temperature will at once destroy all the polish previously obtained. The test for ascertaining the right temperature is at hand; the adhering oil will be driven from the plate in the form of smoke when the right temperature is reached. The moment the smoke ceases to rise from the plate, the heat must be removed, and the plate quickly cooled upon a piece of iron.
Further washings can also be used to achieve finer qualities of rotten-stone. In my experience, I’ve used the material after two and four minutes of settling, and occasionally after letting it stand for eight minutes. However, such a fine quality is rarely needed. When using rotten-stone, I mix it with fine olive oil for polishing until I get a thin paste. The best method for polishing (well planished) Daguerreotype plates is similar to what lens polishers use for glass; specifically, by employing a disc or buff-wheel with a suitable holder to secure the plate. By pressing the plate against the rotating buff, which is well saturated with the oil and rotten-stone mixture, a great surface is achieved. You can prepare multiple plates this way, and any excess oil can be wiped away by hand or a lathe buff. After that, each plate must be heated just enough to burn off the remaining oil, but care must be taken not to overheat it. Even a slight excess in temperature will ruin the polish. The right temperature can be checked; the excess oil will start to smoke when the correct temperature is reached. As soon as the smoke stops rising from the plate, the heat should be removed, and the plate should be quickly cooled on a piece of iron.
A quantity of plates thus prepared may be kept on hand for any required time, and the labor of one minute, with a lathe or hand-buff with dry charcoal, or rather, prepared lampblack, will perfectly polish the surface ready for indexing, etc. This lampblack also requires some care in preparing. Take a small-size crucible, properly temper it by a slow fire, that it may not be cracked after which, fill it with common lampblack, cover it over with a piece of soap-stone, and again replace it in the fire. Build a good hard coal fire around it continue the heat for two or three hours, being careful not to raise the cover till the crucible be quite cold. Pulverize when using it. It is very desirable to keep this lampblack dry and warm. Some operators use much rouge I would recommend the above in preference; but those who feel that they cannot dispense with the use of rouge, had better try a large addition of prepared lampblack to a small one of rouge, as this latter article, unless great pains be taken in its preparation, will adhere and work itself into the body of the surface, so that it cannot be removed therefrom; and I have seen many specimens of Daguerreotype very much injured in effect from this rouge tint disseminated throughout their shaded features, at the same time that the whole general effect of such pictures is that of a want of life. It is true that with the use of rouge a very high degree of polish may be obtained, but probably not higher than can be produced with many other substances of a less objectionable nature.
A quantity of prepared plates can be kept for as long as needed, and just one minute of work with a lathe or a hand buff using dry charcoal, or better yet, prepared lampblack, will perfectly polish the surface for indexing, etc. Preparing this lampblack also requires some attention. Take a small crucible, heat it slowly to temper it so it won't crack, then fill it with common lampblack, cover it with a piece of soapstone, and put it back in the fire. Build a strong coal fire around it and keep the heat going for two or three hours, making sure not to lift the cover until the crucible is completely cool. Pulverize it when you're ready to use it. It's important to keep this lampblack dry and warm. Some people use a lot of rouge; I recommend the lampblack instead. However, if you feel you can't do without rouge, you should try mixing a large amount of prepared lampblack with a small amount of rouge. The rouge can stick and work into the surface, making it impossible to remove, and I've seen many Daguerreotypes that were negatively affected by this rouge tint in their shaded areas, giving them a lifeless appearance. While using rouge can achieve a high polish, it probably doesn't surpass what can be achieved with many other less problematic substances.
From the announcement of the discovery by Daguerre to the beginning of the year 1840, I am not aware of any attempt to lessen the time for the action of an image, or an impression, other than that of the reflecting camera invented by Mr. Wolcott. Early, however, in 1840, Mr. Wolcott was desirous to be enabled to further shorten the time for a sitting, and having some knowledge of bromine and its action, by request, Dr. Chilton prepared a small quantity; but Mr. Wolcott did not succeed very well with it, he having invariably used too much in combination with iodine to produce that sensitive coating now well known to the profession. Professor Morse, of this city, Dr. Goddard, of Philadelphia, and others, in the years 1840 and 1841, were acquainted with the use of bromine. N. Griffing, of this city, or myself, used with tolerable success, iodine in large excess to nitric acid and water; and, subsequently, to nitro muriatic acid (which reacted and formed a peculiar chloride of iodine); this latter combination proved to be preferable to simple iodine, at the same time somewhat more sensitive, and was used by me in this city up to the time of my leaving for London (October 1, 1840). On arriving in London, I instituted a series of experiments in the various chemical combinations, solely with the view to be enabled to obtain more speedily a portrait than it was practicable to do with any known chemicals at that date. The high latitude, and the winter season of the year rendering but a feeble light at best, the greater the necessity for a more sensitive chemical preparation to the shortening the time for a sitting. Near the beginning of the year 1841, I discovered and practically applied, chloride of iodine to great advantage, and, as far as memory serves me, I believe the first used in this country was some made and shipped, Messrs. Harnden & Co., from London, to Mr. Wolcott, in New York.
From the announcement of the discovery by Daguerre to the beginning of 1840, I’m not aware of any efforts to reduce the exposure time for an image or impression, other than the reflecting camera created by Mr. Wolcott. However, early in 1840, Mr. Wolcott wanted to further decrease the sitting time and, knowing a bit about bromine and its properties, asked Dr. Chilton to prepare a small amount. Unfortunately, Mr. Wolcott didn’t have much success with it, having consistently used too much bromine in combination with iodine, which prevented him from producing that sensitive coating now well recognized in the field. Professor Morse from this city, Dr. Goddard from Philadelphia, and others were familiar with the use of bromine in 1840 and 1841. N. Griffing from this city and I had some success using a large excess of iodine with nitric acid and water, and later with nitro muriatic acid (which reacted to form a unique iodine chloride); this latter combination turned out to be better than simple iodine and was somewhat more sensitive. I used it in this city until I left for London on October 1, 1840. Upon arriving in London, I began a series of experiments with various chemical combinations, aiming to find a quicker way to obtain a portrait than was possible with any known chemicals at that time. The high latitude and winter season provided only weak light, increasing the need for a more sensitive chemical preparation to shorten sitting time. Early in 1841, I discovered and effectively applied chloride of iodine, which was a significant advantage, and as far as I can remember, I believe the first batch used in this country was that which was prepared and shipped by Messrs. Harnden & Co. from London to Mr. Wolcott in New York.
About the same time, Mr. John Goddard, of London (who was associated with myself), discovered a rather valuable combination of chemicals, consisting of a mixture of iodine, bromine, iodus, and iodic acid, and a proper combination of those bodies gave an action somewhat more sensitive than chloride of iodine—but the “high lights” of the portraits would become solarized or overdone, more frequently with this combination than with the chloride of iodine. Throughout the year 1841, I used, with great success, chloride of iodine, applied as one coating—occasionally in conjunction with Mr. Wolcott, attempting the use of iodine, bromine, and chlorine, and at times with more or less success. The difficulty of exactly combining, the three elements above mentioned, in order to produce a certainty of result with harmony of effect, was the work of many months, with great labor and study, the slightest modification requiring a long, series of practical experiments, a single change consuming, frequently, an entire day in instituting comparisons, etc., etc.
Around the same time, Mr. John Goddard from London (who worked with me) discovered a valuable mix of chemicals, including iodine, bromine, iodus, and iodic acid. A proper combination of these substances created an effect that was somewhat more sensitive than iodine chloride, but the highlights of the portraits often became solarized or overdone with this mix more often than with iodine chloride. Throughout 1841, I successfully used iodine chloride, applying it as a single layer—sometimes collaborating with Mr. Wolcott, experimenting with iodine, bromine, and chlorine, achieving varying degrees of success. Finding the right balance of these three elements to ensure consistent and harmonious results took months of hard work and study, as even the slightest modification needed a long series of practical tests, with a single change often taking up an entire day for comparison and so on.
Early in the year, 1842, I discovered a combination of chemicals (now known in London as “Wolcott’s Mixture,” in hermetically sealed bulbs) of exceeding uniform character, very sensitive to the action of light, and specimens produced in 1842-3, with this combination, will bear comparison with the best specimens produced at this late date.
Early in 1842, I found a mix of chemicals (now called “Wolcott’s Mixture” in London) that was extremely uniform and very sensitive to light. The samples made in 1842-3 using this mix can compete with the best samples made today.
About the same time, I discovered that however much overdone a Daguerreotype might be, the means were at hand to save or redeem it. It has long, since been known to operators, that if a plate be exposed to light after being coated, unless it be again coated, a clear and distinct picture could not be obtained upon the same plate without first repolishing and recoating the same, care being taken that no light fall upon the prepared surface. To prevent solarization, coat a plate as usual, expose to the action of light any required time (according to circumstances), say from quarter to one half more time than would be required in the ordinary method of procedure; observe, before putting the plate in the mercury box, place it over the vapor of iodine, bromine, or chlorine, etc. (carefully excluding the light), for a very brief period, great care being required to have the selected vapor very much diluted with air, in order to success. Many experiments will be required ere arriving at satisfactory results. Specimens now unknown to general operators, for harmony of effect, have been, and may again be produced by the method pointed out above. I have found the best general effect, and the most certain result to follow from the use of the vapor of chlorine—but this requires more than ordinary care. I would, therefore, recommend the use of iodine. Thus: to a few grains of iodine, add an ounce of warm water (which will become tinged with iodine); when cold, to half a pint of pure water in a new and clean coating box, put, of the above, fifty drops; stir and mix well this small quantity of iodine in with the water; in ten minutes this box will be ready for use. Great care and judgment will be required in the application of this vapor to the plate; if the plate remain over the vapor too long, the developed picture will have a faint and misty appearance; if not exposed long enough, the “high light” will be solarized. I have great hope of the ultimate use of this process, as it is the only means yet discovered to be enabled to secure specimens of extremes of light and shade, yet producing harmony of effect; and I would call the attention of the profession to the fact, that a plate may be exposed to the action of light for any length of time (a thousand times longer than required to act for the lesser quantity of mercury to deposit itself, or that amount necessary to form a perfect specimen), and be restored by the application of any of the vapors above mentioned, remarking that for extremes for solarization, denser vapors will be required. Much remains to be done with this discovery to the application of the Daguerreotype.
Around the same time, I found out that no matter how overexposed a Daguerreotype may be, there are ways to fix it. Long known by operators, if a plate is exposed to light after being coated, unless it’s coated again, a clear and distinct picture can’t be achieved on the same plate without first polishing and recoating it, while ensuring that no light hits the prepared surface. To prevent solarization, coat a plate as usual, expose it to light for the needed amount of time (say, from a quarter to half more time than what would typically be required); before placing the plate in the mercury box, hold it over the vapors of iodine, bromine, or chlorine, etc. (making sure to exclude the light) for a very short period, with great care taken to ensure the selected vapor is well diluted with air for success. Many experiments will be needed before achieving satisfactory results. Specimens not currently known to general operators, for harmony of effect, have been, and can be produced again using the method described above. I’ve found the best overall effect and the most reliable results come from using chlorine vapor—but this requires extra caution. Therefore, I recommend using iodine. Here’s how: take a few grains of iodine and add it to an ounce of warm water (which will turn tinged with iodine); when it cools, add fifty drops of this to half a pint of pure water in a new, clean coating box; stir and mix this small amount of iodine well with the water; in ten minutes, this box will be ready for use. Great care and judgment are necessary when applying this vapor to the plate; if the plate stays over the vapor too long, the developed picture will look faint and misty; if not exposed long enough, the high light will be solarized. I have high hopes for the eventual use of this process, as it’s the only known way to capture specimens of extreme light and shade while still producing harmony of effect; I’d like to point out to the profession that a plate can be exposed to light for any duration (up to a thousand times longer than required for the lesser amount of mercury to deposit or create a perfect specimen) and can be restored using any of the aforementioned vapors, noting that denser vapors will be needed for extremes of solarization. Much work remains to be done with this discovery in the application of the Daguerreotype.
HUMPHREY’S JOURNAL OF THE DAGUERREOTYPE & PHOTOGRAPHIC ARTS.
The above-named publication is well known as the best and most valuable one devoted to the Photographic Science in this country. Humphrey’s Journal made its appearance November 1st, 1850, and consequently is the first and oldest serial offered to the Photographic world.
The publication mentioned above is widely recognized as the best and most valuable one dedicated to Photographic Science in this country. Humphrey’s Journal first appeared on November 1st, 1850, making it the first and oldest periodical available to the Photographic community.
The art of producing Portraits and Landscapes by means of Light, has recently taken a new and enlivening impulse, which will in all probability lead to important and interesting results. No practical Daguerreotypist, Photographer, or amateur, should be without the means at hand for securing all of the information upon this subject. Each should be ready to receive and apply the improvements as they may be developed. In order to accomplish this, it is a matter of great importance to the Practitioner or Experimenter that he should have a reliable medium through which he can obtain information. In what source can the inquirer better place his confidence than in a regular Journal, whose editor is literally a practical person, and familiar with the manipulations necessary for producing Portraits upon “Daguerreotype Plates,” and upon glass and paper? Such is the conductor of Humphrey’s Journal.
The art of creating Portraits and Landscapes using Light has recently gained new energy, likely leading to significant and exciting outcomes. No professional Daguerreotypist, Photographer, or hobbyist should be without the tools needed to access all the information on this topic. Everyone should be prepared to embrace and implement improvements as they arise. To achieve this, it's crucial for Practitioners or Experimenters to have a trustworthy source to obtain information. Where can someone seeking knowledge place their trust better than in a reputable Journal, led by an editor who is truly practical and well-versed in the techniques required to produce Portraits on “Daguerreotype Plates,” glass, and paper? Such is the editor of Humphrey’s Journal.
This Journal is published once every two weeks, and contains all the improvements relating to the Art, and is the only American Journal whose editor is practically acquainted with the process for producing Daguerreotypes, Ambrotypes, and Photographs. The first No. of Vol. X. is dated May 1st, 1858. The terms (Two Dollars per annum) are trifling compared with the vast amount of information furnished.
This journal is published every two weeks and contains all the latest improvements related to the art. It's the only American journal where the editor has hands-on experience with the processes for producing daguerreotypes, ambrotypes, and photographs. The first issue of Volume X is dated May 1, 1858. The subscription cost of two dollars a year is minimal compared to the wealth of information provided.
AMBROTYPES.—Humphrey’s Journal contains everything novel which appears upon this subject, and has already presented more new, important, and original matter than can be found in any other place.
AMBROTYPES.—Humphrey’s Journal includes all the latest information on this topic and has already provided more new, important, and original content than anywhere else.
Many are the letters we have received during the term of the last volume, in which the writer has stated that a single number of Humphrey’s Journal has contained information of more value to him than “several times the amount paid for the entire volume.”
Many letters have come in during the time of the last volume, where the writers have expressed that a single issue of Humphrey’s Journal has offered them information worth much more than “several times the amount paid for the whole volume.”
Our resources have grown up around us, and our facilities for procuring, as well as distributing, all such facts and improvements as will benefit as well as instruct all who have the progress of the Art at heart, are as ample as they can well be made.
Our resources have developed around us, and our ability to obtain and share all the facts and advancements that will benefit and educate everyone invested in the progress of the Art is as comprehensive as it can be.
The future volumes will be abundantly furnished with original writings from persons of standing in the scientific world; and the practical Photographer will here find a full account of such improvements as may from time to time develop themselves.
The upcoming volumes will be filled with original writings from reputable figures in the scientific community; and the practical Photographer will find a comprehensive overview of any advancements that may arise over time.
From the editor’s long practical experience in the Heliographic Science, he will be enabled to present the subject in a plain, clear, and concise manner.
From the editor's extensive hands-on experience in Heliographic Science, he will be able to present the topic in a straightforward, clear, and concise way.
Read what the Editors say of Humphrey’s Journal:—
Read what the editors say about Humphrey's Journal:—
“We have received a copy of a valuable Journal (Humphrey’s) published in New York, which has reached the 18th number of Vol. VI.... We now have the pleasure of quoting from our trans-atlantic coadjutor.”—Liverpool Photographic Jour.
“We have received a copy of a valuable journal (Humphrey’s) published in New York, which has reached the 18th issue of Vol. VI.... We now have the pleasure of quoting from our transatlantic collaborator.” —Liverpool Photographic Jour.
“Humphrey’s Journal is practical as well as scientific in character.”—American Journal of Science and Arts.
“Humphrey’s Journal is both practical and scientific in nature.” —American Journal of Science and Arts.
“It treats the subject knowingly and with force.”—New York Tribune.
“It addresses the subject with knowledge and impact.”—New York Tribune.
“It is both a popular and interesting publication.”—Mechanics’ Magazine.
“It’s both a popular and interesting publication.” —Mechanics’ Magazine.
“It is highly useful to all who practice ‘shadow catching.’”—Ohio State Journal.
“It is very helpful to everyone who practices ‘shadow catching.’”—Ohio State Journal.
“The work is neatly gotten up, and contains many interesting varieties in this new field of science.”—Times.
“The book is well put together and includes many fascinating examples in this new area of science.” —Times.
“It should be hailed and encouraged, not only by Daguerreotypists themselves, but by every lover of Science and Art.”—The Democrat.
“It should be celebrated and supported, not just by Daguerreotypists themselves, but by every fan of Science and Art.”—The Democrat.
“We cannot too strongly urge all artists, and those persons who feel an interest in the Heliographic Arts and Sciences, to take a copy of the work.”—Sentinel.
“We cannot stress enough to all artists, and anyone interested in the Heliographic Arts and Sciences, to get a copy of this work.” —Sentinel.
“It is indicative of talent worthy of the important Art it is designed to elevate.”—American.
“It shows talent that deserves the important Art it aims to enhance.”—American.
“This Art is entitled to its own organ, which could not have fallen into better hands than those of the editor of ‘Humphrey’s Journal.’”—Transcript.
“This Art deserves its own platform, and there's no one better suited for it than the editor of ‘Humphrey’s Journal.’”—Transcript.
“It is a scientific work of interest and usefulness.”—Star of the North.
“It’s a scientific piece that’s both interesting and useful.” —Star of the North.
“This Journal answers many points heretofore regarded as inexplicable.”—Hudson River Chronicle.
“This Journal addresses many issues that were previously considered inexplicable.” —Hudson River Chronicle.
“It is rich with interest.”—North American.
“It's really interesting.”—North American.
“It contains all the ‘Improvements.’”—Delta.
“It includes all the ‘Improvements.’”—Delta.
“It teaches us how to take our own portraits.”—Bee.
“It shows us how to take our own selfies.”—Bee.
“It will cultivate a taste for Daguerreotypes.”—Commercial Advertiser.
“It will create an interest in Daguerreotypes.”—Commercial Advertiser.
“It should be in the hands of all.”—Reveille.
“It should be in the hands of everyone.”—Reveille.
“It is the Daguerreotypist’s friend.”—London News.
“It’s the Daguerreotypist’s best buddy.”—London News.
“It should be found in every library.”—Evening Journal.
“It should be found in every library.”—Evening Journal.
From some of our Subscribers
From some of our Subscribers
“Humphrey’s Journal has been the means of saving much time and money, for by its instruction I have been enabled to produce some of the finest Paper Pictures I have ever seen.” W. P.
“Humphrey’s Journal has saved me a lot of time and money because its guidance has helped me create some of the best Paper Pictures I’ve ever seen.” W. P.
“Don’t fail to send me the Journal, for I would not be without it for five times the amount of subscription. It is the only publication I can depend upon.” A. G. R.
“Make sure to send me the Journal, because I wouldn’t want to be without it for five times the subscription price. It’s the only publication I can trust.” A. G. R.
“Your treatment of the humbugs and humbugging members of the profession, is of the most valuable importance to us practical Daguerreans. Go on. God speed! Here is the amount for the renewal of my subscription.” E. F. S.
“Your handling of the frauds and fraudulent members of the profession is extremely important to us practical Daguerreans. Keep it up. Good luck! Here’s the payment for the renewal of my subscription.” E. F. S.
“How can any Operator afford to be without it?” L. L. H.
“How can any Operator afford to be without it?” L. L. H.
“Here are five dollars: send me Humphrey’s Journal to this amount. I will not be without it.” M. S.
“Here are five dollars: send me Humphrey’s Journal for this amount. I can’t be without it.” M. S.
“It is my best friend.” J. E. W.
“It’s my best friend.” J. E. W.
We might quote like commendatory extracts enough to more than ten times fill this page.
We could include enough praise-worthy quotes to fill this page more than ten times.
Humphrey’s Journal contains 16 octavo pages of reading matter.
Humphrey's Journal has 16 pages of reading material in octavo format.
TERMS.
One copy per annum, in advance . . . . . . $2 00 Three copies, do. do. . . . . . . $5 00 Six copies, do. do. . . . . . . $9 00
One copy per year, in advance . . . . . . $2.00 Three copies, do. do. . . . . . . $5.00 Six copies, do. do. . . . . . . $9.00
The thousands who read it cannot be induced to remain without it. All who desire to keep up with the improvements should subscribe for a copy.
The thousands who read it can't be convinced to go without it. Anyone who wants to stay updated with the latest improvements should subscribe for a copy.
Subscription price Two Dollars per year.
Subscription price: Two dollars per year.
Don’t fail to become a subscriber. Address
S. D. HUMPHREY
Office, 37 Lispenard Street, NEW YORK.
Don’t miss out on becoming a subscriber. Contact
S. D. HUMPHREY Office, 37 Lispenard Street, NEW YORK.
THE PRACTICAL MANUAL OF THE COLLODION PROCESS.
BY S. D. HUMPHREY.
THIRD EDITION
This Edition contains all the Improvements in the Art made public up to the day of publication, and gives complete Practical Instructions for making Collodion Positives or Ambrotypes, Collodion Negatives, Printing, etc., etc. The quick, great and unprecedented sale of the first and second editions demonstrates, more than the strongest language could possibly do, the extraordinary and increasing popularity of this work. The Third Edition contains two hundred and sixteen 12mo. pages, of a larger size and in smaller type than either of the preceding editions, and is illustrated with numerous wood-cuts. It is intended to be the best practical work extant; substantially bound in cloth, price One Dollar; forwarded by mail (postage prepaid). Address
This edition includes all the improvements in the art made public up to the publication date and offers complete practical instructions for creating collodion positives or ambrotypes, collodion negatives, printing, and more. The rapid, strong, and unprecedented sales of the first and second editions highlight, more than any words could express, the remarkable and growing popularity of this work. The third edition features two hundred and sixteen 12mo pages, which are larger and use smaller type than the previous editions, and it is illustrated with numerous woodcuts. It aims to be the best practical guide available; it is sturdily bound in cloth and priced at one dollar, sent by mail (postage prepaid). Address
S. D. HUMPHREY, New York
S.D. HUMPHREY, New York
A GUIDE TO PHOTOGRAPHY,
Containing simple and concise directions for obtaining Views, Portraits, etc., by the chemical agency of Light, by W. H. Thornthwaite, author of “Photogenic Manipulations,” etc. Illustrated with numerous wood-cuts. The Book contains more than one hundred 12mo pages, bound in board, and is sold at twenty-five cents per copy, or five copies for one dollar. Address
Containing straightforward and clear instructions for capturing Views, Portraits, etc., using the chemical properties of Light, by W. H. Thornthwaite, author of “Photogenic Manipulations,” etc. Illustrated with many woodcuts. The book has over one hundred 12mo pages, bound in board, and is sold for twenty-five cents each, or five copies for one dollar. Address
S. D. HUMPHREY, New York
S.D. HUMPHREY, New York
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS,
MANUFACTURERS OF
DAGUERREOTYPE
CASES,
PLATES, CAMERAS,
MATTINGS, PRESERVERS, ETC., ETC.
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS,
MANUFACTURERS OF
DAGUERREOTYPE
CASES,
PLATES, CAMERAS,
MATTINGS, PRESERVERS, ETC., ETC.
MANUFACTURERS AND IMPORTERS OF EVERY VARIETY OF AMBROTYPE,
AND
PHOTOGRAPHIC GOODS,
MANUFACTURERS AND IMPORTERS OF ALL TYPES OF AMBROTYPE,
AND PHOTOGRAPHIC PRODUCTS,
Of the Best and most approved Quality.
Of the best and most highly regarded quality.
ESPECIAL ATTENTION GIVEN TO THE FURNISHING OF EVERY ARTICLE USED IN THE PRACTICE OF THE DAGUERREOTYPE
ESPECIAL ATTENTION GIVEN TO THE FURNISHING OF EVERY ARTICLE USED IN THE PRACTICE OF THE DAGUERREOTYPE
Depot 81 Chambers and 63 Reade St., New York.
Depot 81 Chambers and 63 Reade St., New York.
Manufactory at Waterbury, Conn.
Factory in Waterbury, Conn.
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS’ CAMERAS
From 1/4 to the Mammoth size. These CAMERAS are of the most superior make, and all subjected to the most thorough test before being offered for sale.
From 1/4 to Mammoth size. These CAMERAS are of the highest quality, and all undergo rigorous testing before being put up for sale.
VIEW CAMERAS, made expressly for taking views: an entirely new article.
VIEW CAMERAS, specifically designed for capturing images: a completely new concept.
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES, OF EVERY VARIETY, AND WE WOULD CALL PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO THE
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES, OF EVERY VARIETY, AND WE WOULD LIKE TO HIGHLIGHT THE
Wreath, and H. B. & H. Eagle 40 Plates, AS HAVING NO EQUALS IN THE MARKET.
Wreath, and H. B. & H. Eagle 40 Plates, AS HAVING NO EQUALS IN THE MARKET.
SOLE AGENTS FOR THE CELEBRATED H. B. AND N. P. FRENCH PLATES.
SOLE AGENTS FOR THE FAMOUS H. B. AND N. P. FRENCH PLATES.
Always on hand a complete assortment of Ambrotype and Photographic goods.
Always available is a complete range of Ambrotype and photographic products.
SOLE AGENTS FOR THE Patent solid glass corner Plate Holders.
SOLE AGENTS FOR THE Patent solid glass corner Plate Holders.
All orders will receive prompt attention, and be forwarded with dispatch.
All orders will be promptly addressed and shipped quickly.
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS, 81 Chambers, and 63 Reade St. New York.
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS, 81 Chambers, and 63 Reade St. New York.
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.
MANUFACTURER OF
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES,
MATTINGS,
PRESERVERS,
CASES,
APPARATUS, etc., etc.
MANUFACTURER OF
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES,
MATTINGS,
PRESERVATIVES,
CASES,
EQUIPMENT, etc.
Importers and Dealers in every description of Daguerreotype, Photographic, AND AMBROTYPE GOODS,
Importers and dealers in all types of daguerreotypes, photography, and ambrotype goods,
The SCOVILL MANUFACTURING COMPANY flatter themselves that an experience of nearly twenty years in the business and the most extensive variety of the above Goods in the United States, entitle them to the continuance of orders for the Domestic and Foreign trade, which will receive the most careful attention.
The SCOVILL MANUFACTURING COMPANY believes that their nearly twenty years of experience in the business and the largest selection of these products in the United States qualify them for ongoing orders for the domestic and international market, which will be given the utmost attention.
Park Building, New York. Entrances—36 Park Row, 4 Beekman, and 141 Nassau Street.
Park Building, New York. Entrances—36 Park Row, 4 Beekman, and 141 Nassau Street.
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.
Would call especial attention to their large variety of
Would like to draw particular attention to their wide range of
CASES,
CASES,
Embracing many Fancy Styles made only by themselves, and to which they are constantly adding New Designs.
Embracing a variety of unique styles created by themselves, to which they are always adding new designs.
Union Cases,
Of all sizes, with Riveted Hinges.
AGENTS FOR THE
SALE OF
C. C. HARRISON’S CAMERAS,
Union Cases,
Available in all sizes, featuring Riveted Hinges.
AGENTS FOR THE
SALE OF
C. C. HARRISON’S CAMERAS,
with improvements, which we are now prepared to sell at reduced prices, and warranted to give better satisfaction than ever before DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES, H. B.—N. P.—Star and other brands PLATE GLASS, embracing three-quarters white: Crown and all other varieties. We would call particular attention to our Black Glass, made expressly for Ambrotypes.
with improvements, which we are now ready to sell at lower prices, guaranteed to provide better satisfaction than ever before DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES, H. B.—N. P.—Star and other brands PLATE GLASS, including three-quarters white: Crown and all other types. We want to draw special attention to our Black Glass, made specifically for Ambrotypes.
CHEMICALS,
for the Daguerreotype and Photographic Art.
Iodized
and Plain COLLODION. Gun Cotton, etc., etc.
Tagliabue’s
Collodiometres and Actino-Hydrometres, for
testing Chemicals.
CHEMICALS,
for the Daguerreotype and Photographic Art.
Iodized
and Plain COLLODION. Gun Cotton, etc., etc.
Tagliabue’s
Collodiometers and Actino-Hydrometers, for
testing Chemicals.
APPARATUS OF EVERY VARIETY.
ALL TYPES OF EQUIPMENT.
Gutta Percha, Porcelain, and Glassware of all kinds used in the Art.
Gutta Percha, porcelain, and glassware of all kinds used in the art.
A large assortment of Gilt Frames always on hand and made to order.
A wide variety of Gilt Frames available in stock and made to order.
Ambrotype Shields, with solid corners of a new style.
Ambrotype Shields, featuring sturdy corners in a fresh design.
All orders will meet with prompt attention
All orders will receive prompt attention.
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.,
PARK BUILDINGM
New York
36 Park
Row, 4 Beckman, and
141 Nassau Street.
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.,
PARK BUILDING
New York
36 Park Row, 4 Beckman, and
141 Nassau Street.
HARDWICH’S PHOTOGRAPHIC CHEMISTRY
AMERICAN EDITION.
A MANUAL of
PHOTOGRAPHIC CHEMISTRY,
INCLUDING THE PRACTICE
OF THE COLLODION PROCESS.
A MANUAL of
PHOTOGRAPHIC CHEMISTRY,
INCLUDING THE PRACTICE
OF THE COLLODION PROCESS.
BY
BY
T. FREDERICK HARDWICH,
T. Frederick Hardwich,
LECTURER ON PHOTOGRAPHY IN KINGS COLLEGE, LONDON;
LATE DEMONSTRATOR
OF CHEMISTRY IN KING’S COLLEGE.
LECTURER ON PHOTOGRAPHY AT KING'S COLLEGE, LONDON;
FORMER DEMONSTRATOR OF CHEMISTRY AT KING'S COLLEGE.
Last Edition,
Last Update,
The above is the title of this new and valuable work. It is too well known to need any further comment in this place. This volume contains nearly 300 large duodecimo pages, bound in red cloth, $1.00. Copies to be forwarded by mail, $1.18, postage pre-paid.
The above is the title of this new and valuable work. It is so well known that no further comment is needed here. This volume has almost 300 large duodecimo pages, bound in red cloth, for $1.00. Copies will be sent by mail for $1.18, with postage paid.
S. D. HUMPHREY,
Photographic
Book Publisher,
37 LISPENARD
STREET, NEW YORK,
S. D. HUMPHREY,
Photographic
Book Publisher,
37 LISPENARD
STREET, NEW YORK,
N.B. Postage stamps taken.
N.B. Stamps taken.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!